Owner's Manual

XC60 Owner's Manual

WEB EDITION

WELCOME TO THE WORLD-WIDE FAMILY OF VOLVO OWNERS. We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe any impairment that could hinder your ability to driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed drive. with your safety and comfort in mind. We encour- Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable fed- age you to familiarize yourself with the equipment eral safety and emission standards. If you have descriptions and operating instructions in this any questions regarding your vehicle, please con- manual. tact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Con- We also urge you and your passengers to wear tacting Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction" seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle. chapter for information on getting in touch with And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if Volvo in the United States and Canada. you may be affected by alcohol, medication or Contents

00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Locks and alarm Important information...... 6 Occupant safety...... 16 Remote key and key blade...... 58 Environment...... 12 Reporting safety defects...... 17 Keyless drive...... 67 Important warnings...... 13 Seat belts ...... 18 Locks...... 70 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .... 21 Alarm...... 73 Occupant Weight Sensor ...... 26 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ..... 30 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...... 32 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS..... 33 Rollover Protection System (ROPS) ...... 35 Crash mode...... 36 Child safety...... 38 Child restraint systems...... 41 Infant seats...... 43 Convertible seats...... 45 Booster cushions...... 47 00 ISOFIX/LATCH01 lower anchors...... 48 02 Top tether anchors...... 50 Integrated booster cushion*...... 51 Child safety locks...... 54

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

03 Your driving environment 04 Driver support 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Instruments and controls...... 78 Stability system...... 142 Volvo Sensus...... 198 Ignition modes...... 88 Road sign information (RSI)* ...... 145 Menus and messages...... 199 Seats...... 90 Cruise control...... 147 The MY CAR menus...... 201 Steering wheel...... 97 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*...... 149 Climate system...... 207 Lighting...... 99 Distance Alert* ...... 160 Trip computer...... 216 Wipers and washers...... 107 City Safety™ ...... 163 Active chassis system–Four C*...... 223 Windows...... 110 Collision warning with Full Auto-brake Passenger compartment convenience... 224 Mirrors...... 112 and Pedestrian Detection*...... 169 Digial compass*...... 115 Driver Alert System* ...... 177 Laminated panoramic roof*...... 117 Park assist*...... 183 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ...... 187 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*.... 120 Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)* .. 191 Starting the engine...... 123 Transmission...... 128 Eco Guide* and Power Meter*...... 132 Brakes...... 134 Parking03 brake...... 137 04 05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3 Contents

06 Infotainment 07 During your trip 08 Wheels and tires Introduction...... 230 Driving recommendations...... 274 General information ...... 298 Radio...... 240 Refueling...... 278 Tire inflation...... 301 Media player...... 249 Loading...... 283 Inflation pressure ...... 303 AUX/USB sockets...... 254 Cargo area ...... 287 Tire designations ...... 304 Bluetooth® media ...... 257 Towing a trailer...... 290 Glossary of tire terminology ...... 306 Bluetooth® hands-free connection ...... 259 Emergency towing...... 293 Vehicle loading ...... 307 Cell phone voice control*...... 268 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 309 Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires . 310 Temporary Spare ...... 311 Tire Sealing System*...... 312 Changing a wheel ...... 318 06 07 Tire08 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 322

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

09 Maintenance and 10 Specifications 11 Index specifications Label information...... 366 Index...... 378 Volvo maintenance...... 328 Specifications...... 368 Maintaining your car...... 329 Overview of information and warning Hood and engine compartment...... 331 symbols...... 374 Engine oil...... 332 Volvo programs...... 377 Fluids...... 334 Replacing bulbs...... 336 Wiper blades and washer fluid...... 343 Battery...... 346 Fuses...... 350 Vehicle09 care...... 359 10 11

5 Introduction

Important information

Contacting Volvo About this manual Decals In the USA: There are various types of decals in the vehi- • Before you operate your vehicle for the cle whose purpose is to provide important first time, please familiarize yourself with Volvo Cars of North America, LLC information in a clear and concise way. The the information found in the chapters Customer Care Center importance of these decals is explained as "Your Driving Environment" and "During follows, in descending order of importance. 1 Volvo Drive, Your Trip." Risk of injury P.O. Box 914 • Information contained in the balance of the manual is extremely useful and should Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 be read after operating the vehicle for the 1-800-458-1552 first time. www.volvocars.com/us • The manual is structured so that it can be used for reference. For this reason, it In Canada: should be kept in the vehicle for ready access. Volvo Cars of Canada Footnotes National Customer Service Certain pages of this manual contain informa- 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the page. This information supplements the Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 text that the footnote number refers to (a let- 1-800-663-8255 ter is used if the footnote refers to text in a table). G031590 www.volvocars.com/ca Display texts Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back- There are several displays in the driver’s field ground, white text/image on a black back- of vision that show messages generated by ground. Decals of this type are used to indi- various systems and functions in the vehicle. cate potential danger. Ignoring a warning of These texts are indicated in the Owner’s this type could result in serious injury or Manual by being in slightly larger type than death. the surrounding text and are printed in gray, (for example: Change doors unlock setting).

6 Introduction

Important information

Risk of damage to the vehicle Information Types of lists used in the manual Procedures Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or actions that must be carried out in a certain order, are arranged in numbered lists in this manual. If there is a series of illustrations associated with step-by-step instructions, each step in the procedure is numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration. Lists in which letters are used can be found with series of illustrations in cases G031592 G031593 where the order in which the instructions are carried out is not important. White ISO symbols and white text/image on a White ISO symbols and white text/image on a Arrows with or without numbers are used black or blue warning background and space black background. These decals provide gen- to indicate the direction of a movement. for a message. If the information on decals of eral information. this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle Arrows containing letters are used to indi- could result. NOTE cate movement. If there are no illustrations associated with a The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure are examples only and are not intended to be reproductions of the decals actually are indicated by ordinary numbers. used in the vehicle. The purpose is to give Position lists an indication of how they look and their Red circles containing a number are used approximate location in the vehicle. The in general overview illustrations in which applicable information for your particular vehicle can be found on the respective certain components are pointed out. The decals in the vehicle. corresponding number is also used in the position list's description of the various components.

7 Introduction

Important information

Bullet lists NOTE WARNING Bullets are used to differentiate a number of CALIFORNIA proposition 65 components/functions/points of information • All information, illustrations and speci- that can be listed in random order. fications contained in this manual are Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, based on the latest product informa- and certain vehicle components contain or For example: tion available at the time of publica- emit chemicals known to the state of Cali- • Coolant tion. fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, • Engine oil • Volvo reserves the right to make model changes at any time, or to change certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear con- specifications or design without notice Continued tain or emit chemicals known to the State } }This symbol can be found at the lower and without incurring obligation. of California to cause cancer, and birth right corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) • Do not export your Volvo to another defects or other reproductive harm. page to indicate that the current topic is con- country before investigating that coun- tinued on the following page. try's applicable safety and emission control requirements. In some cases it WARNING Options and accessories may be difficult or impossible to com- Certain components of this vehicle such as Optional or accessory equipment described ply with these requirements. Modifica- air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, in this manual is indicated by an asterisk. tions to the emission control system(s) adaptive steering columns, and button cell may render your Volvo not certifiable batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Optional or accessory equipment may not be for legal operation in the U.S., Canada Special handling may apply for service or available in all countries or markets. Please and other countries. vehicle end of life disposal. note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ ferently, depending on special legal require- perchlorate. ments. WARNING Contact your Volvo retailer for additional If your vehicle is involved in an accident, information. unseen damage may affect its drivability and safety.

8 Introduction

Important information

Shiftlock these requirements. Modifications to the tems for a short period of time, typically 30 When your vehicle is parked, the gear selec- emission control system(s) may render seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is tor is locked in the P (Park) position. To your Volvo not certifiable for legal opera- designed to record such data as: release the selector from this position, the tion in the U.S., Canada and other countries. • How various systems in your vehicle were ignition must be in mode II (see page 88) or operating; the engine must be running. Depress the • All information, illustrations and specifica- Whether or not the driver and passenger brake pedal, press the button on the front tions contained in this manual are based • safety belts were buckled/fastened; side of the gear selector and move the selec- on the latest product information availa- tor from P (Park). ble at the time of publication. Please note • How far (if at all) the driver was depress- that some vehicles may be equipped dif- ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ferently, depending on special legal and, The ABS system performs a brief self-diag- requirements. Optional equipment descri- • How fast the vehicle was traveling. nostic test when the engine has been started bed in this manual may not be available in These data can help provide a better under- and driver releases the brake pedal. Another all markets. standing of the circumstances in which automatic test may be performed when the • Some of the illustrations shown are crashes and injuries occur. vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately generic and may not depict the exact 6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate model for which this manual is intended. NOTE several times and a sound may be audible • Volvo reserves the right to make model from the ABS control module. This is normal. changes at any time, or to change speci- EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; Fuel filler door fications or design without notice and without incurring obligation. no data are recorded by the EDR under Press the button on the light switch panel normal driving conditions and no personal (see the illustration on page 280) when the data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash vehicle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler Crash event data location) are recorded. However, other door. It will relock when closed and there will This vehicle is equipped with an event data parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of be an audible click. recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR personally identifying data routinely is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like acquired during a crash investigation. Points to keep in mind situations, such as an air bag deployment or • Do not export your Volvo to another hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in To read data recorded by an EDR, special country before investigating that coun- understanding how a vehicle's systems per- equipment is required, and access to the try's applicable safety and exhaust emis- formed. The EDR is designed to record data vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to sion requirements. In some cases it may related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys- be difficult or impossible to comply with

9 Introduction

Important information

the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such to read and interpret the information stored Volvo Structural Parts Statement as law enforcement, that have the special by the vehicle’s computers. Volvo is responsi- Volvo has always been and continues to be a equipment, can read the information if they ble for ensuring that the information transmit- leader in automotive safety. Volvo engineers have access to the vehicle or the EDR. ted to Volvo during service and maintenance and manufactures vehicles designed to help is stored and handled in a secure manner and Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a protect vehicle occupants in the event of a that this handling is done in accordance with number of computers whose task is to con- collision. applicable legal requirements. For additional tinuously control and monitor the vehicle’s information, contact: Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of operation. They can also register information a collision. This energy absorption system during normal driving conditions if they detect For additional information, contact: including, but not limited to, structural com- a fault relating to the vehicle’s operation and In the United States ponents such as bumper reinforcement bars, functionality. Some of the stored information bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, is required by technicians when carrying out Volvo Cars of North America, LLC fender aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body service and maintenance to enable them to Customer Care Center panels must work together to maintain cabin diagnose and rectify any faults that have integrity and protect the vehicle occupants. occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to 1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914 The supplemental restraint system including fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements. Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 This information may be stored in the vehi- but not limited to air bags, side curtain air cle’s computers for a certain period of time. 1-800-458-1552 bags, and deployment sensors work together www.volvocars.com/us with the above components to provide proper Volvo will not contribute to spreading the timing for air bag deployment. above-mentioned information to third parties In Canada without the consent of the vehicle’s owner. Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North Amer- However, due to national legal requirements Volvo Cars of Canada ica does not support the use of aftermarket, and regulations, Volvo may be compelled to alternative or anything other than original National Customer Service provide information of this type to authorities Volvo parts for collision repair. such as law enforcement agencies or others 9130 Leslie Street In addition Volvo does not support the use or who may assert a legal right to obtain such Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 re-use of structural components from an information. existing vehicle that has been previously 1-800-663-8255 Volvo and service and repair facilities with damaged. Although these parts may appear agreements with Volvo have access to the www.volvocars.com/ca equivalent, it is difficult to tell if the parts have special technical equipment required in order been previously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part has been damaged as a result of

10 Introduction

Important information a prior collision. The quality of these used disclaimers and notices. The links how to GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old- parts may also have been affected due to access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3, licenses/gpl-2.0.html environmental exposure. LGPLv3, and the other open source software • Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and 2.6.31 kernel and kernel from Information on the Internet notices are provided to you below. Please L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP) refer to the exact terms of the relevant Additional information about your vehicle is License, regarding your rights under said • uBoot (based on v2009.08) available at www.volvocars.com. licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers • busybox (based on version 1.13.2.) In order to read a QR code, a QR reader is to provide the source code of said free/open GCC runtime library exception: http:// necessary, which is available as an app for a source software to you for a charge covering www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html number of different cell phones and can be the cost of performing such distribution, such libgcc_s.so.1 downloaded from the App Store or Google as the cost of media, shipping and handling, • Play. upon written request. Please contact your LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/ nearest Volvo retailer. lgpl.html This offer is valid for a period of at least three • Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1 (3) years from the date of the distribution of The FreeType Project License: http:// this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT offers spare parts or customer support. • libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3) Portions of this product uses software QR code copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights Open Source Software Notice reserved. This product uses certain free / open source This product includes software under and other software originating from third following licenses: parties, that is subject to the GNU General Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/ GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project License (“FreeType License”) and other different and/or additional copyright licenses,

11 Introduction

Environment

Volvo and the environment trols and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer FSC® Volvo is committed to the well being of its to our goal. In addition to continuous environ- customers. As a natural part of this commit- mental refinement of conventional gasoline- ment, we care about the environment in powered internal combustion engines, Volvo which we all live. Caring for the environment is actively looking at advanced technology means an everyday involvement in reducing alternative-fuel vehicles. our environmental impact. Volvo's environmental activities are based on a holistic view, When you drive a Volvo, you become our which means we consider the overall environ- partner in the work to lessen the car's impact mental impact of a product throughout its on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's complete life cycle. In this context, design, environmental impact, you can: ® ® production, product use, and recycling are all • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. The FSC (Forest Stewardship Council ) important considerations. In production, Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- symbol indicates that the wood pulp used in Volvo has partly or completely phased out omy with improperly inflated tires. this publication comes from FSC® certified forests and other responsible sources. several chemicals including CFCs, lead chro- • Follow the recommended maintenance mates, asbestos, and cadmium; and reduced schedule in your Warranty and Service the number of chemicals used in our Records Information booklet. plants 50% since 1991. • Drive at a constant speed whenever pos- Volvo was the first in the world to introduce sible. into production a three-way catalytic con- • See a trained and qualified Volvo service verter with a Lambda sond, now called the technician as soon as possible for heated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current inspection if the check engine (malfunc- version of this highly efficient system reduces tion indicator) light illuminates, or stays emissions of harmful substances (CO, HC, on after the vehicle has started. NOx) from the exhaust pipe by approximately • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related 95 – 99% and the search to eliminate the waste such as used motor oil, used bat- remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the teries, brake pads, etc. only automobile manufacturer to offer CFC- When cleaning your vehicle, please use free retrofit kits for the air conditioning system • genuine Volvo car care products. All of all models as far back as the 1975 Volvo car care products are formulated to model 240. Advanced electronic engine con- be environmentally friendly.

12 Introduction

Important warnings

Driver distraction cellular telephone use by a driver while • Accessories that have not been approved A driver has a responsibility to do everything the vehicle is moving. by Volvo may or may not be specifically possible to ensure his or her own safety and • If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga- tested for compatibility with your vehicle. the safety of passengers in the vehicle and tion system, set and make changes to Additionally, an inexperienced installer may not be familiar with some of your others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distrac- your travel itinerary only with the vehicle car's systems. tions is part of that responsibility. parked. • Never program your audio system while • Any of your car's performance and safety Driver distraction results from driver activities systems could be adversely affected if that are not directly related to controlling the the vehicle is moving. Program radio presets with the vehicle parked, and use you install accessories that Volvo has not vehicle in the driving environment. Your new your programmed presets to make radio tested, or if you allow accessories to be Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea- use quicker and simpler. installed by someone unfamiliar with your ture-rich entertainment and communication vehicle. • Never use portable computers or per- systems. These include hands-free cellular • Damage caused by unapproved or telephones, navigation systems, and multi- sonal digital assistants while the vehicle is moving. improperly installed accessories may not purpose audio systems. You may also own be covered by your new vehicle warranty. other portable electronic devices for your own See your Warranty and Service Records convenience. When used properly and safely, Accessory installation Information booklet for more warranty they enrich the driving experience. Improperly • We strongly recommend that Volvo own- information. Volvo assumes no responsi- used, any of these could cause a distraction. ers install only genuine, Volvo-approved bility for death, injury, or expenses that For all of these systems, we want to provide accessories, and that accessory installa- may result from the installation of non- the following warning that reflects the strong tions be performed only by a trained and genuine accessories. Volvo concern for your safety. Never use qualified Volvo service technician. these devices or any feature of your vehicle in • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to a way that distracts you from the task of driv- ensure compatibility with the performing safely. Distraction can lead to a serious ance, safety, and emission systems in accident. In addition to this general warning, your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and we offer the following guidance regarding qualified Volvo service technician knows specific newer features that may be found in where accessories may and may not be your vehicle: safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained and qualified • Never use a hand-held cellular telephone Volvo service technician before installing while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit any accessory in or on your vehicle.

13 Occupant safety...... 16 Reporting safety defects...... 17 Seat belts ...... 18 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...... 21 Occupant Weight Sensor ...... 26 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ...... 30 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...... 32 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS...... 33 Rollover Protection System (ROPS) ...... 35 Crash mode...... 36 Child safety...... 38 Child restraint systems...... 41 Infant seats...... 43 Convertible seats...... 45 Booster cushions...... 47 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors...... 48 Top tether anchors...... 50 Integrated booster cushion*...... 51 Child safety locks...... 54

14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY 01 Safety

01 Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety • Never drink and drive. Volvo customers in Canada Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern • If you are taking any medication, consult For any questions regarding open recalls for dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled your physician about its potential effects your vehicle, please contact your authorized off the production line. Three-point seat belts on your driving abilities. Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to (a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy- • Take a driver-retraining course. answer your questions, please contact Volvo absorbing impact zones were designed into Customer Relations at 905 695-9626, Mon- • Have your eyes checked regularly. Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. or required by government regulation. • Keep your windshield and headlights EST or by e-mail at [email protected]. clean. You may also write us at: We will not compromise our commitment to Replace wiper blades when they start to safety. We continue to seek out new safety • Volvo Cars of Canada leave streaks. features and to refine those already in our National Customer Service vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate • Take into account the traffic, road, and hearing your suggestions about improving weather conditions, particularly with 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 regard to stopping distance. automobile safety. We also want to know if Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 you ever have a safety concern with your • Never send text messages while driving. vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at: • Refrain from using or minimize the use of 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: a cell phone while driving. 1-800-663-8255. Occupant safety reminders Recall information How safely you drive doesn't depend on how Information regarding recalls or other service old you are but rather on: campaigns is available on our website at www.volvocars.com/us/. Select the tab • How well you see. YOUR VOLVO and the heading RECALL • Your ability to concentrate. INFORMATION will be displayed at the lower • How quickly you make decisions under left side of the screen. Enter your Vehicle stress to avoid an accident. Identification Number for your vehicle (found The following suggestions are intended to at the base of the windshield). If your vehicle help you cope with the ever changing traffic has any open Recalls, they will be displayed environment. on this page.

16 01 Safety

Reporting safety defects 01

Reporting safety defects in the U.S. You can also obtain other informa- Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a tion about motor vehicle safety from: If you believe your vehicle has a defect that defect which could cause a crash or could cause a crash or could cause injury or http://www.safercar.gov death, you should immediately inform Trans- could cause injury or death, you Volvo strongly recommends that if port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo should immediately inform the Cars of Canada Corp. your vehicle is covered under a National Highway Traffic Safety Transport Canada can be contacted at: Administration (NHTSA) in addition service campaign, safety or emis- to notifying Volvo Cars of North sion recall or similar action, it should 1-800-333-0510 America, LLC. If NHTSA receives be completed as soon as possible. Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 similar complaints, it may open an Please check with your local retailer Fax: 1-819-994-3372 or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC investigation, and if it finds that a Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road safety defect exists in a group of if your vehicle is covered under Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z vehicles, it may order a recall and these conditions. 0A1 remedy campaign. However, NHTSA NHTSA can be reached at: cannot become involved in individ- Internet: ual problems between you, your retailer, or Volvo Cars of North http://www.nhtsa.gov America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, Telephone: you may either call the Auto Safety 1-888-DASH-2-DOT Hotline toll-free at (1-888-327-4236). 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- portation, Washington D.C. 20590.

17 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

General information belts also include a tension reducing device NOTE which, in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces exerted by the seat belt on the Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) occupant. is equipped with the ALR/ELR function, which is designed to help keep the seat Fastening a seat belt belt taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is pulled out as far as possible. If this is Buckling done, a sound from the seat belt retractor Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch will be audible, which is normal, and the plate into the receptacle until a distinct click seat belt will be pulled taut and locked in is heard. The seat belt retractor is normally place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unbuckled and "unlocked" and you can move freely, provi- fully retracted. ded that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far. See also page 39 for information about Adjusting the seat belt Seat belt retractor using a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to The seat belt retractor will lock up in the Seat belts should always be worn by all occu- anchor a child seat. following situations: pants of your vehicle. Children should be When wearing the seat belt remember: properly restrained, using an infant, car, or • if the belt is pulled out rapidly • The belt should not be twisted or turned. booster seat determined by age, weight and • during braking and acceleration height. • The lap section of the belt must be posi- • if the vehicle is leaning excessively tioned low on the hips (not pressing Volvo also believes no child should sit in the • when driving in turns against the abdomen). front seat of a vehicle. • if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- • Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled Most states and provinces make it mandatory gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is up into its retractor and that the shoulder for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. activated and lap belts are taut. Seat belt pretensioners Unbuckling the seat belt All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners To remove the seat belt, press the red section that reduce slack in the belts. These preten- on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the sioners are triggered in situations where the vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully front or side impact airbags deploy, and in after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the certain impacts from the rear. The front seat belt back into the retractor slot.

18 01 Safety

Seat belts 01

Seat belt maintenance WARNING Seat belt reminder Check periodically that the seat belts are in good condition. Use water and a mild deter- • Never repair the belt yourself; have this gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism work done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on the strap. • Any device used to induce slack into the shoulder belt portion of the three- WARNING point belt system will have a detrimen- tal effect on the amount of protection Never use a seat belt for more than one available to you in the event of a colli- occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion sion. of the belt under the arm, behind the back or otherwise out of position. Such use • The seat back should not be tilted too could cause injury in the event of an acci- far back. The shoulder belt must be G017726 taut in order to function properly. dent. As seat belts lose much of their Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console strength when exposed to violent stretch- • Do not use child safety seats or child ing, they should be replaced after any col- booster cushions/backrests in the The seat belt reminder consists of an audible lision, even if they appear to be undam- front passenger's seat. We also rec- signal, an indicator light near the rearview aged. ommend that children who have out- mirror and a symbol in the instrument panel grown these devices sit in the rear that alert all occupants of the vehicle to fas- seat with the seat belt properly fasten their seat belts. The audible signal and tened. indicator light will be on for several seconds from the time the ignition is switched on, regardless of whether or not the seat belts are fastened.

If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and warning light will be active for a several seconds.

19 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

Rear seats Seat belt use during pregnancy should strive to position the seat with as large The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has a distance as possible between their belly two additional functions: and the steering wheel. • It provides information about which seat Child seats belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes- Please refer to page 41 for information on sage will appear in the information display securing child seats with the seat belts. when a belt is being used. This message will disappear after several seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button on the left steering wheel lever. • It also provides a reminder if one of the occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled G020998 his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. A visual and audible signal will be The seat belt should always be worn during given. These signals will stop when the seat belt has been re-buckled or can be pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in stopped by pressing the OK button. the correct way. The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed • The message Unbelted in rear seat will between the breasts and to the side of the appear in the information display if one of belly. The lap section should lay flat over the the rear doors has been opened. thighs and as low as possible under the belly. The message in the information display can It must never be allowed to ride upward. always be accessed, even if it has been Remove all slack from the belt and ensure erased, by pressing the OK button to display that it fits close to the body without any stored messages. twists. As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). Within this context, they

20 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

General information consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air- WARNING bags, side impact airbags, a front passenger occupant weight sensor, and inflatable cur- • If the SRS warning light stays on after tains. All of these systems are monitored by the engine has started or if it illumi- the SRS control module. An SRS warning nates while you are driving, have the light in the instrument panel (see the illustra- vehicle inspected by a trained and tion) illuminates when the ignition is in modes qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. I or II, and will normally go out after approximately 6 seconds if no faults are detected in • Never try to repair any component or the system. part of the SRS yourself. Any interference in the system could cause mal- Where applicable, a text message will also be function and serious injury. All work on displayed when the SRS warning light illumi- these systems should be performed by nates. If this warning symbol is not function- a trained and qualified Volvo service Models with an analog instrument panel ing properly, the general warning symbol illu- technician. minates and a text message will be displayed. See also page 81 for more information about indicator and warning lights.

Models with an digital instrument panel* As an enhancement to the three-point seat belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple- mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

WARNING Front airbags If your vehicle has become flood-damaged in any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle), do not attempt to start the vehicle or insert the remote key into the ignition slot before disconnecting the battery (see below). This may cause airbag deployment which could result in serious injury. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for repairs. Before attempting to tow the vehicle: G018665 1. Switch off the ignition for at least Location of the passenger's side front airbag 10 minutes and disconnect the bat- As the movement of the seats' occupants tery. The front airbag system compresses the airbags, some of the gas is 2. Follow the instructions for manually The front airbags supplement the three-point expelled at a controlled rate to provide better overriding the shiftlock system on seat belts. For these airbags to provide the cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also page 131. protection intended, seat belts must be worn deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire at all times. process, including inflation and deflation of The front airbag system includes gas genera- the airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera- second. tion sensors that activate the gas generators, The location of the front airbags is indicated causing the airbags to be inflated with nitro- by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering gen gas. wheel pad and above the glove compartment, and by decals on both sun visors and on the front and far right side of the dash. The driver's side front airbag is folded and located in the steering wheel hub.

22 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

The passenger's side front airbag is folded Front airbag deployment WARNING behind a panel located above the glove com- • The front airbags are designed to deploy partment. during certain frontal or front-angular col- • Do not use child safety seats or child lisions, impacts, or decelerations, booster cushions/backrests in the WARNING depending on the crash severity, angle, front passenger's seat. We also rec- speed and object impacted. The airbags ommend that occupants under 4 feet • The airbags in the vehicle are designed may also deploy in certain non-frontal 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a collisions where rapid deceleration outgrown these devices sit in the rear replacement for–the three-point seat occurs. seat with the seat belt fastened1. belts. For maximum protection, wear The SRS sensors, which trigger the front • Never drive with the airbags deployed. seat belts at all times. Be aware that • airbags, are designed to react to both the The fact that they hang out can impair no system can prevent all possible impact of the collision and the inertial the steering of your vehicle. Other injuries that may occur in an accident. forces generated by it, and to determine if safety systems can also be damaged. • Never drive with your hands on the the intensity of the collision is sufficient • The smoke and dust formed when the steering wheel pad/airbag housing. for the seat belt pretensioners and/or air- airbags are deployed can cause skin • The front airbags are designed to help bags to be deployed. and eye irritation in the event of pro- prevent serious injury. Deployment However, not all frontal collisions activate the longed exposure. occurs very quickly and with consider- front airbags. able force. During normal deployment Should you have questions about any com- and depending on variables such as • If the collision involves a nonrigid object ponent in the SRS system, please contact a seating position, one may experience (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other fixed object at a low speed, the front air- trained and qualified Volvo service technician injuries as a result from deployment of bags will not necessarily deploy. or Volvo customer support: one or both of the airbags. • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a In the USA side impact collision, in a collision from • When installing any accessory equip- Volvo Cars of North America, LLC ment, make sure that the front airbag the rear or in a rollover situation. system is not damaged. Any interfer- • The amount of damage to the bodywork Customer Care Center ence in the system could cause mal- does not reliably indicate if the airbags 1 Volvo Drive function. should have deployed or not. P.O. Box 914

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 26.

23 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 NOTE Airbag decals 1-800-458-1552 • Deployment of front airbags occurs www.volvocars.com/us only one time during an accident. In a collision where deployment occurs, In Canada the airbags and seat belt pretensioners Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. activate. Some noise occurs and a small amount of powder is released. National Customer Service The release of the powder may appear 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 as smoke-like matter. This is a normal characteristic and does not indicate

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 fire. G008335 1-800-663-8255 • Volvo's front airbags use special sen- Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors www.volvocars.com/ca sors that are integrated with the front seat buckles. The point at which the airbag deploys is determined by whether or not the seat belt is being used, as well as the severity of the collision. • Collisions can occur where only one of the airbags deploys. If the impact is less severe, but severe enough to present a clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is more severe, the airbags are triggered at full capacity. Passenger's side airbag decal

24 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

WARNING WARNING • Children must never be allowed in the • No objects or accessory equipment, front passenger's seat. e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed • Occupants in the front passenger's on, attached to, or installed near the seat must never sit on the edge of the air bag hatch (the area above the glove seat, sit leaning toward the instrument compartment) or the area affected by panel or otherwise sit out of position. airbag deployment (see the illustration on page 22). • The occupant's back must be as upright as comfort allows and be • There should be no loose articles, against the seat back with the seat such as coffee cups on the floor, seat, belt properly fastened. or dashboard area. • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on • Never try to open the airbag cover on the dash, seat or out of the window. the steering wheel or the passenger's side dashboard. This should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

25 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor

General information The OWS works with sensors that are part of front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the sensors are designed to detect the presence overhead console, near the base of the rear- of a properly seated occupant and determine view mirror. if the passenger's side front airbag should be 2 enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not NOTE inflate). When the ignition is switched on, the OWS The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas- indicator light will go on for up to 10 sec- senger's side front airbag when: onds while the system performs a self- diagnostic test. • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, 2 or has small/medium objects in the front

G017724 seat, However, if a fault is detected in the system: The OWS indicator light will stay on Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light • the system determines that an infant is • present in a rear-facing infant seat that is • The SRS warning light (see page 21) will Disabling the passenger's side front installed according to the manufacturer's come on and stay on instructions, airbag • The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service Volvo recommends that ALL occupants • the system determines that a small child urgent will be displayed in the informa- (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet is present in a forward-facing child tion display. 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat restraint that is installed according to the of any vehicle with a front passenger side air- manufacturer's instructions, WARNING bag, and be properly restrained for their size • the system determines that a small child and weight. For child safety recommenda- is present in a booster seat, If a fault in the system is detected and tions,see page 39. indicated as described, be aware that the • a front passenger takes his/her weight off passenger's side front airbag will not The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is of the seat for a period of time, deploy in the event of a collision. In this designed to meet the regulatory requirements • a child or a small person occupies the case, the SRS system and Occupant of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard front passenger's seat. Weight Sensor should be inspected by a (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will trained and qualified Volvo service techni- The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF cian as soon as possible. not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay under certain conditions. on to remind you that the passenger's side

26 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

WARNING Passeng- OWS Passeng- AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off. • Never try to open, remove, or repair er's seat indicator er's side any components in the OWS system. occu- light sta- front air- If a person of adult size is sitting in the front This could result in system malfunc- pancy status bag status passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR- tion. Maintenance or repairs should tus BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible only be carried out by an a trained and that the person isn't sitting properly in the qualified Volvo service technician. Seat unoc- OWS indi- Passenger's seat. If this happens: cupied cator light side front air- The front passenger's seat should not • lights up. bag disabled • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to be modified in any way. This could place the seatback in an upright position. reduce pressure on the seat cushion, Seat occu- OWS indi- Passenger's • Have the person sit upright in the seat, which might interfere with the OWS pied by low cator light side front air- centered on the seat cushion, with the system's function. weight lights up bag disabled person's legs comfortably extended. occupant/ • Restart the vehicle and have the person A object remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to Seat occu- OWS indi- Passenger's detect that person and enable the pas- pied by cator light side front air- senger's frontal airbag. heavy occu- is not lit bag enabled pant/object • If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains on even after this, the A Volvo recommends that children always be properly person should be advised to ride in the restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is rear seat. disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly instal- This condition reflects limitations of the OWS led. If there is any doubt as to the status of the passeng- classification capability. It does not indicate er's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat. OWS malfunction.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) Modifications the passenger's side front airbag in the event If you are considering modifying your vehicle of a collision anytime the system senses that in any way to accommodate a disability, for a person of adult size is sitting properly in the example by altering or adapting the driver's front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER

27 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor

or front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag WARNING WARNING systems, please contact Volvo at: • No objects that add to the total weight • Keep the following points in mind with In the USA on the seat should be placed on the respect to the OWS system. Failure to Volvo Cars of North America, LLC front passenger's seat. If a child is follow these instructions could seated in the front passenger's seat adversely affect the system's function Customer Care Center with any additional weight, this extra and result in serious injury to the occu- 1 Volvo Drive weight could cause the OWS system pant of the front passenger's seat: to enable the airbag, which might P.O. Box 914 • The full weight of the front seat pas- cause it to deploy in the event of a col- senger should always be on the seat Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 lision, thereby injuring the child. cushion. The passenger should never 1-800-458-1552 • The seat belt should never be wrapped lift him/herself off the seat cushion around an object on the front pas- using the armrest in the door or the In Canada senger's seat. This could interfere with center console, by pressing the feet on the OWS system's function. the floor, by sitting on the edge of the Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. • The front passenger's seat belt should seat cushion, or by pressing against National Customer Service never be used in a way that exerts the backrest in a way that reduces pressure on the seat cushion. This 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 more pressure on the passenger than normal. This could increase the pres- could cause OWS to disable the front, Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 sure exerted on the weight sensor by a passenger's side airbag. 1-800-663-8255 child, and could result in the airbag being enabled, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child.

28 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

WARNING • Do not place any type of object on the front passenger's seat in such a way that jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs between the object and the front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 39). • No objects should be placed under the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.

29 01 Safety

01 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags

General information NOTE SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

Components in the SIPS airbag system This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas generator, the side airbag modules built into

G024377 the outboard sides of both front seat back-

G032949 rests, and electronic sensors/wiring. Driver's side SIPS airbag Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front seats only) As an enhancement to the structural side impact protection built into your vehicle, it is also equipped with Side Impact Protection System (SIPS) airbags. The SIPS airbag system is designed to help increase occupant protection in the event of certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during cer-

tain side-impact collisions, depending on the G024378 crash severity, angle, speed and point of Passenger's side SIPS airbag impact.

30 01 Safety

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags 01

WARNING • The SIPS airbag system is a supplement to the structural Side Impact Protection System and the three-point seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations. • The use of seat covers on the front seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment. • No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment. • Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident.

31 01 Safety

01 Inflatable Curtain (IC)

General information WARNING WARNING • The IC system is a supplement to the In order for the IC to provide its best pro- Side Impact Protection System. It is tection, both front seat occupants and not designed to deploy during colli- both outboard rear seat occupants should sions from the rear of the vehicle. sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened; adults using the seat • Never try to open or repair any compo- belt and children using the proper child nents of the IC system. This should be restraint system. Only adults should sit in done only by a trained and qualified the front seats. Children must never be Volvo service technician. allowed in the front passenger seat, see Never hang heavy items from the ceil- page 39 for guidelines. Failure to follow • these instructions can result in injury to the ing handles. This could impede vehicle occupants in an accident. deployment of the Inflatable Curtain. • The cargo area and rear seat should This system consists of inflatable curtains not be loaded to a level higher than located along the sides of the roof liners, 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of stretching from the center of both front side the rear side windows. Objects placed windows to the rear edge of the rear side higher than this level could impede the door windows. It is designed to help protect function of the Inflatable Curtain. the heads of the occupants of the front seats and the occupant of the outboard rear seating positions in certain side impact collisions. In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Curtain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag Sys- tem (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains inflated for approximately 3 seconds.

32 01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS 01

General information Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – WARNING front seats only Occupants in the front seats must The WHIPS system consists of specially • never sit out of position. The occu- designed hinges and brackets on the front pant's back must be as upright as seat backrests designed to help absorb some comfort allows and be against the seat of the energy generated in a collision from the back with the seat belt properly fas- rear (when the vehicle is rear-ended). tened. In the event of a collision of this type, the • If your vehicle has been involved in a hinges and brackets of the front seat back- rear-end collision, the front seat backrests are designed to change position slightly rests must be inspected by a trained to allow the backrest/head restraint to help and qualified Volvo service technician, support the occupant's head before moving even if the seats appear to be undam- slightly rearward. This movement helps aged. Certain components in the absorb some of the forces that could result in WHIPS system may need to be whiplash. replaced. • Do not attempt to service any compo- WARNING nent in the WHIPS system yourself. • The WHIPS system is designed to supplement the other safety systems in your vehicle. For this system to function properly, the three-point seat belt must be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. • The WHIPS system is designed to function in certain collisions from the rear, depending on the crash severity, angle and speed.

33 01 Safety

01 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS

WARNING WARNING • Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind Any contact between the front seat back- the front seats could impede the func- rests and the folded rear seat or a rear- tion of the WHIPS system. facing child seat could impede the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is • If the rear seat backrests are folded folded down, the occupied front seats down, cargo must be secured to pre- must be adjusted forward so that they do vent it from sliding forward against the not touch the folded rear seat. front seat backrests in the event of a collision from the rear. This could interfere with the action of the WHIPS system.

34 01 Safety

Rollover Protection System (ROPS) 01

Volvo’s Rollover Protection System utilizes the Roll Stability Control (RSC) function, which is designed to help minimize the risk of a rollover in emergency maneuvers or if a skid should occur. RSC uses a gyroscopic sensor that registers the amount of change in the lateral angle at which the vehicle is leaning. Using this information, RSC calculates the likelihood of a rollover. If there is an imminent risk of a rollover, the Dynamic Stability and Traction Con- trol system (DSTC) is activated, power to the engine is cut and the brakes are applied to one or more of the wheels until the vehicle regains stability. For additional information on DSTC, see page 142.

WARNING The vehicle’s stability systems, including ROPS and RSC, do not replace the driver’s responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to the current road, traffic and weather conditions. Posted speed limits should always be respected.

35 01 Safety

01 Crash mode

cates that the vehicle's functionality has been WARNING reduced. • Never attempt to repair the vehicle NOTE yourself or to reset the electrical system after the vehicle has displayed This text can only be shown if the display Safety mode See manual. This could is undamaged and the vehicle's electrical result in injury or improper system system is intact. function. • Restoring the vehicle to normal operat- Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if ing status should only be done by a one or more of the safety systems (e.g. front trained and qualified Volvo service or side airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or technician. more of the seat belt pretensioners) has Warning symbol: analog instrument panel • After Safety mode See manual has deployed. The collision may have damaged been displayed, if you detect the odor an important function in the vehicle, such as of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety leakage, do not attempt to start the systems, the brake system, etc. vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.

Attempting to start the vehicle If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the vehicle. To do so: 1. Remove the remote key from the ignition slot and open the driver's door. If a message is displayed that the ignition is on, Warning symbol: digital instrument panel* press the start button. Driving after a collision 2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, remote key in the ignition slot. the text Safety mode See manual may 3. Try to start the vehicle. appear in the information display. This indi-

36 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 01 Safety

Crash mode 01

If the message Safety mode See manual is still displayed, the vehicle should not be driven and must be towed. Concealed faults may make the vehicle difficult to control. Moving the vehicle If the message Normal mode is displayed when Safety mode See manual is no longer displayed, the vehicle may be moved carefully from its present position, if for example, it is blocking traffic. It should, however, not be moved farther than is absolutely necessary.

WARNING Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after Safety mode has been set, it should not be driven or towed (pulled by another vehicle). There may be concealed damage that could make it difficult or impossible to control. The vehicle should be transported on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection/repairs.

37 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Children should be seated safely the seat. Other occupants should also be injuries for both the infant or child and other Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint properly restrained to help reduce the chance occupants in the vehicle. of injuring or increasing the injury of a child. systems for all occupants including children. When a child has outgrown the child safety Remember that, regardless of age and size, a All states and provinces have legislation gov- seat, you should use the rear seat with the child should always be properly restrained in erning how and where children should be car- standard seat belt fastened. The best way to a vehicle. ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations help protect the child here is to place the Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ existing in your state or province. Recent child on a cushion so that the seat belt is LATCH attachments, which make it more accident statistics have shown that children properly located on the hips (see the illustra- convenient to install child seats. are safer in rear seating positions than front tion on page 47). Legislation in your state or seating positions when properly restrained. A province may mandate the use of a child seat Some restraint systems for children are child restraint system can help protect a child or cushion in combination with the seat belt, designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap in a vehicle. Here's what to look for when depending on the child's age and/or size. belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. selecting a child restraint system: Please check local regulations. Such child restraint systems can help protect children in vehicles in the event of an acci- It should have a label certifying that it meets A specially designed and tested booster dent only if they are used properly. However, applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety cushion and backrest can be obtained from children could be endangered in a crash if the Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, your Volvo retailer. CMVSS 213. child restraints are not properly secured in the USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. (15 – vehicle. Failure to follow the installation Make sure the child restraint system is 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) in instructions for your child restraint can result approved for the child's height, weight and height in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a development – the label required by the Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs. sudden stop. standard or regulation, or instructions for (18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – infant restraints, typically provide this infor- Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable 137 cm) in height substitute for a child restraint system. In an mation. accident, a child held in a person's arms can In using any child restraint system, we urge be crushed between the vehicle's interior and you to carefully look over the instructions that an unrestrained person. The child could also are provided with the restraint. Be sure you be injured by striking the interior, or by being understand them and can use the device ejected from the vehicle during a sudden properly and safely in this vehicle. A misused maneuver or impact. The same can also hap- child restraint system can result in increased pen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on

38 01 Safety

Child safety 01

WARNING When attaching the seat belt to a child Volvo's recommendations seat: Why does Volvo believe that no child should Do not use child safety seats or child • 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat sit in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple booster cushions/backrests in the according to the child seat manufactur- really. A front airbag is a very powerful device front passenger's seat. We also rec- er's instructions. ommend that children under 4 feet designed, by law, to help protect an adult. 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. Because of the size of the airbag and its outgrown these devices sit in the rear 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the speed of inflation, a child should never be seat with the seat belt fastened. buckle (lock) in the usual way. placed in the front seat, even if he or she is • On hot days, the temperature in the properly belted or strapped into a child safety vehicle interior can rise very quickly. 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut seat. Volvo has been an innovator in safety Exposure to these high temperatures around the child seat. for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue for even a short period of time can A sound from the seat belt retractor will be to do our part. But we need your help. Please cause heat-related injury or death. audible at this time and is normal. The belt remember to put your children in the back Small children are particularly at risk. will now be locked in place. This function is seat, and buckle them up. automatically disabled when the seat belt is Volvo has some very specific Child seat should always be registered. See unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. recommendations: page 40 for more information. Always wear your seat belt. WARNING • Automatic Locking Retractor/ • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety Do not use child safety seats or child device which, when used with a three- Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ booster cushions/backrests in the front point seat belt can help reduce serious ELR) passenger's seat. We also recommend injuries during certain types of accidents. that children who have outgrown these To make child seat installation easier, each Volvo recommends that you do not dis- devices sit in the rear seat with the seat seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip- belt properly fastened. connect the airbag system in your vehi- ped with a locking mechanism to help keep cle. the seat belt taut. • Volvo strongly recommends that every- one in the vehicle be properly restrained. • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back

39 01 Safety

01 Child safety

seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag. • Drive safely!

Child restraint registration and recalls Registering a child restraint Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay informed about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return the registration card that comes with new child restraints. Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393 or go to http://www- odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/recalls/ register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/ menu.htm.

40 01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

Child restraints G022847 G023269

G022840 Convertible seat Booster cushion Infant seat WARNING WARNING There are three main types of child restraint systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and A child seat should never be used in the Always refer to the child restraint manufac- booster cushions. They are classified accord- front passenger seat of any vehicle with a turer's instructions for detailed information ing to the child's age and size. front passenger airbag – not even if the on securing the restraint. "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the The following section provides general infor- rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles mation on securing a child restraint using a equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If three-point seat belt. Refer to page 48–50 the severity of an accident were to cause for information on securing a child restraint the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or position. top tether anchorages.

41 01 Safety

01 Child restraint systems

WARNING • When not in use, keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision. • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.

42 01 Safety

Infant seats 01

Securing an infant seat with a seat WARNING belt A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. G023270

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch G022844 plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng- WARNING er's seat • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing position only. NOTE • The infant seat should not be positioned Refer to page 48–50 for information on behind the driver's seat unless there is securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/ adequate space for safe installation. LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle.

2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat G023271 according to the manufacturer's instruc- Fasten the seat belt tions.

43 01 Safety

01 Infant seats G022846 G022850

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt Ensure that the seat is securely in place 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt 6. Push and pull the infant seat along the out as far as possible to activate the seat belt path to ensure that it is held belt's automatic locking function. securely in place by the seat belt.

NOTE WARNING The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child release when the seat belt is unbuckled restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. and allowed to retract fully. (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt path. 5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A The infant seat can be removed by unbuck- sound from the seat belt retractor's auto- ling the seat belt and letting it retract com- matic locking function will be audible at pletely. this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place.

44 01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

Securing a convertible seat with a WARNING seat belt • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. • Convertible child seats should be instal-

G022847 led in the rear seat only. Route the seat belt through the convertible seat • A rear-facing convertible seat should

G018630 not be positioned behind the driver's WARNING seat unless there is adequate space for Do not place the convertible seat in the front safe installation. passenger's seat Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the NOTE convertible seat manufacturer's recom- 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible mendations. seat according to the manufacturer's Refer to pages 48 and 50 for informa- instructions. tion on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat tether anchorages. of the vehicle.

Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child.

45 01 Safety

01 Convertible seats

this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. G022848 G022850

Fasten the seat belt Ensure that the seat is securely in place 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch G022849 plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt WARNING click is audible. 6. Push and pull the convertible seat along A child seat should never be used in the 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt the seat belt path to ensure that it is held front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the out as far as possible to activate the securely in place by the seat belt. "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the belt's automatic locking function. rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the WARNING severity of an accident were to cause the NOTE airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious It should not be possible to move the child injury or death to a child seated in this The locking retractor will automatically restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. position. release when the seat belt is unbuckled (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt and allowed to retract fully. path.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, The convertible seat can be removed by let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract sound from the seat belt retractor's auto- completely. matic locking function will be audible at

46 01 Safety

Booster cushions 01

Securing a booster cushion G022852

G022851 Positioning the seat belt Position the child correctly on the booster cush- 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut ion and fits snugly around the child. Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats. WARNING 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat • The hip section of the three-point seat of the vehicle. belt must fit snugly across the child's 2. With the child properly seated on the hips, not across the stomach. booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or • The shoulder section of the three-point around the cushion according to the seat belt should be positioned across manufacturer's instructions. the chest and shoulder. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch • The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct under the arm. click is audible.

47 01 Safety

01 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child 3. Fasten the attachment on the child seat anchors restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ LATCH/LATCH lower anchors. 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to

FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to G018631 the child restraint system's manual for weight and size ratings. Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors

Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped NOTE child seats are located in the rear, outboard • The rear seat's center position is not seats, hidden below the backrest cushions. equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark anchors. When installing a child the anchor positions as shown. To access the restraint in this position, attach the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion and locate restraint's top tether strap (if it is so the anchors by feel. Always follow your child equipped) to the top tether anchorage seat manufacturer's installation instructions, point and secure the restraint with the and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors vehicle's center seat belt. and top tethers whenever possible. • Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and To access the anchors use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 1. Put the child restraint in position. and top tethers whenever possible. 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel.

48 01 Safety

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 01

WARNING • Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly to the anchor (see the illustration). If the attachment is not correctly fastened, the child restraint may not be properly secured in the event of a collision. • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint anchors are only intended for use with child seats positioned in the outboard seating positions. These anchors are not certified for use with any child restraint that is positioned in the center seating position. When securing a child restraint in the center seating position, use only the vehicle's center seat belt.

49 01 Safety

01 Top tether anchors

Child restraint anchorages 4. Firmly tension all straps. WARNING Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's • Always refer to the recommendations instructions for information on securing the made by the child restraint manufac- child seat. turer. • Volvo recommends that the top tether NOTE anchors be used when installing a forward-facing child restraint. On models equipped with the optional cargo area cover, this cover should be • Never route a top tether strap over the removed before a child seat is attached to top of the head restraint. The strap the child restraint anchors. should be routed beneath the head restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint loads imposed by correctly fitted child top tether anchorages in the rear seat. They restraints. Under no circumstances are are located on the rear side of the backrests. they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. The anchorages are not Securing a child seat able to withstand excessive forces on 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. them in the event of collision if full har- 2. Route the top tether strap under the head ness seat belts or adult seat belts are restraint and attach it to the anchor. installed to them. An adult who uses a belt anchored in a child restraint 3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower anchorage runs a great risk of suffer- ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the child ing severe injuries should a collision restraint is not equipped with lower tether occur. straps, or the restraint is used in the cen- • Do not install rear speakers that ter seating position, follow instructions for require the removal of the top tether securing a child restraint using the Auto- anchors or interfere with the proper matic Locking Retractor seat belt (see use of the top tether strap. page 39).

50 01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion* 01

Integrated two-stage booster The booster cushions are designed to raise cushion1 the child higher, so that the shoulder strap Volvo's optional integrated booster cushions crosses over the child's collarbone, not over are located in the outboard seating positions. the child's neck. If using a booster cushion These booster cushions have been specially does not result in proper positioning of the designed to help safeguard children in the shoulder strap, then the child should be rear seat. They should be stowed (folded placed in a properly secured child restraint down into the seat cushion) when not in use. (see page 41). The shoulder belt must never When using an integrated booster cushion, be placed behind the child's back or under the child must be secured with the vehicle's the arm. three-point seat belt.

Use these booster cushions only Incorrect seating position: the child's head is with children whose weight is above the head restraint and the shoulder belt is between: not across the collarbone Before driving, check that: • Stage 1: 48 – 80 lbs (22 – 36 kg) • The integrated two-stage booster cushion • Stage 2: 33 – 55 lbs (15 – 25 kg) is set in the correct position according to and whose height is between: the child's height and weight (see the table below) and is locked in position. • Stage 1: 45 – 55 in. (115 – Stage 1 Stage 2 140 cm) Correct seating position: child's head is below Weight 48 – 80 lbs 33 – 55 lbs • Stage 2: 37 – 47 in. (95 – 120 cm) the head restraint and the shoulder belt is across In Canada, Transport Canada's the collarbone 22 – 36 kg 15 – 25 kg weight recommendation is 40 – Height 45 – 55 in. 37 – 47 in. 80 lbs (18 – 36 kg). 115 – 140 cm 95 – 120 cm

1 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51 01 Safety

01 Integrated booster cushion*

• That the seat belt is properly positioned and is taut. • The shoulder section of the seat belt is across the child's collarbone, not over the neck. • The lap section of the seat belt is across the child's hips and not the abdomen. Using an integrated booster cushion Stage 1

Pull the handle (1) forward and upward (2) With the booster cushion in the stage 1 to release the booster cushion. position, press the button (see the arrow in illustration 1). Press the booster cushion rearward to lock it in position. Lift the front edge of the booster cushion Stage 2 and press it rearward toward the backrest to lock it in position.

52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion* 01

Stowing the two-stage integrated NOTE WARNING booster cushion The booster cushion cannot be moved DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can from the stage 2 (upper) position to the occur stage 1 (lower) position. It must first be folded down completely to the stowed Follow all instructions on the position, and then adjusted to stage 1. booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual. Pull the handle forward to release the booster cushion. MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY Press down on the center of the booster LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS cushion to return it to the stowed position. SEATED. • Use this booster cushion only with NOTE children whose height and weight are within the permitted limits shown in The booster cushion must be in the the table (see page 51). stowed position before the rear seat backrests are folded down. • In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and CAUTION seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be Be sure there are no loose objects under the booster cushion before it is stowed. replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.

The booster cushion can be folded down completely (stowed) from either the stage 1 or stage 2 positions.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53 01 Safety

01 Child safety locks

Child safety locks Power child safety locks and the indicator light in the button will illu- disengaging rear door windows* minate when the function is activated. When the child safety locks are activated: • The rear door windows can only be opened from the driver's door control panel • The rear doors cannot be opened from the inside The child safety locks' current setting is stored when the engine is switched off. If these locks were activated when the engine G021077 was switched off, they will also be active when the engine is restarted. Child safety locks – rear doors Driver's door control panel The controls are located on the rear door The power child safety locks can be acti- jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or vated/deactivated when the remote key is in a screwdriver to adjust these controls. mode I (see page 89) or higher. Activation/ The rear doors can only be opened from deactivation can be done up to 2 minutes the outside when the slot is in the hori- after the engine has been switched off (if no zontal position. door has been opened). The rear doors can be opened from the To activate the child safety locks: inside when the slot is in the vertical position. 1. Put the ignition in mode I or higher or start the engine. 2. Press the button on the driver's door control panel (see the illustration). > Rear child locks Activated will be displayed in the instrument panel and

54 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 01 Safety

55 Remote key and key blade...... 58 Keyless drive...... 67 Locks...... 70 Alarm...... 73

56 LOCKS AND ALARM 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Introduction Detachable key blade NOTE Two remote keys or optional Personal Car Each remote key or PCC contains a detacha- 02 ble metal key blade for mechanically locking Additional or duplicate remote control keys Communicators (PCC) are provided with your can be obtained from any Authorized vehicle. They enable you to unlock the doors or unlocking the driver's door and the glove Volvo Retailer. and tailgate, and also function as ignition compartment. See page 64 for more infor- You can also obtain additional or duplicate keys to start the vehicle or operate electrical mation on the key blade. The key blades have a unique code, which is used if new ones remote control keys from certain inde- components. The remote keys contain pendent repair facilities and locksmiths detachable metal key blades for manually need to be produced. This code is available that are qualified to make remote control locking or unlocking the driver's door and the at an authorized Volvo retailer. keys. Each key must be programmed to glove compartment. The visible ends of these The visible ends of these key blades are work with your vehicle. key blades are unique to make it easier to unique to make it easier to identify "your" California Only: identify "your" remote key. Up to six remotes remote key. can be programmed for use on the same A list of independent repair facilities and/or locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut vehicle. Loss of a remote key and code replacement keys can be found: If either of the remote keys is lost, the other The PCCs have enhanced functionality com- • on the Volvo website at pared with the standard remote key. should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer. As an anti-theft measure, the code of http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys by calling Volvo Customer Care at NOTE the lost remote key must be erased from the • system. 1-800-458-1552 In the remainder of this chapter, all references to the remote key also pertain to the The number of registered keys for the vehicle PCC unless otherwise stated. can be found by pressing MY CAR and going into Settings Information Number of WARNING keys. See page 201 for a description of the Never leave the remote key in the ignition menu system. slot if children are to remain in the vehicle. USA-5WK49264 FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO See page 88 for more information on the 5WK49236 various ignition modes. FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266

58 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO Key memory: door mirrors and driver's Confirmation when locking/unlocking 5WK49233 seat the vehicle 02 FCC ID:KR55WK49233 The position of the side door mirrors, power Settings can be made in the menu system for driver's seat* and the selected instrument audible and visual confirmation when the This device complies with part 15 of the FCC panel theme1 are stored in the remote keys vehicle has been locked or unlocked. With rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to when the vehicle is locked. The next time the these functions activated, the following will the following conditions: (1) This device may driver's door is unlocked with the same occur when the vehicle is locked/unlocked: not cause harmful interference, and (2) this remote key and the door is opened within Locking confirmation device must accept any interference 2 minutes, the power driver's seat and side • The turn signals flash once, an audible received, including interference that may door mirrors will automatically move to the cause undesired operation. signal sounds and the door mirrors will position that they were in when the doors fold* in. Canada-5WK49264 were most recently locked with the same remote key. If the seat/mirrors have not been Confirmation will only be given when all doors IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO readjusted since the vehicle was locked, they and the tailgate are properly closed and 5WK49236 will already be in the position stored in that locked. IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266 particular remote key and will not move. See NOTE IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO page 91 for more information. See also 5WK49233 page 92 for more information on this fea- If you do not receive confirmation when ture. locking the vehicle, check whether a door IC:267T-5WK49233 or the tailgate is ajar, or if this feature has This feature can be activated or deactivated been turned off in the menu. Operation is subject to the following condi- in the vehicle's menu by pressing MY CAR tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- and going into Settings Car settings ence, and (2) this device must accept any Car key memory. See page 201 for a Unlocking confirmation interference, including interference that may description of the menu system. • The turn signals will flash twice and the cause undesired operation of the device. door mirrors will fold* out. See also page 67 for information regarding Making a setting vehicles with the optional keyless drive. Different alternatives for locking/unlocking confirmation can be selected in the menus by

1 Optional digital instrument panel only

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

pressing MY CAR on the center console con- Message Meaning accept any interference received, including trol panel. interference that may cause undesired opera- 02 tion. • To activate visual confirmation: go to Insert car Remote key not recognized key during start. Try to start the Settings Car settings Light Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO vehicle again. settings and select Door lock Operation is subject to the following condi- confirmation light and/or Unlock Car key PCC with keyless drive only. tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- confirmation light by pressing OK/ not found Remote key not recognized ence, and (2) this device must accept any MENU . during start. Try to start the interference, including interference that may • To activate audible confirmation: go to vehicle again. cause undesired operation of the device. Settings Car settings Lock If the problem continues, See page 123 for information on starting the settings and select Audible insert the remote key into vehicle. confirmation by pressing OK/MENU. the ignition slot and try to See page 201 for a description of the menu start the vehicle again. Replacing the battery in the remote key system. The batteries should be replaced if: Immobil- Remote key fault during Immobilizer (start inhibitor) izer Try start. Contact an authorized • The information symbol illuminates and Low battery in remote control. Please Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle start Volvo workshop. change batteries. is shown in the dis- contains a coded transponder. The code in again play and/or the key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition slot where it is compared to the code • if the locks do not react after several CAUTION stored in the start inhibitor module. The vehi- attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle. cle will start only with a properly coded key. If Never use force when inserting the remote you misplace a key, take the other keys to a key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot NOTE be started if the transponder is damaged. trained and qualified Volvo service technician The remote key's range is normally for reprogramming as an anti-theft measure. approximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehi- The following messages (which may appear USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO cle. in the instrument panel display) are related to This device complies with part 15 of the FCC the immobilizer: rules. Operation is subject to the following See page 64 for information about replacing condition: (1) This device may not cause the battery. harmful interference, and (2) this device must

60 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Remote key/Personal Car After a short pause, press the Unlock button Communicator (PCC)* - common a second time within 10 seconds to unlock functions the other doors and the tailgate. 02 This function can be changed so that all doors unlock at the same time by pressing My Car and going to Settings Car settings Lock settings Change doors unlock setting. See page 201 for a description of the menu system. Approach lighting – As you approach the vehicle, press the button on the remote Personal Car Communicator (PCC)* key to light the interior lighting, parking lights, Lock license plate lighting and the lights in the door mirrors*. Standard remote key Unlock These lights will switch off automatically after Lock Approach lighting 30, 60 or 90 seconds. See page 201 for a description of the menu system. Unlock Tailgate unlock Unlock tailgate – Press the button twice Approach lighting Panic alarm within several seconds to disarm the alarm system (the alarm indicator light on the dash- Tailgate unlock Information button (see page 62) board will go out), and unlock only the tail- Panic alarm Buttons on the remote gate. Pressing this button for several seconds also opens the tailgate on models equipped Lock – Press the Lock button on the with the optional power tailgate. remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate. The turn signals will flash once to confirm locking. Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the remote once to unlock the driver's door.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

NOTE NOTE Unique functions—PCC* 02 As an added safety precaution, the parking Buildings or other obstacles may interfere lights will come on automatically for a with the function of the remote key. The short period when the tailgate has been vehicle can also be locked or unlocked opened. with the key blade, see page 64.

After closing, the tailgate will not automati- If the remote key is removed from the vehicle cally relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm while the engine is running or if the ignition is the alarm. in mode I or II and all of the doors are closed, a message will appear in the instrument panel See also the section "Unlocking the tailgate display and there will be an audible signal. from the passenger compartment." When the remote key is returned to the vehi- Panic alarm – This button can be used cle, the message will be erased and the audi- Information button to attract attention during emergency situa- ble signal will stop after one of the following tions. has been done: Indicator lights To activate the panic alarm, press and hold The remote key is inserted in the ignition • Pressing the information button provides cer- this button for at least 3 seconds or press it slot twice within 3 seconds. The turn signals and tain information about the vehicle with the The vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph horn will be activated. The panic alarm will • help of the indicator lights. (30 km/h) stop automatically after 2 minutes and Using the information button 45 seconds. • The OK button on the left steering wheel lever is pressed 1. Press the information button . To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds and press the button again. 2. All of the indicator lights will flash sequentially for approximately 7 seconds The Panic alarm button will not unlock the to indicate that the PCC is receiving infor- vehicle. mation from the vehicle. If any of the but- Range tons are pressed during this 7-second period, transmission of information to the The remote key has a range of approximately PCC will be interrupted. 60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle.

62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

NOTE Steady red light: the alarm has been trig- or unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle's gered since the vehicle was most recently most recently received status. The indicator If none of the indicator lights flash when locked. lights will not flash when the information but- 02 the information button has been pressed ton is pressed while the PCC is out of range. several times from different places in rela- Both red lights flash alternatively: the tion to the vehicle, contact an authorized alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes If more than one PCC is used to lock/unlock Volvo service technician. ago. the vehicle, only the one used most recently will show the correct locking status. Range The indicator lights provide information The PCC's lock and unlock functions have a according to the illustration: NOTE range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle. If none of the indicator lights illuminate when the information button is pressed, NOTE this may be because the most recent transmission between the vehicle and the • The approach lighting, panic alarm, PCC was interrupted or impeded by build- and the functions controlled by the ings or other objects. information button have a range of approximately 300 ft (100 m) from the Keyless drive vehicle. Vehicles equipped with the optional Personal • Radio waves, buildings or other obsta- Car Communicator have the keyless drive cles may interfere with the function of function, see page 67 for detailed informa- the PCC. tion. Steady green light: the vehicle is correctly locked. If the vehicle does not provide confirmation when a button has been pressed, try moving Steady yellow light: the vehicle is not closer and pressing the button again. locked. Outside of the PCC´s range If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle when the information button is pressed, no new information will be received. The PCC most recently used to lock

63 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Detachable key blade Reinserting the key blade in the remote "Removing the key blade" on page 64 for The key blade can be removed from the key instructions). 02 remote key. When removed, the key blade 1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the 2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm) can be used to: key blade up. straight up in the hole on the underside of • Lock/unlock the driver's door if the 2. Carefully slide the key blade into its the keyhole cover. remote key is not functioning properly groove. > The cover will come off due to the • Lock/unlock the glove compartment (see 3. Gently press the key blade in the groove pressure exerted when the key blade is page 71) until it clicks into place. pushed upward. • Override the transmission's shiftlock sys- 3. Insert the key blade as far as possible in tem (see page 131) Unlocking the driver's door with the the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade detached key blade • Block access to the glove compartment to unlock the driver's door. This will trigger the alarm. Removing the key blade 4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote key in the ignition slot. This also applies to vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive. 5. Press the cover back into place after the door has been unlocked.

Replacing batteries in the remote key/PCC The battery/batteries in the remote key/PCC Driver's door keyhole cover should be replaced if: If the remote key/PCC* does not function nor- The information symbol lights up and a Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. mally (weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be • text appears in the information display. unlocked with the detachable key blade. Pull the key blade straight out of the and/or remote key. 1. Remove the key blade from the remote key/PCC (see the previous section, • the vehicle's locks repeatedly do not react when a button on the remote

64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade key/PCC is pressed within approximately Replacing the batteries 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle. CAUTION 02 When handling batteries, avoid touching their contact surfaces as this could result in poor battery function in the remote key.

Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–) sides. Battery type CR 2430, 3 V (one battery in the remote key, two batteries in the PCC) Remote key (one battery) 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat- Opening the remote key/PCC tery. Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. 2. Insert a new one with the (+) side downward. Pull the key blade straight out of the PCC (two batteries) remote key. 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat- Insert a small screwdriver in the hole teries. behind the spring loaded catch and care- 2. Insert the first new battery with the (+) fully pry up the cover. side upward.

NOTE 3. Insert the plastic spacer over the battery. Insert the second new battery on top of Turn the remote key with the buttons the plastic spacer, with the + side down- upward so that the batteries do not fall out ward. when the cover is removed. Re-assembling the remote key 1. Press the remote key's cover into place. 2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the key blade up.

65 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. 02 4. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place. Old batteries should be properly recycled.

66 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

Keyless drive* (models with Personal NOTE See page 201 for a description of the menu Car Communicator only) system. • The gear selector must in the P posi- 02 Keyless locking and unlocking tion before the vehicle can be locked Unlocking the vehicle with the key and the alarm can be armed. blade • The buttons on the keyless drive remote key can also be used to lock and unlock the vehicle, see page 61 for more information.

Both of the PCCs provided with the vehicle have the keyless function, and additional ones can be ordered. The system can accommodate up to six PCCs. The red rings in the illustration indicate the Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft area around the vehicle that is within range of the keyless drive antennas. (1.5 meters) Keyless drive keyhole cover This system makes it possible to unlock and Unlocking the vehicle If the PCC does not function normally (weak lock the vehicle without having to press any • A keyless drive remote key must be on battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked buttons on the Personal Car Communicators the same side of the vehicle as the door with the detachable key blade. See page 64 (PCC). It is only necessary to have a keyless to be opened, and be within 5 feet for instructions. drive remote key in your possession to oper- (1.5 meters) of the door's lock or the tail- ate the central locking system. gate (see the shaded areas in the illustration). • Pull a door handle to unlock and open the door or pull the tailgate opening control. The number of doors that are unlocked at the same time can be set in the vehicle's menu system. Press MY CAR and go to Car settings Lock settings Keyless entry.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

Locking the vehicle position of the driver's seat and door mir- • A door has been opened and closed rors will be stored in the seat's memory. The PCC has been inserted in the ignition 02 • • The next time a door is opened by a per- slot son with the same PCC in his/her pos- • The OK button (see page 199 for the session, the driver's seat and door mir- location of this button) has been pressed. rors will automatically move to the position that they were in when the door was CAUTION most recently locked. • Keyless drive remote keys should NOTE never be left in the vehicle. In the event of a break-in, a remote found in the If several people carrying PCCs approach vehicle could make it possible to start the vehicle at the same time, the driver's the engine. seat and door mirrors will assume the Models with keyless drive have a button on the positions they were in for the person who • Electromagnetic fields or metal outside door handles opens the driver's door. obstructions can interfere with the The doors and the tailgate can be locked by keyless drive system. The remote key should never be placed closer than pressing the lock button in any of the outside See also page 91 for information on adjust- approximately 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) to door handles. ing and storing the seat's position in the seat cell phones, metallic objects or e.g., memory. stored in a metal briefcase. NOTE Keyless drive information messages On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selec- If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehi- USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, tor must be in the Park (P) position, all cle while the engine is running or if the igni- KR55WK48964 doors and the tailgate must be closed and tion is in mode II (see page 88) and all of the ignition must be switched off before NOTE the vehicle can be locked. the doors are closed, a message will appear in the instrument panel display and an audible This device complies with part 15 of the FCC signal will sound. Rules. Operation is subject to the following Keyless drive remote key and driver's two conditions: (1) This device may not cause When at least one PCC has been returned to seat/door mirror memory harmful interference, and (2) this device must the car, the message will be erased in the dis- • When you leave the vehicle with a PCC in accept interference received, including inter- play and the audible signal will stop when: your possession and lock any door, the ference that may cause undesired operation.

68 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

CAUTION Location of the keyless drive WARNING antennas Changes or modifications not expressly People with implanted pacemakers should 02 approved by the manufacturer could void the not allow the pacemaker to come closer user's authority to operate the equipment. than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless drive system's antennas. This is to help Siemens VDO prevent interference between the pace- 5WK48891 maker and the keyless drive system. Tested To Comply With FCC Standards For Automobile Use Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952, 267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891 NOTE This device complies with RSS -210 of Indus- The keyless drive system has a number of try Canada. Operation is subject to the fol- antennas located at various points in the lowing two conditions: (1) This device may vehicle. not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept interference received, On the tailgate, near the wiper motor including interference that may cause unde- Left rear door handle sired operation. CAUTION Under the floor of the cargo area, near the rear seat Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the Right rear door handle user's authority to operate the equipment. Under the rear section of the center console Under the front section of the center console

69 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Locking and unlocking the vehicle unlocked with the detachable key blade. See Locking page 64. • Press the lock button after the front 02 From outside the vehicle doors have been closed. The remote key locks and unlocks all of the From inside the vehicle (central locking doors and the tailgate. button) • Each door can be locked individually with the lock button on the respective doors. Before the vehicle can be locked from the The door must be closed first. outside with the remote key, the driver's door Alternative locking when parking must be closed. Any other door/tailgate that The central locking button on the driver's is open will be locked and the alarm will be door can also be used to lock the vehicle armed. when you leave it. To do so: NOTE 1. Open the door. Be sure the remote key is outside of the 2. Press the lock section of the button. vehicle before the other doors/tailgate are 3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle closed to help avoid locking the remote inside the vehicle. completely and arm the alarm. Central locking button NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the optional The lock buttons on the door panel can be keyless drive system, all doors/tailgate must Please be aware that locking the vehicle in used to lock or unlock all doors and the tail- be closed before the vehicle can be locked. this way makes it possible to lock the gate at the same time. Press to lock and remote key in the passenger compartment. The first press on the unlock button unlocks to unlock. To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from the driver's door and a second press unlocks the outside by pressing the lock button on the other doors and the tailgate (see also Unlocking the remote key. page 61). This setting can be changed in the The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the If the vehicle is locked using the central menu system. See page 201 for a descrip- vehicle in two ways: locking button, be sure that the remote key tion. is in your possession before closing the • By pressing the unlock button . door. If the locks repeatedly do not react when the The door can be unlocked by pulling the unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary • door handle once and opened by pulling to replace the batteries in the remote, see the handle again. page 60. In this case the vehicle can be

70 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Automatic relocking The glove compartment can only be locked Unlocking the tailgate with the remote If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto- and unlocked using the detachable key blade key 02 matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will in the remote key. See page 64 for informa- – Press the tailgate unlock button on the rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tion on removing the key blade from the remote key to unlock (but not open1) the tailgate has been opened. remote key. tailgate. See also page 61. Automatic locking Insert the key blade in the glove compart- > The alarm indicator light on the dash- When the vehicle starts to move, the doors ment lock. board will go out to indicate that the and tailgate can be locked automatically. This alarm is not monitoring the entire vehi- Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. feature can be turned on or off by pressing cle. MY CAR and going to Car settings Lock Remove the key blade from the lock. NOTE settings Automatic door locking. See page 201 for a description of the menu sys- Locking/unlocking the tailgate • If the doors are locked while the tail- tem. gate is open, the tailgate will remain unlocked until the vehicle is relocked Glove compartment by pressing the Lock button on the remote key. • On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position, all doors and the tailgate must be closed and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle can be locked.

Tailgate unlock button on the remote key

1 This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (see page 283).

71 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Unlocking the tailgate from the driver's The alarm indicator on the dashboard will CAUTION seat begin flashing to show that the vehicle is 02 locked and that the alarm has been armed. • When pressing the rubberized plate, only light pressure is necessary to Opening the tailgate manually release the tailgate's electronic locking mechanism. • When opening the tailgate, pull it up using the handle. Too much pressure on the rubberized plate can damage its electrical connections.

– Press the button on the lighting panel (1) to unlock (but not open1) the tailgate. The tailgate is held closed by an electronic NOTE locking mechanism. To open: The taillights will illuminate automatically 1. Press lightly on the rubberized plate for a short period when the tailgate has under the handle to release the lock. been opened. 2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate. Locking the tailgate with the remote key Press the lock button ( ) on the remote. See also page 61

1 This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (see page 283).

72 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

The alarm system The alarm indicator light Arming the alarm The alarm is automatically armed whenever – Press the Lock button on the remote key. 02 the vehicle is locked with the remote key or One long flash of the turn signals will con- optional Personal Car Communicator. firm that the alarm is armed. When armed, the alarm continuously moni- Alarm confirmation settings can be changed tors a number of points on the vehicle. The in MY CAR, under Car settings Lock following conditions will trigger the alarm: settings Keyless entry. See page 201 for • The hood is forced open. a description of the menu system. • The tailgate is forced open. USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) • A door is forced open. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC • The ignition slot is tampered with. rules. Operation is subject to the following • An attempt is made to start the vehicle conditions: (1) This device may not cause with a non-approved key (a key not The status of the alarm system is indicated by harmful interference, and (2) this device must coded to the car's ignition). the red indicator light on the dashboard (see accept any interference received, including illustration): • The battery is disconnected (while the interference that may cause undesired opera- alarm is armed). • Indicator light off: the alarm is not armed tion. • The siren is disconnected when the alarm • The indicator light flashes at one-second Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) is disarmed. intervals: the alarm is armed This device is subject to the following condi- A message will appear in the information dis- • The indicator light flashes rapidly before tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- play if a fault should occur in the alarm sys- the remote key is inserted in the ignition ence, and (2) this device must accept any tem. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo slot and the ignition is put in mode I: the interference, including interference that may service technician. alarm has been triggered. cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE Do not attempt to repair any of the components in the alarm system yourself. This could affect the insurance policy on the vehicle.

73 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

Disarming the alarm Remote key not functioning – Press the Unlock button on the remote If the remote key is not functioning properly, 02 key. the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle > Two short flashes from the car's direc- can be started as follows: tion indicators confirm that the alarm 1. Open the driver's door with the key blade has been deactivated and that all (see page 64 for information on detaching doors are unlocked. the key blade). > This will trigger the alarm. Turning off (stopping) the alarm If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by pressing the Unlock button on the remote key or by inserting the remote key in the ignition slot. Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm has been turned off.

Other alarm-related functions Automatic re-arming If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically re-engage (re-lock) and the alarm will re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or 2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot the tailgate has been opened. (also on vehicles with the optional keyless drive). This will turn off the alarm. Audible/visual alarm signal 3. Start the engine (see page 123 for • An audible alarm signal is given by a bat- instructions). tery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for 30 seconds. • The visual alarm signal is given by flashing all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off.

74 02 Locks and alarm

75 Instruments and controls...... 78 Ignition modes...... 88 Seats...... 90 Steering wheel...... 97 Lighting...... 99 Wipers and washers...... 107 Windows...... 110 Mirrors...... 112 Digial compass*...... 115 Laminated panoramic roof*...... 117 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*...... 120 Starting the engine...... 123 Transmission...... 128 Eco Guide* and Power Meter*...... 132 Brakes...... 134 Parking brake...... 137

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

78 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Function Page Function Page Function Page

Controls for menus and 201, In-door control panels 110, Lighting panel, buttons 99, messages, turn signals, 104, (power windows, mirrors, 112, 70, for opening fuel filler 280, 71 high/low beams, trip 99, 216 central locking button, 54 door and unlocking the computer power child safety locks) tailgate 03 Paddles for manually 129 Hazard warning flashers 104 Power seat* adjustment 90 shifting gears* controls Controls for the infotain- 201, Cruise control 147 ment system and menus 230, 210 Instrument panel information displays Horn, airbag 97, 22 Climate system controls 210

Main instrument panel 79 Gear selector 128

Infotainment system/ 230, Controls for active chas- 223 Bluetooth hands-free 259 sis (Four-C)* controls Wipers and washers 107, START/STOP ENGINE 88 108 button Steering wheel adjust- 97 Ignition slot 88 ment

Display for infotainment 230, Hood opening control 331 Information displays: analog instrument panel system functions and 199 menus Parking brake 137

Door handle -

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Gauges and indicators: analog Gauges and indicators: digital instrument panel instrument panel* Different themes (display alternatives) can be selected for the digital instrument panel: • Elegance 03 • Eco • Performance To change themes, press the OK button on the left steering wheel lever and use the thumb wheel to scroll to Themes. Press OK to confirm your choice. Information displays: digital instrument panel* These displays show information on some of the vehicle's functions, such as cruise con- Fuel gauge: When the indicator shows trol, the trip computer and messages. The one white marking1, a yellow indicator information is shown with text and symbols. light will illuminate to indicate a low fuel More detailed information can be found in the level. See also 216 and 278 for addi- descriptions of the functions that use the tional information. information displays. Eco meter: Indicates how economically the vehicle is being driven. The higher the needle moves on the scale, the more economically the vehicle is being driven. Speedometer Theme Elegance: gauges and indicators Tachometer: Shows engine speed in Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm) one white marking, a yellow indicator light Gear indicator: Shows the currently will illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. selected gear

1 When the message Distance to empty fuel tank: shows "----", the marker turns red

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

See also 216 and 278 for additional Tachometer (engine speed in thousands Power Meter (see page 132). information. of revolutions per minute (rpm)) Gear indicator: Shows the currently Coolant temperature gauge Gear indicator: Shows the currently selected gear selected gear Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Tachometer (engine speed in thousands 03 of revolutions per minute (rpm)) Gear indicator: Shows the currently selected gear

Theme Performance: gauges and indicators Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a Indicator and warning symbols: analog instru- white marking, a yellow indicator light will ment panel illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See also 216 and 278 for additional informa- Indicator symbols tion. Theme Eco: gauges and indicators Indicator and warning symbols Coolant temperature gauge Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a Warning symbols white marking, a yellow indicator light will Speedometer illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See also 216 and 278 for additional informa- Tachometer (shows engine speed in tion. thousands of revolutions per minute Eco Guide (see page 132) (rpm))

Speedometer

}} 81 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

cate a fault in the vehicle's emissions system, Symbol Description and the symbol for low oil pressure. Some of the symbols shown may not be Left turn signal indicator available in all markets or models. Right turn signal indicator Indicator symbols 03 Symbol Description Tire pressure monitoring sensor (TPMS)A Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL)*system A Option in Canada Malfunction indicator light Indicator and warning symbols: digital instrument Fault in the Active Bending Light panel Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (ABL) system Indicator symbols This symbol will illuminate if there is a fault in the ABL system. See page 102 for more Indicator and warning symbols Rear fog lights on information about this system.

Warning symbols Stability system Malfunction Indicator Light As you drive, a computer called On-Board Function check The stability system's Sport Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's All indicator and warning symbols light up in mode is activated engine, transmission, electrical and emission ignition mode II or when the engine is started. systems. When the engine has started, all the symbols Low fuel level should go out except the parking brake sym- The malfunction indicator light will illuminate if bol, which only goes out when the brake is the computer senses a condition that poten- disengaged. Information symbol, read the tially may need correcting. When this hap- text displayed in the instrument pens, please have your vehicle checked by a If the engine does not start or if the function panel trained and qualified Volvo service technician check is carried out in ignition mode II, all as soon as possible. symbols go out after 5 seconds except the High beam indicator malfunction indicator light, which may indi- A malfunction indicator light may have many causes. Sometimes, you may not notice a

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls change in your car's behavior. Even so, an Stability system High beam indicator uncorrected condition could hurt fuel econ- This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC This symbol illuminates when the high beam omy, emission controls, and drivability. (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control sys- headlights are on, or if the high beam flash Extended driving without correcting the cause tem) is actively working to stabilize the vehi- function is used. could even damage other components in cle, see page 142 for more detailed informa- your vehicle. tion. Left turn signal indicator 03 This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is Right turn signal indicator not closed tightly or if the engine was running Sport mode This symbol illuminates to indicate that the while the vehicle was refueled. NOTE stability system's Sport mode has been acti- Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) vated to help provide maximum tractive force, • Both turn signal indicators will flash If the warning light comes on, there may be a for example when driving with snow chains, when the hazard warning flashers are malfunction in the ABS system (the standard or driving in deep snow or loose sand. used. braking system will still function). Check the Low fuel level • If either of these indicators flash faster system by: than normal, the direction indicators When this light comes on, the vehicle should are not functioning properly. 1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off be refueled as soon as possible. See page the ignition. 278 for information about fuel and refueling. Tire pressure monitoring system 2. Restart the engine. Information symbol (TPMS)* 3. If the warning light goes off, no further The information symbol lights up and a text This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire action is required. message is displayed to provide the driver pressure in one or more tires is low, see with necessary information about one of the If the indicator light remains on, the vehicle page 322 for detailed information. vehicle's systems. The message can be should be driven to a trained and qualified erased and the symbol can be turned off by Volvo service technician for inspection, see Warning symbols pressing the OK button (see page 199 for page 134 for additional information. information) or this will take place automati- Symbol Description Rear fog lights cally after a short time (the length of time var- Low oil pressure This symbol indicates that the rear fog lights ies, depending on the function affected). are on. The information symbol may also illuminate Parking brake applied together with other symbols.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Symbol Description Airbags – SRS from High engine temp Reduce speed to If this light comes on while the vehicle is High engine temp Stop engine. If appropri- SRS airbags being driven, or remains on for longer than ate, other messages, such as Coolant level approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle low, Stop safely will also be displayed. If Seat belt reminder has been started, the SRS system's diagnos- your engine does overheat so that you must tic functions have detected a fault in a seat stop the engine, always allow the engine to 03 cool before attempting to check oil and cool- Generator not charging belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain. ant levels. Have the system(s) inspected by a trained See page 334 for more information. Fault in the brake system and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. Fault in brake system Warning symbol, read the text See page 21 for more information about the If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may displayed in the instrument airbag system. be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place panel and check the level in the brake fluid reser- Seat belt reminder voir, see page 334. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the vehicle should be transpor- Low oil pressure This symbol comes on for approximately 6 seconds if the driver has not fastened his or ted to an authorized Volvo workshop to have If the light comes on while driving, stop the her seat belt. the brake system checked. vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and check the engine oil level. Add oil if neces- Generator not charging If the and symbols come on sary. If the oil level is normal and the light This symbol comes on during driving if a fault at the same time, there may be a fault in the stays on after restart, have the vehicle towed has occurred in the electrical system. Contact brake force distribution system. to the nearest trained and qualified Volvo an authorized Volvo workshop. service technician. 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn Engine temperature off the engine. Parking brake applied Engine overheating can result from low oil or coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high 2. Restart the engine. This symbol flashes while the brake is being heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction. applied and then glows steadily when the • If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- Engine overheating will be signaled with text parking brake has been set. ing. and a red warning triangle in the middle of the If the symbols remain on, check the level See page 137 for more information about instrument display. The exact text will depend • in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 334. using the parking brake. on the degree of overheating. It may range If the brake fluid level is normal but the

84 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

symbols are still lit, the vehicle can be page 199. The warning symbol can also If the hood is not closed properly, the warn- driven, with great care, to an authorized come on in conjunction with other symbols. ing symbol illuminates, a graphic will be dis- Volvo workshop to have the brake system played in instrument panel and an explana- Action: checked. tory text message2 will also be displayed in • If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, 1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a the vehicle should be transported to an vehicle further. safe place as soon as possible and close the authorized Volvo workshop to have the 2. Read the information on the information hood. 03 brake system checked. display. Implement the action in accord- If the tailgate is not closed properly, the ance with the message in the display. information symbol illuminates, a graphic will WARNING Clear the message using OK. be displayed in instrument panel and an • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark Reminder – doors not closed explanatory text message2 will also be dis- in the reservoir or if a warning mes- If one of the doors is not closed properly, the played in the instrument panel. Stop the vehi- sage is displayed in the text window: information or warning symbol illuminates cle in a safe place as soon as possible and DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle (depending on the vehicle's speed), a graphic close the tailgate. towed to a trained and qualified Volvo will be displayed in instrument panel and an service technician and have the brake explanatory text message2 will also be dis- system inspected. played in the instrument panel. Stop the vehi- • cle in a safe place as soon as possible and If the and symbols close the door. are on at the same time, there is a risk of reduced vehicle stability. If the vehicle is driven at a speed lower than approximately 5 mph (7 km/h), the information symbol illu- Warning symbol minates. The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a problem related to safety and/or drivability. If the vehicle is driven at a speed A message will also appear in the instrument higher than approximately 5 mph panel. The symbol remains visible until the (7 km/h), the warning symbol illumi- fault has been rectified but the text message nates. can be cleared with the OK button, see

2 Text message applies only to models with the optional digital instrument panel

85 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Ambient temperature sensor NOTE The trip odometers T1 and T2 are used to measure short distances. The distance is When the ambient temperature is between shown in the display. 23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake symbol will be displayed next to the tem- Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering perature. This symbol serves as a warning wheel lever to display the desired trip odome- for possible slippery road surfaces. Please ter. 03 note that this symbol does not indicate a fault with your vehicle. Press and hold the RESET button on the left steering wheel lever for at least 1 second to At low speeds or when the vehicle is not 4 moving, the temperature readings may be reset the selected trip odometer . slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature.

Location of the ambient temperature sensor, A: digital instrument panel*, B: analog instrument Trip odometers panel

Trip odometer3 Odometer display

3 The trip odometer will be displayed differently in analog and digital instrument panels 4 Models with a digital information panel: press and hold RESET for more than approximately 4 seconds to reset all trip computer information

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Clock the 24-hour format or the 12-hour format (AM/PM).

1. Go to Settings System options Clock, digital instrument panel* Time. 5 Display 2. The hour box will be selected. Press OK to activate this box. Setting the clock 3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and The clock can be set in the MY CAR menu press OK to confirm the setting and system. See page 201 for additional informa- deactivate this box. tion about these menus. 4. Turn TUNE to select the minute box (A) and press OK to activate this box (B). 5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and press OK to confirm the setting and deactivate this box. 6. Turn TUNE to select OK and press OK to complete the procedure. Use the menu selection Settings System options Time format to display the time in

5 Models with an analog instrument panel: the time will be displayed in the center of the instrument panel

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87 03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

Inserting and removing the remote Removing the remote key Mode Function key The remote key can be removed from the ignition slot by pulling it out. 0 The odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated. Functions Power seats* can be adjusted and the infotainment system can The remote key has 3 modes: 0, I, and II that 03 be used for a limited time (to min- can be used without starting the engine. The imize battery drain see following table shows examples of which page 230). functions are available in the respective modes. I The laminated panoramic roof, power windows,12-volt sockets NOTE in the passenger compartment, navigation system*, climate sys- To access ignition modes I or II without starting the engine, the brake pedal must tem blower, windshield wipers Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP can be used. ENGINE button. not be depressed. II The headlights/taillights illumi- Inserting the remote key1 nate. Warning/indicator lights illu- Holding the end of the remote key with the minate for 5 seconds. Other sys- base of the key blade, insert the remote key tems are activated. However, the into the ignition slot as shown in the illustra- heated seats* and heated rear tion and press it in as far as possible. window function can only be activated when the engine is running. CAUTION Mode II should only be used for Foreign objects in the ignition slot can very short periods to help avoid impair function or cause damage. draining the battery.

1 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

Ignition modes Emergency towing See page 294 for important information Ignition mode 0 about the remote key when the vehicle is – The vehicle is unlocked. being towed. Ignition mode I – With the remote key fully pressed into the 03 ignition slot1, press START/STOP ENGINE briefly. Ignition mode II – With the remote key fully pressed into the ignition slot1, press START/STOP ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds. Returning to mode 0 To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, press START/STOP ENGINE briefly.

Starting and stopping the engine See page 123 for information on starting the engine and switching it off.

1 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

89 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Front seats WARNING The front passenger seat backrest can be folded to a horizontal position to make room • Do not adjust the seat while driving. for a long load. Fold the backrest as follows: The seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed Move the seat as far back and down as fully. In addition, position the seat as possible. far rearward as comfort and control Adjust the backrest to an upright position. 03 allow. • Check that the seat is securely locked Lift the catches on the rear of the back- into position after adjusting. rest. Without releasing the catches, push the Folding the front seat backrest*1 backrest forward. Move the seat as far forward as possible Lumbar support: turn the control for so that the head restraint slides under the firmer or softer lumbar support. glove compartment. Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and move the seat to the position of your WARNING choice. • When transporting long objects, cover Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion, sharp edges on the load to help pre- pump up/down. vent injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the sudden stops. angle of the backrest. • When the seat's backrest is returned Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down. to the upright position, push and pull it Control panel for power seat*. to be sure that it is securely locked in this position.

1 The front passenger's seat backrest on models equipped with the optional sport seat cannot be folded down

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Power seat2 NOTE Button for storing a position • Only one of the power seat's controls M (memory) button can be used at the same time. Programming the seat's memory The power seats have an overload • Three different seating and door mirror posi- protector that activates if a seat is tions can be stored in the driver seat's mem- blocked by any object. If this occurs, 03 switch off the ignition (key in posi- ory. tion 0) and wait for a short period The following example explains how button before operating the seat again. (1) can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) are programmed in the same way. Power seat memory function To program (store) a seat and door mirror position in button (1): Power seat adjustment controls 1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the Front edge of seat cushion up/down desired positions using the seat and mirror adjustment controls. Seat forward/rearward and up/down 2. Press and hold down the M (memory) Backrest tilt button (4).

Operation 3. With the memory button depressed, press button (1) briefly to store the cur- The seats can be adjusted for a short period rent position for the seat/mirrors. after unlocking the door with the remote control without the key in the ignition slot. Seat To move the seat and mirrors to the posi- adjustment is normally made when the igni- Power seat memory buttons tion that they were in when a button was tion is on and can always be made when the programmed: Button for storing a position engine is running. – Press and hold down button (1) until the Button for storing a position seat and mirrors stop moving.

2 Optional on certain models

91 03 Your driving environment

Seats

NOTE 1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot. > The positions of the power driver's seat and door mirrors are now stored 2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go to As a safety precaution, the seat will stop in the remote key's memory. automatically if the button is released Settings Car settings Car key before the seat has reached the preset memory position. NOTE 3. To activate the remote key memory fea- The remote key's memory feature and the 03 ture, press ENTER (check the box). Remote key memory and the power power driver's seat memory function (the 3 > The remote key is now ready to store settings made using the buttons on the driver's seat* and door mirrors the position of the power driver's seat side of the seat, see the section "Power and door mirrors. seat memory function" on page 91) work independently of each other. Repeat this procedure for each of the vehicle's remote keys. Returning the seat/mirrors to the stored See page 201 for a description of the menu positions system. To move the seat and door mirrors to the Storing the positions of the power position stored in the remote key: driver's seat/mirrors in the remote key 1. Unlock the driver's door with the same 1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the remote key (the one used to lock the desired position using the seat and mirror doors). For models equipped with the adjustment controls. optional keyless drive, you must have the same remote key in your possession. Each remote key has a feature that enables it 2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors with to store (remember) the position of the power the remote key (or close the driver's door 2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes. and press the lock button on the door driver's seat and door mirrors when the vehi- The driver's seat and door mirrors will auto- cle is locked with that remote key. handle with the remote key in your possession on vehicles with the optional key- matically move to the position in which you This feature has to be activated for each of less drive). left them (if the vehicle has been unlocked the remote keys used in the vehicle as fol- with one of the other keys and new seat/ lows: mirror adjustments have been made).

3 This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Seats

NOTE Heated seats* See page 211. • The seat will move to this position even if someone else has moved it to a different position and locked the vehi- Rear seats cle with a different remote key. Rear center head restraint • This feature will work in the same way 03 with all of the remote keys that you use with your vehicle.

Emergency stop

WARNING • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted with the ignition off, children The center head restraint should be adjusted should never be left unattended in the according to the passenger's height. The vehicle. restraint should be carefully adjusted to sup- • Movement of the seat can be STOP- port the occupant's head. PED at any time by pressing any but- Pull the head restraint up as required. ton on the power seat control panel. • To lower, press and hold the button Do not adjust the seat while driving. • • (located at the center, between the back- The seat should be adjusted so that rest and the head restraint) while pressing the brake pedal can be depressed the head restrain down carefully. fully. In addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow. • The seat rails on the floor must not be obstructed in any way when the seat is in motion.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93 03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING NOTE Automatically folding down the rear seat’s outboard head restraints The center rear seat head restraint should • The head restraint must be returned to only be in its lowest position when this the upright position manually. seat is NOT occupied. When the center position is occupied, the head restraint • The outboard head restraints cannot should be correctly adjusted to the pas- be folded down on models that are not 03 senger’s height. The upper edge of the equipped with this button. head restraint should be at least on a level with the upper-most point of the seat occupant's ear. CAUTION The rear head restraints should not be Manually folding down the rear seat's kept folded down for prolonged periods. This could result in pressure marks in outboard head restraints leather upholstery.

WARNING 1. The ignition must be in mode II. For safety reasons, no one should be 2. Press the button to lower the rear head allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat restraints for improved visibility. positions if the head restraints are folded down. If these positions are occupied, the NOTE head restraints should be in the upright (fixed) position. • The head restraint must be returned to the upright position manually. • The outboard head restraints cannot be folded down on models that are not equipped with this button. • Pull the handle closest to the head restraint to fold it down. • To return the head restraint to the upright position, push it up until it clicks into place.

94 03 Your driving environment

Seats

CAUTION CAUTION ered. The outboard head restraints fold down automatically. The rear head restraints should not be To help avoid damage to the upholstery, kept folded down for prolonged periods. there should be no objects on the rear seat Pull up the backrest release control on This could result in pressure marks in and the seat belt should not be buckled the respective section(s) ( ) and fold the leather upholstery. when the backrest is folded down. section(s) down. A red indicator ( ) shows that the backrest is not locked in 03 WARNING the upright position. For safety reasons, no one should be allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat NOTE positions if the head restraints are folded It may be necessary to move the front down. If these positions are occupied, the seats forward or put their backrests in a head restraints should be in the upright more upright position before folding down (fixed) position. the rear seat backrests.

Folding down the rear seat backrests The three sections of the rear seat backrest can be folded down in different combinations to make it easier to transport long objects. • The left (driver's side) section can be folded down separately. • The center section can be folded down separately. • The right (passenger's side) section can only be folded down together with the center section. Release and lower the center head • All three sections can be folded down restraint (see page 93) if the center and/or together. right section of the backrest is to be low-

95 03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING • When one or more sections of the backrest is returned to the upright position, check that it is properly locked in place by pushing and pulling it. The red indicators should also not 03 be visible. • Return the outboard head restraints to the upright position. • Long loads should always be securely anchored to help avoid injury in the event of a sudden stop. • Always turn the engine off and apply the parking brake when loading/ unloading the vehicle. • Place the transmission in the Park (P) position to help prevent inadvertent movement of the gear selector. • On hot days, the temperature in the vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk.

96 03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

Adjusting WARNING Horn Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.

With the optional speed-dependent power steering the level of steering force can be 03 adjusted, see page 223.

Keypads and steering wheel paddles* G021138

Adjusting the steering wheel Horn Lever for releasing/locking the steering – Press the steering wheel hub to sound wheel the horn. Possible positions The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and reach: 1. Pull the lever toward you to release the steering wheel. Steering wheel keypads and paddles* 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position Cruise control, see page 147. Adaptive that suits you. cruise control*, see page 149. 3. Push back the lever to lock the steering Paddles for manually shifting gears (Gear- wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to tronic), see page 129. push into place, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the Infotainment system controls, see lever. page 231.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97 03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

Electrically heated* steering wheel

Button for steering wheel heating With the ignition in at least mode I (see page 89 for information about the ignition modes), press this button once to begin warming the steering wheel (press again to switch off). The indicator light in the button will illuminate when the function is active.

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Lighting panel Headlight switch positions the MY CAR menu system under Settings Daytime running lights function as follows: Car settings Light settings Daytime running lights. With the headlight switch in the position: NOTE • In the US: the daytime running lights will The use of daytime running lights is rec- 03 be off ommended in the United States and is mandatory in Canada. • In Canada: the daytime running lights will be on

With the headlight switch in the With the headlight switch in the 1 position: position and the ignition in mode II or if the Lighting panel overview engine is running (see page 89) • The daytime running lights will be off and Thumb wheel for adjusting display, instru- the low beam headlights will be on In the US: the daytime running lights will ment and "theater" lighting (see • be off page 102) In Canada: the daytime running lights will Rear fog lights (see page 103) • be on Headlight switch With the headlight switch in the Volvo recommends using the posi- position: tion whenever possible. • The daytime running lights will be on (the low beam headlights will automatically switch on in dark conditions) US models only: The daytime running lights in mode can be switched on or off in

1 The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off.

99 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

High/low beam headlights • Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to position 2 and release it to toggle between low and high beams. High beam flash Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to position 1. The high beams come on until the 03 lever is released.

Active high beams – AHB* AHB is a feature that uses a camera at the upper edge of the windshield to detect the headlights of oncoming vehicles or the tail- Headlight switch in the AUTO position lights of a vehicle directly ahead. When this Headlight switch and steering wheel lever Switch AHB on or off by pulling the left steer- happens, the headlights will automatically High beam flash ing wheel lever rearward (toward the steering switch from high beams to low beams. When wheel) as far as possible and releasing it. If the camera no longer detects the headlights/ Toggle between high and low beams AHB is switched off while the high beams are taillights of other vehicles, your headlights will on, the headlights will change to low beams. Low beam headlights switch back to high beams after several sec- When the engine is started, the low beams onds. are activated automatically if the headlight To activate AHB: control is in position . • Turn the headlight control to the Continuous high beam headlights position. The feature will begin functioning if the engine With the headlight switch in the (in has been running for at least 20 seconds and dark conditions only, when the daytime run- the vehicle's speed is at least 12 mph ning lights have automatically switched off (20 km/h). and the low beam headlights have switched on) or position:

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Models with an analog instrument panel symbol will go out when these mes- CAUTION When AHB is activated, the symbol In the following situations, it may be nec- sages are displayed. essary to switch between high and low will illuminate in the instrument panel. The AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in beams manually: high beam indicator ( ) in the instrument heavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes active • In heavy fog or rain panel will also illuminate when the high again or if the sensors in the windshield are • In blowing snow or slush 03 beams are on. no longer obscured, the messages will disap- In bright moonlight Models with a digital instrument panel • pear and the symbol will illuminate. • In freezing rain When AHB is activated, will illuminate • In areas with dim street lighting as a white symbol in the instrument panel. When the high beams are on, the symbol will • When oncoming vehicles have dim change to blue. front lighting • If there are pedestrians on or near the NOTE road If there are reflective objects, such as Keep the windshield in front of the • • signs, near the road camera free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. When oncoming vehicles' lights are Do not mount or in any way attach • • obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc. anything on the windshield that could obstruct the camera. • When there are vehicles on connecting roads If Active high beam Temporary • At the top of hills or in dips in the road unavailable Switch manually is displayed in • In sharp curves the instrument panel, switching between high and low beams will have to be done man- See page173 for more information about the ually. However, the light switch can remain in camera's limitations. the AUTO position. The same applies if Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed and the symbol is displayed. The

101 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Tunnel detection (models with the rain When this function is activated, the headlight Symbol Display Explanation sensor* only) beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve The rain sensor reacts to the change in light- according to movements of the steering Headlamp The system is ing conditions when, for example, the vehicle wheel (see the right-pointing beam in the failure not functioning enters a tunnel and the tunnel detection fea- illustration). Service properly and should be ture will then activate the low beam head- ABL is activated automatically2 when the required inspected/ 03 lights. The low beams will be switched off engine is started. approx. 20 seconds after the vehicle leaves repaired by a the tunnel. The function can be deactivated/reactivated trained and in the MY CAR menu system under My XC60 qualified Volvo The rain sensor does not have to be activated Active Bending Lights or under Settings service techni- for tunnel detection to function. Car settings Light settings Active cian. Active Bending Lights (ABL)* Bending Lights. Auxiliary lights* See page 201 for a description of the menu If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, the system. driver can use the MY CAR menu system to choose to deactivate and turn these lights on NOTE and off along with the high beam headlights3. This function is only active in twilight or dark conditions, and only when the vehicle Instrument and "theater" lighting is in motion. Instrument lighting If a fault should occur in the system, the sym- Illumination of the display and instrument bol will illuminate and a message will be dis- lights will vary, depending on ignition mode played as shown in the table. (see page 88). Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light The display lighting is automatically subdued function deactivated (left) and activated (right) in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the thumb wheel.

2 The factory default setting is on. 3 The auxiliary lights must be connected to the vehicle's electrical system, which should only be done by a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. See page 201 for more information about the menu system.

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

The intensity of the instrument lighting is Canadian models: If the ignition is in position The rear fog lights will only function in combi- adjusted with the thumb wheel. II or the engine is running, the daytime run- nation with the high/low beam headlights. ning lights will also be on. "Theater" lighting – Press the button to switch the rear fog When the overhead courtesy lighting has With the headlight switch in this position, the lights on/off. gone out and the engine is running, several parking lights will remain on even when the > The rear fog light indicator symbol LEDs located near the roof console illuminate ignition is switched off. on the instrument panel and the 03 to provide faint lighting for the occupants of In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear light in the button illuminate when the the front seats. This lighting goes out just parking lights also illuminate when the tailgate rear fog lights are switched on. after the overhead courtesy lighting when the is opened to alert anyone traveling behind vehicle is locked. your vehicle. This happens regardless of the NOTE position that the headlight control is in or The rear fog lights are considerably which mode the ignition is in. Parking lights brighter than the normal taillights and should be used only when conditions such Rear fog lights as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less than 500 ft. (150 meters).

NOTE Condensation may form temporarily on the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been Headlight switch in the parking light position on for a short time.

Turn the headlight switch to the position (the license plate lighting comes on at the same time).

103 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Hazard warning flashers Turn signals NOTE • This automatic flashing sequence can be interrupted by immediately moving the lever in the opposite direction. • If the turn signal indicator flashes 03 faster than normal, check for a burned-out turn signal bulb.

Interior lighting, front

Location of the hazard warning flasher button Turn signals The hazard warning flasher should be used to When changing lanes indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic The driver can automatically flash the turn hazard. signals 3 times by moving the turn signal – To activate the flashers, press the button lever up or down to the first position and in the center dash. Press the button again releasing it. to turn off the flashers. When turning G021149 NOTE Move the lever as far up or down as possible to start the turn signals. The turn signals Light switches, front roof lighting Regulations regarding the use of the • will be cancelled automatically by the move- Drivers side front reading light, on/off hazard warning flasher may vary, ment of the steering wheel, or the lever can depending on where you live. be returned to its initial position by hand. Passenger's side front reading light, • The hazard warning flashers will be on/off activated automatically if an airbag Overhead courtesy lighting. deploys.

104 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

The lighting in the front part of the passenger The lights are switched on or off by pressing The passenger compartment lighting can be compartment is controlled with the buttons each respective button. switched on and off manually within (1) and (2) in the roof console. 30 minutes after the vehicle has been Courtesy lights/door step lighting* unlocked. Switch (3) has three positions for all passen- The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch ger compartment lighting: on/off automatically when one of the front If the lighting is switched on manually and the doors is opened/closed. vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will • Off: right side depressed, automatic light- 03 ing off. switch off automatically after one minute. Glove compartment lighting Neutral position: automatic lighting is • The glove compartment lighting switches Cargo area lighting on. on/off automatically when the lid is opened/ The cargo area lighting comes on automati- • On – left side depressed, passenger closed. cally when the tailgate is opened. compartment lighting on. Overhead courtesy lighting Home safe lighting The passenger compartment lighting is Interior lighting, rear When you leave your vehicle at night, you can switched on and off automatically when but- make use of the home safe lighting function ton (3) is in the neutral position. to illuminate the area in front of the vehicle. The lighting comes on and remains on for 1. Remove the key from the ignition slot to 30 seconds if: put the ignition in mode 0 (see page 89 • the vehicle is unlocked from the outside for information about the ignition modes). with the key or remote control 2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible • the engine is switched off and the ignition towards the steering wheel and release it. is in mode 0. 3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors. The lighting switches off when: The headlights, parking lights, turn signals, the engine is started • lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights, • the vehicle is locked from the outside. and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain Rear reading lights The lighting comes on and remains on for two on for 30 4, 60 or 90 seconds. The time inter- minutes if one of the doors is open. val can be set in MY CAR under Settings

4 Factory setting }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Car settings Light settings Home safe light duration. See page 201 for a description of the menu system.

Approach lighting

03 Approach lighting is activated by pressing the approach light button on the remote key (see the illustration on page 61). When the function has been activated, the parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting and door step lighting come on. The time interval for this lighting can be set by pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings Light settings Approach light duration. See page 201 for a description of the menu system.

106 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

Windshield wipers/washers Windshield wipers off Rain sensor* Move the lever to position 0 to The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper switch off the windshield wipers. speed according to the amount of water on the windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sen- Single sweep sor can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel Move the lever upward from posi- up (the wipers will sweep the windshield more tion 0 to sweep the windshield one frequently) or down (the wipers will sweep the 03 stroke at a time for as long as the windshield less frequently). lever is held up. Intermittent wiping NOTE With the lever in this position, you The wipers will make an extra sweep each can set the wiper interval by twisting time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward. the thumb wheel upward to increase Windshield wipers and washers wiper speed or downward to decrease the When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol Rain sensor* on/off speed. will illuminate in the instrument panel. Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency Continuous wiping Activating and setting the sensitivity The wipers operate at normal When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle CAUTION speed. must be running or in ignition mode II and the windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 Use ample washer fluid when washing The wipers operate at high speed. • or in the single sweep position. the windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but- Windshield wiper service position in operation. The windshield wipers must be in the service ton . The windshield wipers will make • Before using the wipers, ice and snow position before the wiper blades can be one sweep. should be removed from the wind- cleaned or replaced. See page 343 for addi- shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper Press the lever up for the wipers to make an tional information. blades are not frozen in place. extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active mode when the stalk is released back to position 0.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

Deactivating Move the lever toward the steering wheel to CAUTION Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the start the windshield and headlight washers. • Use ample washer fluid when washing button or press the lever down to After the lever is released the wipers make several extra sweeps. the windshield. The windshield should another wiper position. be thoroughly wet when the wipers are The rain sensor is automatically deactivated Heated washer nozzles* in operation. The washer nozzles are heated automatically 03 when the key is removed from the ignition • When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of slot or five minutes after the ignition has been in cold weather to help prevent the washer washer fluid remains in the reservoir, switched off. fluid from freezing. the headlights will no longer be washed. A text message will also be High-pressure headlight washing* CAUTION displayed to remind the driver to fill the High-pressure headlight washing consumes a washer fluid reservoir. The rain sensor should be deactivated large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, when washing the car in an automatic car the headlights are washed using two alterna- wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is left tives: Tailgate wiper/washer on, the wipers will start inadvertently in the car wash and could be damaged. • Low/high beam headlights on. The headlights will be washed the first time the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the Windshield washing headlights will only be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed within a 10-minute period. • Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend- ing Lights will be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed. Nor- mal halogen headlights will not be washed.

Move the lever forward to start the tailgate washer. Intermittent wiping

Washing function Normal (continuous) wiping

108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

NOTE The rear wiper is equipped with cut-off function, which means that it will not operate if its electric motor overheats. The wiper will function again after a cool-down period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat of the motor and ambient tem- 03 perature conditions).

Tailgate wiper and reverse gear If the windshield wipers are on and the transmission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper will go into intermittent wiping func- tion1. This function is deactivated when a different gear is selected.

NOTE On vehicles with the optional rain sensor, the tailgate wiper will be activated when reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is activated and it is raining.

If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continuous) wiping mode, selecting different gears will not affect its function.

1 Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.

109 03 Your driving environment

Windows

Power windows WARNING All power windows can be operated using the control panel in the driver's door. The control • Always remove the ignition key when panels in the other doors only operate the the vehicle is unattended to put the window in the respective doors. ignition in mode 0 (see page 89 for information about the ignition modes). For the power windows to function, the ignition must be in at least mode I. When the 03 • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. vehicle has been running, the power windows can be operated for several minutes after the • Make sure that the windows are com- remote key has been removed from the igni- pletely unobstructed before they are tion slot, or until a door has been opened. operated. NOTE Operating Driver's door control panel • Movement of the windows will stop if they are obstructed in any way. Switch for power child safety locks* and disengaging rear power window buttons, • To reduce buffeting wind noise if the see page 54 rear windows are opened, also open the front windows slightly. Rear window controls

Front window controls. Manual up/down – Move one of the controls up/down slightly. > The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position. Auto up/down Operating the power windows – Move one of the controls up/down as far Manual up/down as possible and release it. Auto up/down. > The window will open or close completely.

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Windows

Resetting If the battery has been disconnected, the auto open function must be reset so that it will work properly. 1. Gently raise the front section of the button to close the window and hold it for one second. 03 2. Release the button briefly. 3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second. Laminated glass* This glass is reinforced to help provide protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. The windshield, laminated panoramic roof and other windows have laminated glass.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111 03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

Power door mirrors Retractable power door mirrors* the vehicle, for example when parallel park- The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving. ing in narrow spaces: To activate this function, select reverse gear 1. Press down the L and R buttons at the and press the L or R mirror control button to same time. tilt the mirror down.

03 2. Release them after approximately one The function can be activated/deactivated in second. The mirrors automatically stop in MY CAR under Settings Car settings the fully retracted position. Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L right mirror. See page 201 for a description and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors of the menu system. automatically stop in the fully extended posi- The door mirror will reset to its normal position. tion: Door mirror controls Storing the position* • after 10 seconds when reverse is disen- Adjusting The mirror positions are stored in the key gaged and the car remains stopped. 1. Press the L button for the left door mirror memory when the vehicle has been locked • immediately when reverse is disengaged or the R button for the right door mirror. with the remote key. When the vehicle is and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds The light in the button comes on. unlocked with the same remote control the approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored • immediately if you press the correspond- center. positions when the driver's door is opened. ing L or R button again. 3. Press the L or R button again. The light The function can be activated/deactivated in • when the engine is turned off. should no longer be on. MY CAR under Settings Car settings • when the side mirrors are folded in. Car key memory Personal settings in WARNING key memory. See page 201 for a description NOTE of the menu system. Objects seen in the mirrors may appear Only one mirror can be tilted down at a further away than they actually are. Tilting the door mirrors when parking* time. The door mirrors can be tilted down to help give the driver a better view along the sides of

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

Automatically tilting the door mirrors to the neutral position for electric retracting/ Press button (1) to defrost/de-ice the wind- when parking extending to work. shield and/or button (2) to defrost the rear window and door mirrors. The indicator lights The door mirrors can tilt down automatically • Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- to help give the driver a better view along the tons. in the respective buttons indicate that the sides of the vehicle, for example when paral- function is active. Switch the function off • Fold them out again with the L and R but- lel parking. When the transmission is no when then windshield/rear window/mirrors tons. longer in reverse, the mirrors will automati- have cleared to help avoid battery drain.The 03 cally return to their original position. The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. heating function will also switch off automatically after a certain amount of time. This function can be activated/deactivated in Home safe and approach lighting MY CAR under Settings Car settings The light on the door mirrors comes on when Auto-defrosting for the rear window and door mirrors (if the vehicle is started when the Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt approach lighting or home safe lighting is ambient temperature is below 45 °F (7 °C) left mirror In reverse gear tilt right selected, see page 105. or can be selected in MY CAR under Settings mirror. See page 201 for information about Climate settings Automatic rear the MY CAR menu system. Heated windshield*, rear window and door mirror defrosters defroster. See page 201 for a description of Automatic retraction when locking the menu system. When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the remote key the door mirrors are automatically Interior rearview mirror retracted/extended. The function can be activated/deactivated in Auto-dim function MY CAR under Settings Car settings The interior rearview mirror’s auto-dim function is controlled by two sensors: one point- Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors ing forward (located on the forward-facing when locking. See page 201 for a descrip- side of the mirror, which monitors the amount tion of the menu system. of ambient light) and one pointing rearward Resetting to neutral (located on the side of the mirror facing the Mirrors that have been moved out of position driver at the upper edge, which senses the by an external force must be electrically reset strength of following vehicles' headlights), Max. defroster/heated windshield (1), rear win- and work together to help eliminate glare.1 dow and door mirror defroster (2)

1 The auto-dim function is also available as an option on the door mirrors. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113 03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

NOTE Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g., parking stickers, transponders, etc., or the rear sensor by loading the cargo compartment or the rear seat in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensor 03 will reduce the auto-dim function in the interior rearview mirror and optional auto- dim function in the door mirrors.

114 03 Your driving environment

Digial compass*

Operation brated if the vehicle is driven into a new one 5. Press the button repeatedly until the (see the magnetic zones on the map in the number of the desired magnetic zone following section "Selecting a magnetic (1-15) is displayed. See the magnetic zone"). To do so: zones on the map in the following section "Selecting a magnetic zone"). 1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely out of traffic and away from steel 6. Wait until C is again displayed in the mir- structures and high-tension electrical ror. 03 wires. 7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no 2. Start the vehicle. more than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direction is displayed. This indicates that cali- NOTE bration is complete. • For best calibration results, switch off 8. Drive around in a circle an additional two Rearview mirror with compass. all electrical equipment in the vehicle times to fine-tune the calibration. The rear-view mirror has an integrated display (climate system, windshield wipers, 9. Vehicles with an electrically heated audio system, etc.) and make sure that that shows the compass direction in which windshield:* if C is displayed when the all doors are closed. the vehicle is pointing. Eight different direc- heating function is activated, perform tions are shown with the abbreviations: N • Calibration may not succeed or be step 7 with the heating function on. See (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south- incorrect if the vehicle's electrical also page 213 for additional information east), S (south), SW (southwest), W (west) equipment is not switched off. about the heated windshield. and NW (northwest). Repeat the calibration procedure if neces- The compass is displayed automatically when 3. Using a pen, paperclip or similar object, sary. the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To press and hold the button on the under- switch the compass on/off use a pen, paper- side of mirror for approx. 6 seconds until C clip or similar object and press in the button is displayed in the mirror. on the underside of the mirror. 4. Press and hold the button for 3 seconds until the number of the current magnetic Calibration zone is displayed. North America is divided into 15 magnetic zones and the compass will need to be cali-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115 03 Your driving environment

Digial compass*

Selecting a magnetic zone 1

2 15 14 3

03 13 4 12 5 8 11 9 10 6 7 G018632

Magnetic zones. The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The correct zone must be selected for the compass to work correctly. 1. Put the ignition in mode II. 2. Using a pen or similar object, press and hold the button on the rear side of mirror for at least 3 seconds. The number for the current area will be shown. 3. Press the button repeatedly until the number for the required geographic area (1 – 15) is shown. 4. The display will revert to showing the compass direction after several seconds.

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Laminated panoramic roof*

Introduction Both the laminated panoramic roof and the Operation The laminated panoramic roof is divided into sun shade are operated by the controls in the two sections. ceiling console, near the rear-view mirror. The vehicle's ignition must be in mode I or II • The rear glass section is fixed in place before the laminated panoramic roof/sun and cannot be moved. shade can be operated. • The front glass section can be slid hori- 03 zontally to the open or closed positions or CAUTION its rear edge can be raised and lowered to allow ventilation. • Remove ice and snow before opening the laminated panoramic roof. All references in this section to opening or closing the panoramic roof pertain to the front • Do not operate the laminated panor- glass section. amic roof if it is frozen closed. The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun • Never place heavy objects on the laminated panoramic roof. Auto open (arrow points toward the rear shade made of perforated fabric that is of the vehicle) located below the sections of glass. This Manual open shade can be opened or closed, for example when driving in bright sunlight. Manual close

Auto close

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117 03 Your driving environment

Laminated panoramic roof*

WARNING Quick open/close Perform this procedure in reverse order to The laminated panoramic roof and the sun close the laminated panoramic roof and/or • During manual closing, if the laminated shade can be opened/closed at the same sun shade. panoramic roof is obstructed, immedi- time: ately open it again. Open - pull the control back (to the auto NOTE • Never open or close the laminated • open position) twice in quick succession For manual opening, the sun shade must 03 panoramic roof if it is obstructed in any way. and release it. first be fully open before it will be possible Close - push the control forward (to the to open the laminated panoramic roof. • Never allow a child to operate the • auto close position) twice in quick suc- When closing, the laminated panoramic laminated panoramic roof. roof must be fully closed before the sun cession and release it. • Never leave a child alone in a vehicle. shade can be closed. • When leaving the vehicle, ensure that Manual operation the ignition is in mode 0 (see page 88 1. Opening the sun shade: Pull the control for information about the various igni- back to the first stop (the manual open tion modes) to disable the laminated position) and hold it until the sun shade panoramic roof. Never leave the has opened to the position of your remote key/PCC* in the vehicle. choice. • Never extend any object or body part 2. Opening the rear edge of the laminated though the open laminated panoramic panoramic roof: Pull the control back to roof, even if the vehicle's ignition is the first stop (the manual open position) a completely switched off. second time to open the rear edge of the laminated panoramic roof. Automatic operation 3. Opening the front glass section: Pull 1. To open the sun shade completely, pull the control back to the first stop (the the control as far back as possible (to the manual open position) a third time and auto open position) and release it. hold it until the laminated panoramic roof 2. To fully open the laminated panoramic has opened to the position of your roof, pull the control as far back as possi- choice. ble a second time (to the auto open position) and release it.

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Laminated panoramic roof*

Tilt position laminated panoramic roof or sun shade will stop and reverse automatically approximately 2 in. (5 cm) from the point at which it was blocked (or will open fully to the tilt position). The auto-stop feature also functions when the laminated panoramic roof or sun shade is being opened. 03 The auto-stop feature can be overridden if the closing procedure has been interrupted (e.g., due to ice around the laminated panoramic roof) by pressing and holding the control forward/down until the roof is closed. Tilt position, raised at the rear edge Open (raise the rear edge of the front Wind blocker glass section) by pressing the rear edge of the control upward. Close by pulling the rear edge of the control downward and holding it until the laminated panoramic roof has closed completely. If the sun shade is completely closed, it will open approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when the laminated panoramic roof is opened to the tilt position. Auto-stop The laminated panoramic roof has an auto- The moonroof is equipped with a wind stop feature that is triggered if the glass sec- blocker that folds up when the moonroof is tion of the roof or the sun shade is blocked in open. any way when being closed. In this case, the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Introduction WARNING Programming HomeLink

• If you use HomeLink to open a garage NOTE door or gate, be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion. Some vehicles may require the ignition to When programming a garage door be switched on or be in the “accessories” • position for programming and/or operation 03 opener, it is advised to park outside of of HomeLink. It is also recommended that the garage. a new battery be placed in the hand-held • Do not use HomeLink with any garage transmitter of the device being pro- door opener that lacks safety stop and grammed to HomeLink for quicker training reverse features as required by U.S. and accurate transmission of the radio-fre- federal safety standards (this includes quency signal. The HomeLink buttons any garage door opener model manu- must be reset first. When this has been completed, Homelink is in learning mode factured before April 1, 1982). A so that you can perform programming. The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro- garage door that cannot detect an vides a convenient way to replace up to three object - signaling the door to stop and hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters reverse - does not meet current U.S. 1. Position the end of your hand-held trans- used to activate devices such as gate opera- federal safety standards. For more mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from tors, garage door openers, entry door locks, information, contact HomeLink at: the HomeLink button you wish to pro- security systems, even home lighting. Addi- www.homelink.com. gram while keeping the indicator light in tional HomeLink information can be found on view. the Internet at www.homelink.com or by Retain the original transmitter of the RF 2. Simultaneously press and hold both the phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515. device you are programming for use in other chosen HomeLink and hand-held trans- vehicles as well as for future HomeLink pro- mitter buttons until the HomeLink indica- gramming. It is also suggested that upon the tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly sale of the vehicle, the programmed Home- blinking light. Now you may release both Link buttons be erased for security purposes. the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter Refer to “Resetting HomeLink Buttons” on buttons. page 122.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

NOTE 4. At the garage door opener receiver If you live in Canada or you are having diffi- (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate culties programming a gate operator or Some devices may require you to replace the “learn” or “smart” button. This can garage door opener by using the “Program- this Programming Step 2 with procedures usually be found where the hanging ming” procedures, replace “Programming noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Programming” section. If the HomeLink antenna wire is attached to the motor- HomeLink” step 2 with the following: head unit. indicator light does not change to a rapidly • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink blinking light after performing these steps, 5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or button while you press and release - 03 contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com “smart” button. (The name and color of every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand- or by phoning the hotline at held transmitter until the HomeLink indi- 1–800–355–3515. the button may vary by manufacturer.) There are 30 seconds to initiate step 6. cator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release 3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, both the HomeLink and hand-held trans- release the programmed HomeLink but- hold for two seconds and release the pro- mitter buttons. grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the ton up to two separate times to activate Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com- “press/hold/release” sequence a second the door. If the door does not activate, plete. press and hold the just-trained HomeLink time, and, depending on the brand of the button and observe the indicator light. garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a Using HomeLink If the indicator light stays on con- • third time to complete the programming To operate, simply press and hold the pro- stantly, programming is complete process. grammed HomeLink button until the trained and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and HomeLink should now activate your rolling device begins to operate (this may take sev- released. code equipped device. eral seconds). Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door opener, rapidly for • If the indicator light blinks Gate Operator/Canadian Programming gate operator, security system, entry door two seconds and then turns to a Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans- lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For conven- constant light continue with “Pro- mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev- ience, the hand-held transmitter of the device gramming” steps 4-6 to complete the may also be used at any time. In the event programming of a rolling code equip- eral seconds of transmission – which may not ped device (most commonly a garage be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the that there are still programming difficulties or door opener). signal during programming. Similar to this questions, contact HomeLink at: Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are www.homelink.com or by phoning the hotline designed to “time-out” in the same manner. at 1–800–355–3515.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

NOTE Reprogramming a Single HomeLink NOTE Button If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink The transmitter has been tested and com- will function for 30 minutes after the driv- To program a device to HomeLink using a plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or er's door has been opened. HomeLink button previously trained, follow modifications not expressly approved by these steps: the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink 03 Resetting HomeLink Buttons device.2 button. DO NOT release the button. Use the following procedure to reset (erase programming) from the three HomeLink but- 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after tons (individual buttons cannot be reset but 20 seconds. Without releasing the Home- can be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the fol- Link button, proceed with “Programming” lowing section): - step 1. 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink For questions or comments, contact Home- buttons until the indicator light begins to Link at: www.homelink.com or phone 1–800– flash. 355–3515. 2. Release both buttons. This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation > HomeLink is now in the training (or is subject to the following two conditions: (1) learning) mode and can be pro- This device may not cause harmful interfer- grammed at any time beginning with ence, and (2) This device must accept any “Programming” - step 1. interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Start WARNING The starter motor operates for a maximum of 10 seconds. If the engine has not • Never use more than one floor mat at started, repeat the procedure. a time on the driver's floor. An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the CAUTION accelerator and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that the movement of If the engine does not start after the third these pedals is not impeded. try, wait for approximately 3 minutes 03 before trying to start it again to give the Volvo's floor mats are specially manu- • battery time to recover its starting factured for your car. They must be capacity. firmly secured in the clips on the floor so that they cannot slide and become trapped under the pedals on the driv- NOTE er's side. Ignition slot with remote key inserted ( see Keyless drive* page 88 for more information on ignition modes) To start a vehicle equipped with the key- 1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot less drive feature, one of the remote keys WARNING as far as possible, with the metallic key must be in the passenger compartment. blade pointing outward (not inserted into Follow the instructions in steps 2 and 3 to Before starting the engine: the slot)1. start the vehicle. Fasten the seat belt. • 2. Depress the brake pedal2. • Check that the seat, steering wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly. 3. Press and release the START/STOP ENGINE button. The autostart function • Make sure the brake pedal can be will operate the starter motor until the depressed completely. Adjust the seat engine starts or until its overheating func- if necessary. tion stops it.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment. 2 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

WARNING NOTE CAUTION • Always remove the remote key from • After a cold start, idle speed may be • When starting in cold weather, the the ignition slot when leaving the vehi- noticeably higher than normal for a automatic transmission may shift up at cle and ensure that the ignition in short period. This is done to help bring slightly higher engine speeds than nor- mode 0 (see page 89 for information components in the emission control mal until the automatic transmission about the ignition modes), especially if system to their normal operating tem- fluid reaches normal operating tem- 03 there are children in the vehicle. perature as quickly as possible, which perature. • On vehicles with the optional keyless enables them to control emissions and • Do not race a cold engine immediately drive, never remove the remote key help reduce the vehicle's impact on after starting. Oil flow may not reach 3 from the vehicle while it is being driven the environment . some lubrication points fast enough to or towed. prevent engine damage. • Always place the gear selector in Park • The engine should be idling when you and apply the parking brake before move the gear selector. Never acceler- leaving the vehicle. Never leave the ate until after you feel the transmission vehicle unattended with the engine engage. Accelerating immediately after running. selecting a gear will cause harsh • Always open garage doors fully before engagement and premature transmis- starting the engine inside a garage to sion wear. ensure adequate ventilation. The • Selecting P or N when idling at a exhaust gases contain carbon monox- standstill for prolonged periods of time ide, which is invisible and odorless but will help prevent overheating of the very poisonous. automatic transmission fluid.

3 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

124 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* WARNING Information4. Introduction Keep the following in mind before using Approach lighting ERS is a feature that makes it possible to ERS remotely start the engine to cool or heat the • The vehicle should be in view. Starting the engine passenger compartment before driving. • The vehicle should be unoccupied. The maximum range for ERS is approximately 100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle is The climate control system will start using the 03 • The vehicle must not be parked unobstructed. The vehicle must also be same settings as when the engine was indoors or in an enclosed area. locked. switched off. Exhaust fumes are harmful to the When the engine is started using ERS, it will health. To start the engine: run for a maximum of 15 minutes before 1. Press the lock button (1 ) briefly. automatically switching off again. After 2 ERS Using ERS 2. Immediately press the unlock button (2) starts, the engine must be started in the nor- for approximately 2 seconds. mal way before ERS can be used again. If the requirements for ERS have been met, the following will occur: NOTE 1. The turn signals will flash several times. • Always adhere to applicable State, Province and/or Local laws regarding 2. The engine will start. engine idling when using ERS. 3. The turn signals will illuminate for • The service life of the remote key's 3 seconds to indicate that the engine has battery is affected by ERS use. If this started. feature is used frequently, the battery After the engine has started, the vehicle should be replaced once a year, see remains locked but the alarm is disarmed. page 60). Remote key buttons used for remote engine start Lock

Unlock

4 PCC keys only, see page 62

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Models with a Personal Car Switching off an engine started with Switching off the engine Communicator (PCC) remote key* (see ERS With the engine running, press the START/ page 62) Any of the following will switch off the engine STOP ENGINE button. The indicator light for approach if it has been started with ERS: If the gear selector is not in the P position or lighting will flash several times and • Pressing the lock button (1) or the unlock if the vehicle is moving, press the START/ then glow continuously if all of the button (2) on the remote key STOP ENGINE button twice or press and 03 requirements for ERS have been Unlocking the vehicle hold it in until the engine switches off. met. However, this does not indicate that • ERS has started the engine. • Opening a door Jump starting To check if ERS has started the engine, press • Depressing the accelerator or brake pedal the information button (3). If the engine has • Moving the gear selector from the P posi- started, the indicator light for buttons tion (1) och (4) will illuminate. • If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons Active functions (10 liters) of fuel in the tank When the engine is started with ERS, the fol- • More than 15 minutes have elapsed. lowing functions are activated: If the engine has been started with ERS and • The climate control system switches off, the turn signals will illuminate for • The infotainment system. 3 seconds. Deactivated functions Message in the instrument panel When the engine is started with ERS, the fol- display G021347 lowing functions are deactivated: If ERS is interrupted, a text message will be Connecting the jumper cables displayed in the instrument panel. • Headlights Follow these instructions to jump start your • Parking lights vehicle's dead battery or to jump start • License plate lights another vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be Windshield wipers • used is in another vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touching to prevent premature completion of a circuit. Be sure to follow

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine jump starting instructions provided for the WARNING WARNING other vehicle. PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! • Do not connect the jumper cable to To jump start your vehicle: Battery posts, terminals, and related any part of the fuel system or to any 1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to accessories contain lead and lead com- moving parts. Avoid touching hot mode 0, see page 88). pounds, chemicals known to the state of manifolds. California to cause cancer and reproduc- Batteries generate hydrogen gas, 2. First connect the red jumper cable to the • 03 tive harm. Wash hands after handling. which is flammable and explosive. auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1). • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do 3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+) CAUTION not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, terminal on your vehicle's battery (2), skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If marked with a "+" sign, located under a Connect the jumper cables carefully to contact occurs, flush the affected area avoid short circuits with other components folding cover. immediately with water. Obtain medi- in the engine compartment. 4. Connect the black jumper cable to the cal help immediately if eyes are affec- auxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) ted. and to the ground point in your vehicle's • Never expose the battery to open engine compartment (right engine mount flame or electric spark. at the top, on the outer screw) (4). • Do not smoke near the battery. 5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, • Failure to follow the instructions for then start the engine in the vehicle with jump starting can lead to injury. dead battery. 6. After the engine has started, first remove the negative (–) terminal jumper cable (black). Then remove the positive (+) terminal jumper cable (red).

127 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

Automatic transmission Hill Start Assist (HSA) HSA makes it easier to start or back up on a hill by retaining pressure on the brake pedal for several seconds after the pedal has been released in order to keep the vehicle at a standstill. 03 The brakes will be released after several seconds or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal. Park: position P Select the P position when starting or park- G021351 ing. Shiftgate positions Shiftlock CAUTION Depress the button on the front of the gear When P has been selected, the transmission The vehicle must be stationary when posi- selector knob to move the gear selector is mechanically blocked in this position. The tion P is selected. between the R, N, D, and P positions. brake pedal must be depressed and the igni- The gear selector can be moved freely tion must be in at least mode II (see page 88) Gear indicator between the Geartronic (manual shifting) and before the gear lever can be moved from the The gear currently being Drive (D) positions while driving. P position. used is displayed on the right side of the instrument panel. WARNING CAUTION The "S" symbol turns orange The transmission’s temperature is moni- Always apply the parking brake when the if Sport mode is being used. tored to help prevent damage to the trans- vehicle is parked, particularly when park- P mission or other drivetrain components. If ing on a hill. The transmission's mode there is a risk of overheating, the warning may not be able to keep the vehicle sta- Reverse: position R symbol on the instrument panel will illumi- tionary if it is parked on an incline. The vehicle must be stationary when position nate and a text message will be displayed. R is selected. Follow the instructions provided there. Press the control to apply the parking brake, see page 137.

128 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

Neutral: position N Gear shift indicator* • If you hold the gear selector toward "–", No gear is engaged and the engine can be the transmission will downshift one gear started with the gear selector in this position. at a time and will utilize the braking power Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta- of the engine. If the current speed is too tionary with the gear selector in position N. high for using a lower gear, the downshift will not occur until the speed has decreased enough to allow the lower gear Drive: position D 03 D is the normal driving position. The car auto- to be used. matically shifts between the various forward • If you slow to a very low speed, the trans- gears, based on the level of acceleration and mission will automatically shift down. speed. The car must be at a standstill when Shiftlock: Neutral (N) R D shifting from position to position . If the gear selector is in the N position and Geartronic: manual shifting (+S–) the vehicle has been stationary for at least 1 Geartronic allows you to manually shift Gear shift indicator in a digital instrument panel* 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked. among your vehicle's forward gears. Gear- This option indicates when to shift up or tronic can be selected at any time. down to help conserve fuel. A white arrow will In order to move the gear selector from N to To shift gears manually, move the appear above or below the number of the another gear position, the brake pedal must gear selector to the side from D current gear to prompt the driver to shift up be depressed and the ignition must be in at toward +S–. The +S– symbol in the or down. least position II, see page 88. instrument panel will change from While driving Geartronic: steering wheel paddles* white to orange and the number of the gear • If you select the manual shifting position In addition to the manual gearshift function currently being used (1, 2, 3, etc.) will be dis- while driving, the gear that was being using the gear selector, this option makes it played (see the following illustration). used in the Drive position will also initially possible to manually shift gears from the be selected in the manual shifting posi- steering wheel. • To return to automatic shifting mode from tion. +S–, move the gear selector to the side toward D. • Move the gear selector forward (toward +) to shift to a higher gear or rearward (toward –) to shift to a lower gear.

1 Analog instrument panel: the gear shift indicator is displayed in the center of the speedometer }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

Geartronic: Sport mode (S)2 Geartronic: starting on slippery This transmission mode provides sportier surfaces shifting characteristics and enables a more Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual active driving style by making it possible to shifting mode can help provide better traction drive at higher rpm in each gear before shift- when starting off on slippery surfaces. To do ing up. The engine also responds faster when so: 03 the accelerator pedal is pressed. 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move gear selector to the side from D toward the gear selector to the left. The transmission +S–. will not switch to manual shifting mode until 2. Press the gear selector forward and the gear selector is moved forward or rear- release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press ward toward + or –. Steering-wheel mounted gear shift paddles the selector forward again and release it "–": Shift down to a lower gear. Sport mode can be selected any time. to select 3rd gear. The optional steering wheel paddles can also be used; see the "+": Shift up to a higher gear. NOTE previous section "Geartronic: steering wheel paddles." In order to shift gears with the paddles, they • On vehicles equipped with Sport have to first be activated. The gear selector mode, the transmission symbol in the 3. Release the brake pedal and press gently can remain in the D position. main instrument panel will change on the accelerator pedal. from D to S when the gear selector is To activate the paddles: moved to the manual shifting mode. If • Pull either paddle toward the steering the gear selector is moved toward "+" wheel and release it; the D in the instru- or "-", the number of the gear currently ment panel will change to the number of being used will be displayed, see the gear currently being used. page 79). To shift gears: • Please be aware that using Sport mode may result in a slight decrease in Pull the paddle toward the steering wheel • fuel economy. Driving in D can help and release it. improve fuel economy.

2 Certain models only

130 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

Shiftlock override All Wheel Drive: AWD4 NOTE The message AWD disabled Service required will be appear in the information display if an electrical fault should occur in the AWD system. A warning light will also illuminate in the instrument panel. If this occurs, have the system checked by a 03 trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent because of a dead battery, the gear selector All Wheel Drive, which means that power is must be moved from the P position before distributed automatically between the front and rear wheels. Under normal driving condi- the vehicle can be moved3. tions, most of the engine's power is directed Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of to the front wheels. However, if there is any the storage compartment behind the cen- tendency for the front wheels to spin, an elec- ter console to expose the small opening tronically controlled coupling distributes for overriding the shiftlock system. power to the wheels that have the best trac- Insert the key blade into the opening. tion. Press the key blade down as far as possible and keep it held down. Move the gear selector from the P position. For information on the key blade, see page 64.

3 If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 126. 4 Standard on certain models.

131 03 Your driving environment

Eco Guide* and Power Meter*

Introduction Current (instantaneous) reading Power Meter These gauges help improve driving economy. This is the current level of economical driving; This gauge indicates the engine power that the higher the reading, the more economically has been utilized and the amount of power To display or remove these functions from the the vehicle is being driven. remaining. instrument panel, select the "Eco" theme (see page 80). This value is calculated based on the vehicle's speed, engine speed (rpm), engine load 03 Driving statistics are also stored and can be and brake use. displayed in the form of a bar chart (see page 221). The optimal speed range is between approximately 30–50 mph (50–80 km/h), preferably at as low rpm as possible. The markers fall Eco Guide when the brake or accelerator pedal is This gauge gives an indication of how eco- pressed. nomically the vehicle is being driven. If the current reading is very low, the red field in the gauge will illuminate after a slight delay, indicating low driving economy.

Average Available power The average reading changes gradually according to changes in the current reading Utilized power to indicate how economically the vehicle has been driven recently. The higher the average Available power reading, the more economically the vehicle The smaller, upper indicator shows the has been driven. engine's available power1. The higher the reading on the scale, the greater the amount of power remaining in the current gear. Current (instantaneous) reading Utilized power The larger, lower indicator shows the amount Average of engine power that has been utilized1. The

1 Depending on rpm

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Eco Guide* and Power Meter* higher the reading on the scale, the greater the amount of power that is being utilized. The larger the gap between the two indicators, the greater the amount of power remaining.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

Brake system Brake pad inspection WARNING The brake system is a hydraulic system con- On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi- Use the jack intended for the vehicle sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a tion of the brake pads can be checked by • when changing a tire. For any other problem should occur in one of these circuits, raising the vehicle (see page 318 for informa- job, use stands to support the vehicle. it is still possible to stop the vehicle with the tion about using the jack and removing a other brake circuit. wheel) and performing a visual inspection of • The jack should be kept well-greased 03 the brake pads. and clean, and should not be dam- If the brake pedal must be depressed farther aged. than normal and requires greater foot pres- WARNING • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, sure, the stopping distance will be longer. non-slippery surface. A warning light in the instrument panel will • If the vehicle has been driven immediately prior to a brake pad inspection, • No objects should be placed between light up to warn the driver that a fault has the wheel hub, brake components, the base of jack and the ground, or occurred. etc., will be very hot. Allow time for between the jack and the attachment If this light comes on while driving or braking, these components to cool before car- bar on the vehicle. stop immediately and check the brake fluid rying out the inspection. • The jack must correctly engage the level in the reservoir. • Apply the parking brake and put the jack attachment. gear selector in the Park (P) position. • Never allow any part of your body to NOTE • Block the wheels standing on the be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack. Press the brake pedal hard and maintain ground, use rigid wooden blocks or pressure on the pedal – do not pump the large stones. brakes. Brake lights The brake lights come on automatically when WARNING the brakes are applied. Adaptive brake lights If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system message The adaptive brake lights activate in the event is shown in the information display: DO of sudden braking or if the ABS system is NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a activated. This function causes an additional trained and qualified Volvo service techni- taillight on each side of the vehicle to illumi- cian and have the brake system inspected. nate to help alert vehicles traveling behind.

134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

The adaptive brake lights activate if: pedal is depressed. To avoid such a delay cle first reaches a speed of approximately when the brakes are needed, depress the 6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate • The ABS system activates for more than approximately a half second pedal occasionally when driving through rain, several times and a sound may be audible slush, etc. This will remove the water from the from the ABS control module, which is nor- • In the event of sudden braking while the brakes. Check that brake application feels mal. vehicle is moving at speeds above normal. This should also be done after wash- approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) Cleaning the brake discs ing or starting in very damp or cold weather. 03 When the vehicle has come to a stop, the Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs brake lights and additional taillights remain on Severe strain on the brake system may result in delayed brake function. This for as long as the brake pedal is depressed or The brakes will be subject to severe strain delay is minimized by cleaning the brake lin- until braking force on the vehicle is reduced. when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or ings. when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet Power brakes function only when the slower, which means that the cooling of the weather, prior to long-term parking, and after engine is running brakes is less efficient than when driving on the vehicle has been washed. Do this by The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure level roads. To reduce the strain on the braking gently for a short period while the which is only created when the engine is run- brakes, shift into a lower gear and let the vehicle is moving. ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with engine help with the braking. Do not forget the engine switched off. that if you are towing a trailer, the brakes will Emergency Brake Assistance If the power brakes are not working, consid- be subjected to a greater than normal load. EBA is designed to provide full brake effect immediately in the event of sudden, hard erably higher pressure will be required on the Anti-lock braking system (ABS) braking. The system is activated by the speed brake pedal to compensate for the lack of The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to with which the brake pedal is depressed. power assistance. This can happen for exam- improve vehicle control (stopping and steer- ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine ing) during severe braking conditions by limit- When the EBA system is activated, the brake is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The ing brake lockup. When the system "senses" pedal will go down and pressure in the brake brake pedal feels harder than usual. impending lockup, braking pressure is auto- system immediately increases to the maxi- Water on brake discs and brake pads matically modulated in order to help prevent mum level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal in order to utilize the system affects braking lockup that could lead to a skid. completely. EBA is automatically deactivated The system performs a brief self-diagnostic Driving in rain and slush or passing through when the brake pedal is released. an automatic car wash can cause water to test when the engine has been started and collect on the brake discs and pads. This will driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto- cause a delay in braking effect when the matic test may be performed when the vehi-

}} 135 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

NOTE Symbols in the instrument panel • When the EBA system is activated, the Symbol Specification brake pedal will go down and pressure Steady glow – Check the brake in the brake system immediately fluid level. If the level is low, fill increases to the maximum level. You must maintain full pressure on the with brake fluid and check for 03 brake pedal in order to utilize the sys- the cause of the brake fluid tem completely. There will be no brak- loss. ing effect if the pedal is released. EBA Steady glow for two seconds is automatically deactivated when the when the engine is started – brake pedal is released. There was a fault in the brake • When the vehicle has been parked for system's ABS function when some time, the brake pedal may sink the engine was last running. more than usual when the engine is started. This is normal and the pedal will return to its usual position when it WARNING is released. If and come on at the same time and the brake level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system-related message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected.

136 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Electric parking brake Applying the electric parking brake NOTE An electric parking brake has the same func- In an emergency the parking brake can tion as a manual parking brake. • be applied when the vehicle is moving by holding in the control. Braking will NOTE be interrupted when the accelerator pedal is depressed or the control is • A faint sound from the parking brake's 03 electric motor can be heard when the released. parking brake is being applied. This • An audible signal will sound during this sound can also be heard during the procedure if the vehicle is moving at automatic function check of the park- speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). ing brake. • The brake pedal will move slightly Parking on a hill when the electric parking brake is Parking brake control • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the applied or released. front wheels so that they point away from 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. the curb. Low battery voltage 2. Push the control. • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the If the battery voltage is too low, the park- > front wheels so that they point toward the ing brake cannot be applied or released. The symbol in the instrument curb. panel flashes while the parking brake is Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery The parking brake should also be applied. voltage is too low, see page 126. being applied and glows steadily when the parking brake has been fully applied. 3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the vehicle is at a standstill. 4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selector must be in position P.

137 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Releasing the electric parking brake the passenger compartment on vehicles parking brake will release when the vehi฀ with the optional keyless drive). cle begins to move. 3. Press firmly on the brake pedal. Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the 4. Pull the parking brake control. vehicle to roll backward when the parking Automatic release brake is released automatically on a steep 03 1. Start the engine. incline. To help avoid this: 1. Keep the electric parking brake lever NOTE pushed in with the left hand while shifting • For safety reasons, the parking brake is into Drive with the right. only released automatically if the engine 2. While pressing the accelerator pedal to is running and the driver is wearing a pull away, release the parking brake lever seat belt. Parking brake control only after the vehicle begins to move. • The electric parking brake will be Manual release released immediately when the acceler- 1. Fasten the seat belt. ator pedal is pressed and the gear Symbol and messages in the instrument panel 2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot selector is in position D or R. and press the START/STOP ENGINE See page 199 for information about display- button (or press the START/STOP 2. Fasten the seat belt. ing or erasing messages. ENGINE button with a valid remote key in 3. Move the gear selector to position D or R and press the accelerator pedal. The

Symbol Message Description/action

"Message" Read the message in the information display

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is being applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.

138 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Symbol Message Description/action

- Park brake not A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Try to apply the parking brake and release it sev- fully released eral times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds.

- Parking brake not A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several 03 applied times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds.

- Parking brake A fault has occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains Service required

WARNING If the vehicle must be parked before the fault has been corrected, always put the gear selector in P and turn the wheels so that they point away from the curb if the vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is pointing downhill.

139 140 *

Option/accessory, formore information, see Introduction. ln ptIfrainSse BI) ...... 191 Blind SpotInformationSystem (BLIS)*...... 187 Rear ParkAssistCamera(PAC)* ...... 183 Park assist*...... 177 Driver AlertSystem*...... 169 Collision warningwithFullAuto-brakeandPedestrianDetection*...... 163 City Safety™...... 160 Distance Alert*...... 149 Adaptive CruiseControl(ACC)*...... 147 Cruise control...... 145 Road signinformation(RSI)*...... 142 Stability system......

G000000 DRIVER SUPPORT 04 Driver support

Stability system

Introduction Spin control (SC) trailer have begun to sway. See page 292 for The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control The spin control function is designed to help more information. system (DSTC) consists of a number of func- prevent the drive wheels from spinning while This system is automatically deactivated if the tions designed to help reduce wheel spin, the vehicle is accelerating. driver selects Sport mode. counteract skidding, and to generally help Corner Traction Control – CTC improve directional stability. CTC compensates for understeering and Operation CAUTION helps provide additional stability when accelerating through a curve by preventing the Sport mode A pulsating sound will be audible when the inside wheel from spinning. This is particularly The stability system is always activated and system is actively operating and is normal. useful when accelerating on a curving high- cannot be switched off. 04 way on-ramp. However, the driver can select Sport mode, Traction control (TC) CTC is most effective if the stability system's which offers more active driving characteris- This function is designed to help reduce Sport mode is selected. See the section tics. In this mode, the engine management wheel spin by transferring power from a drive about Sport mode. system monitors movement of the accelerator wheel that begins to lose traction to the pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving wheel on the opposite side of the vehicle (on Engine Drag Control (EDC) by allowing more lateral movement of the rear the same axle). EDC helps keep the engine running if the wheels before DSTC is activated. wheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., when TC is most active at low speeds. Under certain circumstances, such as when shifting down in the Geartronic manual shift- driving with snow chains, or driving in deep This is one of DSTC's permanent functions ing mode or while using the engine's braking snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to and cannot be switched off. function on a slippery surface. If the engine temporarily use Sport mode for maximum were to stop, power steering would not func- tractive force. Active Yaw Control (AYC) tion, making the vehicle more difficult to This function helps maintain directional stabil- steer. If the driver releases pressure on the acceler- ity, for example when cornering, by braking ator pedal, DSTC will also activate to help one or more of the wheels if the vehicle Trailer Stability Assist – TSA1 stabilize the vehicle. shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally. Trailer Stability Assist helps stabilize a vehicle To switch to Sport mode: This is one of DSTC's permanent functions that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and and cannot be switched off.

1 Included when a Volvo trailer hitch is installed

142 04 Driver support

Stability system

1. Press the My Car button in the center 2. Unselect the symbol and leave the menu Sport mode remains active until the driver console control panel and select My by pressing EXIT. switches it off in the menu or until the engine XC60 DSTC in the menu. > This puts DSTC in Sport mode. is switched off. DSTC will return to normal mode when the engine is restarted.

Symbols and messages in the main instrument panel Symbol Message Description

DSTC Temporarily The DSTC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. DSTC OFF reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required The DSTC system is not functioning properly. 04 • Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it. • If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the system inspected.

"Message" Read the message in the instrument panel

and

Steady glow for 2 secs. The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

Flashing symbol DSTC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

- Sport mode has been activated.

}} 143 04 Driver support

Stability system

WARNING The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but can never replace, the driver's judgment and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

144 04 Driver support

Road sign information (RSI)*

Introduction Operation Displaying the speed limit indication can be deactivated. To do so: • Deselect the alternative in MY CAR Settings Car settings Road Sign Information or cancel by pressing EXIT. Speed alert The driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicle exceeds the posted speed limit by more than 3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when the symbol with the posted speed limit in the instrument panel begins to flash. 04 To activate speed alert: Examples of readable road signs Speed limit information • Check the Speed alert box in MY CAR Road Sign Information (RSI) is a feature that When RSI registers a road sign showing the Settings Car settings Speed alert helps the driver see road signs with the pos- speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol or cancel by pressing EXIT. ted speed limit. on the instrument panel. If the vehicle passes a sign showing the Settings in MY CAR Limitations speed limit, this will be displayed in the center RSI's camera has the same limitations as the console. human eye. See page 173 for more information about the camera's limitations. WARNING Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit RSI does not function in all situations and (such as a sign with a town's name and the is only intended to provide supplementary permitted speed limit) will not be registered information. by RSI. The driver is always responsible for oper- Other factors that may interfere with RSI ating the vehicle safely. include: Possible settings in MY CAR • Faded signs • Signs located in a curve

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145 04 Driver support

Road sign information (RSI)*

• Twisted or damaged signs • Obstructed signs • Signs that are partially covered by snow, ice, etc.

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Cruise control

Operation Engaging the cruise control function Adjusting the set speed Before a speed can be set, the cruise control After a speed has been set, it can be system must be engaged (put in standby increased or decreased by using the or mode). buttons. – Press the CRUISE button (1). 1. Press and hold down or until the > The symbol illuminates and the text vehicle reaches the desired speed. (---) mph (5) indicates that cruise con- > This will become the set speed when trol is in standby mode. the button is released.

NOTE 2. Press or for approximately a half second and release the button to 04 • Putting cruise control in standby mode increase or decrease vehicle speed by does not set a cruising speed. approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Steering wheel-mounted controls and display • When cruise control is in standby Standby mode mode, the driver's seat belt must be NOTE fastened before a cruising speed can Resume set speed be set. • A temporary increase in speed by pressing the accelerator pedal, for less Deactivating than 1 minute (e.g. when passing Setting a speed Activate/set speed another car), does not affect the cur- Use the or buttons set the vehicle's rent cruise control setting. The vehicle Selected speed (gray symbol indicates current speed. The set speed is shown in the will automatically return to the previ- standby mode) display. ously set speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Cruise control active: white symbol (gray symbol indicates standby mode) NOTE • If one of the cruise control buttons is kept depressed for more than approx. Cruise control cannot be engaged at 1 minute cruise control is disengaged. speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h). The engine must then be switched off in order to reset cruise control.

147 04 Driver support

Cruise control

Automatic deactivation WARNING Cruise control is automatically deactivated temporarily if one of the following occurs: There may be a significant increase in speed after the button has been • If the speed drops below approximately pressed. 20 mph (30 km/h). • When the brake pedal is depressed. Deactivation • If the gear selector is moved to position Cruise control is disengaged by pressing N. or by switching off the engine. The set speed • During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. is cleared. 04 • If the vehicle's speed is increased by using the accelerator pedal for more than WARNING 1 minute. Cruise control should not be used in heavy The currently set speed will be saved in the traffic or when driving on wet or slippery system's memory. roads. Cruise control may not maintain set speed on steep downgrades. Temporary deactivation The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise control by pressing 0. The saved speed is shown in brackets in the information display. Resume set speed If cruise control has been deactivated temporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set speed.

148 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Introduction WARNING Function Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover system designed to assist the driver by main- • all driving situations and traffic, taining a set speed or a set time interval to weather and road conditions. The the vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for "Function" section provides informa- use on long straight roads in steady traffic, tion about limitations that the driver such as on highways and other main roads. must be aware of before using this When the driver has set the desired speed feature. and the time interval to the vehicle ahead, • This system is designed to be a sup- ACC functions as follows: plementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's 04 If there are no other vehicles in the lane • attention and judgement. The driver is ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at responsible for maintaining a safe dis- the set speed. tance and speed and must intervene if Function overview1 If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower • Adaptive Cruise Control does not Warning light, braking by driver required moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the sys- maintain a suitable speed or suitable tem will adapt your vehicle's speed to distance to the vehicle ahead. Controls in steering wheel help maintain the set time interval to the Maintenance of ACC components may vehicle ahead. When there are no longer • Radar sensor in front grille only be performed by a trained and slower moving vehicles ahead, your vehi- qualified Volvo technician. cle will accelerate to resume the set Adaptive Cruise Control consists of: speed. • A cruise control system to maintain a set If ACC is switched off completely or in speed standby mode and your vehicle comes too • A system to maintain a set distance to the close to another vehicle ahead, the driver will vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a be warned by the Distance Alert system (see time interval. For example, you can page 160). choose to remain approximately 2 seconds behind the vehicle ahead. The actual distance required to maintain a

1 The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

2-second interval will vary according the adaptive cruise control system. This is nor- driver will then have to maintain a safe dis- speed of the vehicles. mal. tance to the vehicle ahead.

WARNING WARNING WARNING • Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli- The brake pedal moves when the adaptive When Adaptive Cruise Control is in sion avoidance system. The driver is cruise control system modulates the standby mode or is switched off com- always responsible for applying the brakes. Do not rest your foot under the pletely, the brakes will not be modulated brakes if the system does not detect brake pedal. automatically. The driver must assume full another vehicle. control over the vehicle. • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react The ACC system is designed to smoothly 04 to people or animals, or small vehicles regulate speed. However, the driver must Warning light—driver braking required such as bicycles and motorcycles. It apply the brakes in situations that require Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force also does not react to slow moving, immediate braking. This applies when there that is equivalent to approximately 40% of parked or approaching vehicles, or are great differences in speed between vehi- the vehicle's total braking capacity. In situa- stationary objects. cles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly. tions requiring more brake force than ACC • Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in can provide and if the driver does not apply demanding driving conditions such as WARNING the brakes, an audible signal from the Colli- city driving or other heavy traffic situa- sion Warning system will sound and warning tions, in slippery conditions, when Due to limitations in the radar sensor, light will illuminate (see page 170) in the braking may occur unexpectedly or not at there is a great deal of water or slush all, see page 156. windshield to alert the driver to react. on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding NOTE roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active mode at any permitted speed. However, if the Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h) contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, driver is not looking straight ahead may same lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. make the visual warning signal in the wind- ACC disengages (goes into standby mode) Your vehicle's speed is regulated by acceler- shield difficult to see. and will no longer modulate the brakes2. The ating and braking. The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by the

2 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional Queue Assist.

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING Operation Putting ACC in standby mode Before ACC can be used to regulate speed Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it vehicles detected by the radar sensor, see page 156. In some cases there may be no must first be put in standby mode. warning or the warning may be delayed. To do so: The driver should always apply the brakes when necessary. • Press (2). > The same symbol (7) appears (in white) in Steep inclines and/or heavy loads the instrument panel to indicate that ACC ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly is in standby mode. level roads. The system may have difficulty 04 maintaining the correct distance to a vehicle NOTE ahead on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or is towing a trailer. In Controls and display The driver's door must be closed and the these situations, the driver should always be Resume previous settings. driver's seat belt must be fastened before ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv- prepared to apply the brakes if necessary. Off/On/Standby mode er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's door is opened, ACC will return to standby Decrease/increase time interval mode.

Put in active mode and set a speed (each Setting a speed additional press increases/decreases Once ACC has been put in standby mode: speed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h)) Set speed (shown in green when active, • Press or (4). shown in white when in standby mode) > The set speed, for example 60 mph (5), Time interval will be magnified for several seconds and the frame around the speed will change ACC active (green symbol) or in standby colors from white to green to indicate mode (white symbol) that this speed has been stored (set).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

When this symbol has changed col- pedal, the vehicle's speed when the but- Different time intervals can ors from white to green, ACC is in ton is pressed will be set. be selected and are shown in active mode and the vehicle will • Press and hold one of the buttons to the instrument panel3 as 1–5 maintain the set speed. increase/decrease the speed by 1 mph horizontal bars. The greater This symbol indicates that (approximately 1 km/h) at a time. Release the number of bars, the you are approaching a vehi- the button when you have reached the longer the time interval. One cle ahead. desired speed. bar represents a time interval of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approxi- ACC will switch from main- NOTE mately 3 seconds. taining a set speed to maintaining a set distance from • If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control To set/change a time interval: 04 buttons is pressed for more than that vehicle. • Press the / buttons (3). approximately one minute, ACC will be When this happens, a speed deactivated. The engine must then be At low speeds, when the distance to the vehi- range will be indicated on switched off and restarted to reset cle ahead is short, ACC increases the time the speedometer: ACC. interval slightly. In order to follow the vehicle The higher speed (the cur- • In some situations Adaptive Cruise ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows rently set speed (5)) will be Control cannot be put in active mode. the time interval to vary considerably in cer- marked in green. Cruise control Unavailable is shown tain situations. in the display, see page 158. The lower speed in the range is the speed of WARNING the vehicle ahead. Setting a time interval • Only use a time interval that is suitable Changing the set speed The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be in current traffic conditions. • After a speed has been set, it can be increased by pressing and decreased by • A short time interval gives the driver increased or decreased by briefly press- pressing . The current time interval is limited reaction time if an unexpected ing the or buttons. Each time one shown briefly in the display following adjust- situation occurs in traffic. of these buttons is pressed, the vehicle's ment. speed changes by 3 mph (approximately 5 km/h). If the speed is increased by pressing the accelerator

3 The same symbol appears if Distance Alert (see page 160) is activated

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Standby mode (temporary deactivation) NOTE • brake temperature is high To temporarily deactivate ACC (put it in • the radar sensor is obstructed by, for standby mode): If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for a short time, such as when passing example, wet snow or rain. • another vehicle, ACC is deactivated tem- Resuming the set speed Press . porarily and is reactivated when the pedal If ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactiva- This symbol and the marking for the set is released. speed with change colors from green to ted by pressing the button on the steering white. Automatic standby mode wheel keypad. The vehicle will return to the most recently set speed. The previously set speed and time interval are ACC is linked to other systems such as the resumed by pressing . stability and traction control system (DSTC). If this system is not functioning properly, ACC WARNING 04 will switch off automatically. WARNING The vehicle may accelerate quickly after In the event of automatic deactivation, an has been pressed if its current speed is The vehicle may accelerate quickly after audible signal will sound and the message considerably lower than the set speed. has been pressed if its current speed is Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the considerably lower than the set speed. instrument panel. The driver must then inter- Passing another vehicle vene and adapt the vehicle's speed to the If your vehicle’s speed is being regulated by surrounding traffic and regulate the distance Standby mode due to action by the ACC and the driver indicates that he/she to the vehicle ahead. driver would like to pass the vehicle ahead by using ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in An automatic switch to standby mode may be the left turn signal, ACC can assist by accel- standby mode: caused if: erating briefly. • if the brakes are applied • engine speed (rpm) is too high/low This function is active at speeds above • if the gear selector is moved to N • The driver's door is opened approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). • if the driver drives faster than the set • The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt speed for more than 1 minute. • the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph In this happens, the driver will have to regu- (30 km/h)4 late the vehicle's speed. • the wheels lose traction

4 Does not apply to vehicles equipped with the optional Queue Assist

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING WARNING moving at speed below 18 mph (30 km/h)) Please be aware that this function will also Switching from ACC to CC means that: cause the vehicle to accelerate briefly in • Automatic standby mode when ACC no longer certain situations other than passing • Your vehicle will automati- changes target vehicles another vehicle, for example using the left cally maintain a set distance to a vehi- • No automatic braking when at a standstill turn signal to indicate a lane change or a cle ahead. The parking brake is applied automati- turn toward a highway exit at speeds • • Only the set speed will be maintained cally above approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). and the driver will have to apply the brakes when needed. Please note that the lowest speed that can be Turning ACC off completely set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle 04 • From standby mode, press once. Switching from CC to ACC ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist • From active mode, press twice. Switch off cruise control by pressing once consists of the following features: or twice as needed according to the instruc- The set speed and time interval are then tions in the previous section "Turning ACC off Enhanced speed interval cleared from the system's memory and can- completely." The next time the system is not be resumed by pressing . switched on, ACC will be reactivated. NOTE The driver's door must be closed and the Toggling between ACC and CC Queue Assist driver's seat belt must be fastened before (standard Cruise Control) ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv- Introduction er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's Switching from ACC to CC Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is door is opened, ACC will return to standby mode. This may be useful if, for example, the radar linked to your vehicle's automatic transmis- sensor is obstructed in some way. See the sion. section "The radar sensor and its limitations" Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval on page 156 for additional information. Queue Assist consists of the following func- to the vehicle ahead at any permissible tions: speed, including a complete stop. • Press and hold the button; the symbol Enhanced speed interval (including when in the instrument panel will switch from • In order to activate ACC at speeds below the vehicle is at a complete stop or is to . 18 mph (30 km/h): > This activates the standard cruise control function (see page 147).

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

• The vehicle ahead must be within a rea- NOTE WARNING sonable distance (not farther away than approx. 100 ft/30 meters) ACC can remain active and keep your At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC vehicle at a standstill for up to 4 minutes. will not react to a stationary vehicle and • The lowest speed that can be selected is After 4 minutes have elapsed, the parking apply the brakes but will instead acceler- 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also brake will be engaged and ACC will go into ate to the previously set speed. The driver help maintain the set time interval to the standby mode. must actively apply the brakes to stop the vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including vehicle. a complete stop. To reactivate ACC, the driver must release the parking brake (see page 138). During short stops (less than approximately ACC disengages and goes into standby 3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehi- Automatic standby mode when ACC mode if: cle will begin moving again automatically as 04 soon as the vehicle ahead begins to move. changes target vehicles • Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph (15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle the target object is a stationary vehicle or ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automat- some other type of object such as e.g., a ically go into standby mode. speed bump. The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in • Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph one of the following ways: (15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to • By pressing follow. • By accelerating up to at least 3 mph No automatic braking when at a (4 km/h). ACC will then resume following If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be standstill the vehicle ahead. a stationary vehicle ahead In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply Your vehicle will then resume following the The following only applies at speeds below the brakes and go into standby mode while vehicle ahead at the set time interval. approximately 18 mph (30 km/h): the vehicle is not moving. This means that the driver will have to apply the brakes. If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle that the radar sensor has detected) from a This happens if: moving vehicle to a stationary one, the sys- • The driver presses the brake pedal tem will apply the brakes in your vehicle. • The parking brake is activated

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

• The gear selected is moved to P,N or R WARNING Situations where ACC may not function • optimally The driver presses the button to put • If there is visible damage to the front ACC in standby mode grille or you suspect that the radar The parking brake is applied sensor may be damaged in any way, WARNING automatically contact a trained and qualified Volvo • The radar sensor has a limited field of In certain situations, ACC will apply the park- service technician as soon as possible. vision. In some situations it may detect ing brake in order to continue keeping the The radar sensor may only function a vehicle later than expected or not vehicle at a standstill. partially (or not at all) if it is damaged detect other vehicles at all. or is not securely fastened in place. This happens if: • If ACC is not functioning properly, • Accessories or other objects, such as cruise control will also be disabled. 04 • The driver opens the door or takes off extra headlights, must not be installed his/her seat belt in front of the grille. • DSTC is put in Sport mode (see • Modification of the radar sensor could page 142) make its use illegal. • ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for more than 2 minutes The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehi- • The engine has been switched off cles ahead is impeded: • The brakes have overheated • if the radar sensor is obstructed and cannot detect other vehicles, for example in The radar sensor and its limitations heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are obscuring the radar sensor. In addition to being used by ACC, the radar sensor is also used by Distance Alert (see NOTE page 160) and Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection (see Keep the area in front of the radar sensor page 169). This sensor is designed to detect clean. cars or larger vehicles driving in the same direction as your vehicle, in the same lane. • if the speed of vehicles ahead is significantly different from your own speed.

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

In curves, the radar sensor may detect WARNING the wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehicle. • Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is WARNING always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect • Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover another vehicle. all driving situations and traffic, • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react weather and road conditions. The to people or animals, or small vehicles "Function" section provides informa- such as bicycles and motorcycles. It tion about limitations that the driver also does not react to slow moving, must be aware of before using this parked or approaching vehicles, or 04 feature. stationary objects. • This system is designed to be a sup- • Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in plementary driving aid. It is not, how- demanding driving conditions such as ever, intended to replace the driver's city driving or other heavy traffic situa- attention and judgement. The driver is tions, in slippery conditions, when responsible for maintaining a safe dis- there is a great deal of water or slush tance and speed and must intervene if on the road, during heavy rain or Adaptive Cruise Control does not snow, in poor visibility, on winding maintain a suitable speed or suitable roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. distance to the vehicle ahead. Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink) • Maintenance of ACC components may In certain situations, the radar sensor only be performed by a trained and Fault tracing and actions cannot detect vehicles at close quarters, qualified Volvo technician. If the message Radar blocked See manual for example a vehicle that suddenly is displayed, this means that the radar signals enters the lane between your vehicle and from the sensor have been obstructed and the target vehicle. that a vehicle ahead cannot be detected. Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the center of the This, in turn, means that the functions of the lane may remain undetected. ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian The table lists possible causes for this mes- Detection will not function. sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction. way.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar. 04 Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect with the radar signals. the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that display. it is no longer obstructed.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description

Green symbol A speed has been set.

White symbol ACC is in standby mode but no speed has been set.

- Standard cruise control has been selected manually.

- DSTC Normal to enable ACC cannot be put in active mode until the stability system DSTC is switched normal operating mode, Cruise see page 142 for more information.

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Symbol Message Description

- Cruise control Cancel- ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver has to regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the led vehicle ahead.

- Cruise control Unavail- ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to: able • high brake temperature • the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.) Radar blocked See ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot manual detect other vehicles. 04 In this situation, the driver can switch to standard cruise control, see page 154 See page 156 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

- Cruise control Service ACC is not functioning. required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

- Press Brake To hold + The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep an audible signal the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll. The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.

- Below 30 km/h Only This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle following ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159 04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

Introduction NOTE Depending on the optional equipment Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- selected, there may not be room for a Dis- Distance Alert only monitors distance to trol and is a function that provides informa- tance Alert button in the center console. In the vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise this case, the function is controlled through tion about the time interval to the vehicle Control is in standby mode or off. ahead. the menu system. Press MY CAR and go to Settings Car settings Distance alert Distance Alert is active at speeds above WARNING approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time inter- On/Off. Distance Alert only indicates the distance val information is only given for a vehicle that Setting a time interval is driving ahead of your vehicle in the same to the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the direction. No information is provided for vehi- speed of your vehicle. 04 cles driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a standstill. Operation

Controls and display Time interval: Increase/decrease

Time interval On Amber warning light1. Press the button in the center instrument Press to increase the interval or to An amber warning light in the windshield panel to switch this function on or off. The decrease it. glows steadily if your vehicle is closer to the indicator light in the button illuminates when one ahead than the set time interval. the function is on.

1 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

Five different time intervals WARNING NOTE can be selected and are shown in the display as 1–5 Only use a time interval that is suitable in Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light horizontal bars. The greater current traffic conditions. contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may the number of bars, the make the visual warning signal in the wind- longer the time interval. One Limitations shield difficult to see. bar represents approximately 1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor approximately 3 seconds. used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Col- WARNING lision Warning system. See page 156 for • Bad weather or winding roads may NOTE more information on the radar sensor’s limitations. affect the radar sensor’s capacity to 04 • The higher your vehicle’s speed, the detect vehicles ahead. greater the distance to the vehicle • The size of the vehicle ahead, such as ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a a motorcycle, may also make it difficult given time interval. to detect. This may result in the warn- • The set time interval is also used by ing light illuminating at a shorter dis- Adaptive Cruise Control, see tance than the one that has been set, page 151. or that the light will not come on at all.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161 04 Driver support

Distance Alert*

Symbols and text messages Symbol Message Description

Radar blocked See Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and can- manual not detect other vehicles. See page 156 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Serv- Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning prop- ice required erly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

City Safety™

Introduction City Safety™ activates in situations where the WARNING City Safety™1 is a support system designed driver has not applied the brakes in time, • City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to to help the driver avoid low speed collisions which means that the system cannot help the driver in all situations. the driver. It can never replace the when driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go driver’s attention to traffic conditions traffic. City Safety™ should not be used to alter the or his/her responsibility for operating City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s way in which the driver operates the vehicle. the vehicle in a safe manner. speed is below approximately 2 mph The driver should never rely solely on this • City Safety™ does not function in all (4 km/h). This means that City Safety™ will system to safely stop the vehicle. driving situations or in all traffic, not react if your vehicle approaches another Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will weather or road conditions. vehicle at very low speed, for example, when not be aware of City Safety™ except when parking. the system intervenes when a low-speed col- 04 The function is active at speeds up to lision is imminent. approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assists If the vehicle is also equipped with the the driver by applying the brakes automati- optional Collision Warning with Full Auto- cally, thereby avoiding or helping to reduce brake and Pedestrian Detection system, the the effects of a collision. two systems interact. For more information City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late about the Collision Warning with Auto-brake as possible to help avoid unnecessary activa- system, see page 169. tion. City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if a low-speed collision is imminent. However, the system will not intervene in situations where the driver actively steers the vehicle or applies the brakes, even if a collision cannot be avoided. This is done in order to always give the driver’s actions highest priority.

1 City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

163 04 Driver support

City Safety™

WARNING Function tion display to indicate that the system is/has been active. • City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles traveling in the same direction as your NOTE vehicle and does not react to small vehicles or motorcycles or to people or • When City Safety™ applies the animals. brakes, the brake lights will illuminate. • City Safety™ is not activated when • In cases where City Safety™ has stop- your vehicle is backing up. ped the vehicle, the system will then • City Safety™ functions at speeds up release the brakes. The driver must to 30 mph (50 km/h). This system can apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at 04 help prevent a collision if the differ- a standstill. ence in speed between your vehicle

and the vehicle ahead is less than 2 9 mph (15 km/h). If the difference in Location of the laser sensor in the windshield Using City Safety™ speed is greater, a collision cannot be City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you avoided but the speed at which the using a laser sensor mounted in the upper NOTE collision occurs can be reduced. The section of the windshield. If a collision is The City Safety™ function is activated driver must apply the vehicle’s brakes imminent, City Safety™ will automatically automatically each time the engine has for full braking effect. apply the brakes, which may feel like hard been switched off and restarted. • City Safety™ will not intervene in a braking. potential collision situation if the vehi- If the difference in speed between your vehi- On and Off cle is being driven actively. The driver cle and the vehicle ahead is more than In certain situations, it may be desirable to is always responsible for maintaining a approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™ safe distance to a vehicle or object switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving alone cannot prevent a collision from taking ahead. in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc. place. The driver must apply the brakes to may obscure the hood and windshield. help avoid a collision or reduce its effect. When the engine is running, City Safety™ can When the function activates and applies the be switched off as follows: brakes, a message will appear in the informa-

2 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

164 04 Driver support

City Safety™

Press My Car in the center console control WARNING NOTE panel and go to Settings Car settings The laser sensor has certain limitations • Keep the windshield in front of the Driver support systems City Safety. and its function may be reduced (or it may laser sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. Select Off. not function at all) in conditions such as See page 164. heavy rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will thick, blowing dust or snow. Condensa- • Snow or ice on the hood deeper than reactivate when the engine is restarted. tion, dirt, ice or snow on the windshield 2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sen- may also interfere with the sensor’s func- sor. Keep the hood free of ice and WARNING tion. snow. The laser sensor emits light when the igni- • Do not mount or in any way attach anything on the windshield that could tion is in mode II or higher, even if City Objects such as warning flags hanging from 04 Safety™ has been switched off. long objects on the roof or accessories such obstruct the laser sensor. as auxiliary lights or protective arches on the To switch City Safety™ on again: front of the vehicle that are higher than the hood may also impede the sensor’s function. Troubleshooting • Follow the same procedure as for switch- If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increa- ing City Safety™ off but select On. the information display, this indicates that the ses on slippery road surfaces, which may City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a colli- some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead Limitations sion. In situations like this, the DSTC system of you, which means that the system is not The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed (see page 142) will help provide the best pos- functioning. to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles sible braking capacity and stability. ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and However, this message will not be displayed City Safety™ emits a laser beam and meas- darkness. in all situations in which the sensor is ures the way in which the light is reflected. obstructed. For this reason, the driver must Therefore, vehicles or objects with low-reflec- ensure that the area of the windshield in front tive surfaces may not be detected. Normally, of the sensor is always kept clean. the license plate and taillight reflectors give the rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient The following table shows some of the situa- reflective surfaces to be detected. tions that can cause the message to be displayed and suggested actions.

165 04 Driver support

City Safety™

Cause Action CAUTION The laser sensor

The area of the wind- Clean the If a crack, scratch or stone chip should occur in the section of the windshield in shield in front of the sen- windshield or front the laser sensor, contact a trained sor is dirty or covered by remove the ice/ and qualified Volvo service technician to ice or snow. snow. repair or replace the windshield (see the illustration showing the location of the sen- The laser sensor's field Remove the sor on page 164). Failing to do so may of view is obstructed. obstruction. result in reduced City Safety™ functionality. To help prevent limited or reduced func- 04 tionality, please also observe the following: • Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches or stone chips on the windshield in front of the laser sensor The upper decal describes the laser beam's should not be repaired; in such cases, classification and contains the following text: the entire windshield should be Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly replaced. with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class • Before the windshield is replaced, 1M laser product. contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that The lower decal describes the laser beam's the correct windshield is ordered and physical data and contains the text: installed. If the wrong type of windshield is used, this may cause City IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with Safety™ to function improperly or not FDA performance standards for laser prod- at all. Volvo recommends the use of ucts except for deviations pursuant to Laser only Genuine Volvo Replacement Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001 Windshields. The laser beam's physical data is listed in the • When replacing windshield wipers, use following table: the same type or ones approved by Volvo.

166 04 Driver support

City Safety™

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ WARNING Symbols and messages in the display When City Safety™ automatically applies the Maximum average output 45 mW Eye injury may occur if any of the following points are not followed: brakes, one or more of the symbols in the main instrument panel may illuminate and its Pulse length 33 ns • It is essential that all pertinent instruc- associated message will be displayed. tions be followed when handling laser Divergence (horizontal × verti- 28° × 12° instruments. Testing, repairing, remov- A text message can be erased by pressing cal) ing, adjusting and/or replacing any briefly on the OK button on the turn signal components in the laser sensor may lever. NOTE only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The function of aftermarket laser detectors 04 may be affected by City Safety's laser sen- • Do not remove the laser sensor sor. (including removal of the lenses). A laser sensor that has been removed belongs to laser class 3B according to WARNING standard IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser class 3B present a risk of injury to the The laser sensor emits light when the ignition is in mode II or higher, even if City eyes. Safety™ has been switched off. • The laser sensor’s connector must be disconnected before the sensor is removed from the windshield. • The laser sensor must be mounted in place on the windshield before connecting the sensor’s connector. • Do not view the laser sensor (which emits spreading, invisible laser beams) with optical instruments from a distance of less than 4 inches (100 mm).

167 04 Driver support

City Safety™

Symbol Message Meaning/action required

Auto braking by City City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically. Safety

Windscreen Sensors The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction. blocked • Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s). For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see page 165.

04 City Safety Service City Safety™ is not functioning. required • If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

168 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Introduction The system should not be used in such a way WARNING Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and that the driver changes his/her way of operat- Collision Warning does not work in all Pedestrian Detection is designed to assist the ing the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on • driving, traffic, weather and road con- driver if there is a risk of a collision with a the system, the chances of an accident even- tually occurring increase considerably. ditions. It does not react to vehicles pedestrian, a vehicle ahead that is at a stand- not traveling in the same direction as still or one that is moving in the same direc- The Collision Warning and City Safety™ sys- your vehicle. tion as your vehicle. tems supplement each other. See page 163 • Collision Warning does not react to Collision Warning consists of the following for detailed information about City Safety™. animals. three functions: WARNING • Warnings are only provided when the Collision Warning warns the driver of a risk of collision is high. The "Function" • 04 potential collision situation. No automatic system can be guaranteed section provides information about Brake Support helps the driver brake to function 100% correctly in all situations. limitations that the driver must be • For that reason, never test the Auto-brake efficiently in a critical situation. aware of before using Collision Warn- system by driving toward a person or ing. • Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati- object. This could result in serious injury or cally if a collision with a pedestrian or death. • Collision Warning will not provide a another vehicle cannot be avoided and warning or brake the vehicle for the driver does not apply the brakes in pedestrians at speeds above 50 mph time or steer around the person/vehicle. (80 km/h). Auto-brake can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at which a collision occurs. Since Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is activated in circumstances where the driver should have begun braking much sooner, the system will not be able to assist the driver in all situations. This system is designed to activate as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary interven- tion.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

WARNING Function Brake Support If the risk of collision continues to increase • Collision Warning will not provide a after the collision warning has been given, warning or brake the vehicle for Brake Support is activated. Brake Support pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels, prepares the brake system to react quickly, even if there is street lighting in the and the brakes are applied slightly. This may area. be experienced as a light tug. • The auto-brake function can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking impact but the driver should always effect will be provided. Brake Support also apply the brakes for the best possible increases brake force if the system deter- 04 braking effect, even if auto-brake is mines that the driver has not applied ade- actively applying the brakes. quate pressure on the brake pedal. Never wait for a collision warning. This • Function overview Auto-brake system is designed to be a supple- If a collision is imminent and the driver has mentary driving aid. It is not, however, Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk not applied the brakes or begun to steer intended to replace the driver's atten- around the vehicle or pedestrian, the auto- tion and judgement. The driver is Radar sensor brake function is activated without the driver responsible for maintaining a safe dis- Camera tance and speed, even when the colli- pressing the brake pedal. Full brake force is sion warning system is in use. applied to help reduce the vehicle’s speed Collision Warning when the collision occurs or limited brake Maintenance of the Collision Warning • The radar sensor and the camera work force is applied if this is sufficient to avoid the system's components must only be together to detect a pedestrian, stationary collision. performed by a trained and qualified vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the Volvo technician. same direction as your vehicle. If there is a NOTE risk of collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian, the driver is alerted by a flashing red warning The auto-brake and brake support func- light and an audible warning signal. Collision tions are always on and cannot be turned off. warning is active at speeds above 3 mph (4 km/h).

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Operation Activating/deactivating the audible WARNING Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on warning signal only The setting Short should only be used the center console control panel and using The audible warning signal can be activated/ • in situations where traffic is light and the menus displayed. deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the cen- moving at low speeds. ter console control panel and going to Activating/deactivating both warning Settings Car settings Driver support • Collision Warning alerts the driver to signals the risk of a collision but this function systems Warning sound if risk of To switch Collision Warning's audible and cannot reduce the driver’s reaction collision. visual signals on or off at the same time, time. press MY CAR on the center console control Setting a warning distance • For Collision Warning to be as effec- panel and go to Settings Car settings This setting determines the distance at which tive as possible, it is recommended that Distance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see 04 Driver support systems Collision the visual and audible warnings are triggered. page 160. Warning. If Collision Warning is on, the sys- Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing tem will perform a self-test each time the MY CAR on the center console control panel engine is started by briefly illuminating the and going to Settings Car settings NOTE warning light. See page 201 for a description Driver support systems Collision When Adaptive Cruise Control is used, of the menu system. • Warning Warning distance. the warning light and signal will be When the engine is switched on, the Collision used by that function, even if the The warning distance determines the level of Warning setting that was being used when it warnings provided by Collision Warn- sensitivity used by the system. The warning was switched off will be the default setting. ing have been deactivated by the distance Long provides an earlier warning. driver. Begin by using Long and if the system gives NOTE too many warnings, try changing to Normal. • In situations where traffic is moving at considerably different speeds, or if the The auto-brake and pedestrian detection features are always on, even if the audible vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn- and visual warning signals have been ings may be considered to be late, deactivated. even if the setting Long has been selected.

Checking settings The current Collision Warning settings can be checked by pressing MY CAR on the center

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

console control panel and going to Settings Limitations WARNING Car settings Driver support systems Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light In certain situations, the system can- contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the • Collision Warning. not provide warnings or warnings may driver is not looking straight ahead may make Maintenance be delayed if traffic conditions or other the visual warning signal in the windshield dif- external factors make it impossible for ficult to see. For this reason, always activate the radar sensor or camera to detect a the audible warning signal. pedestrian or a vehicle ahead. Slippery driving conditions increase braking • Warnings may not be provided if the distance, which can reduce the system's distance to the vehicle ahead is short, capacity to avoid a collision. In these condi- or if movements of the steering wheel/ 04 tions, the ABS and DSTC systems provide brake pedal are great, such as during the best possible braking effect while helping active driving. to maintain stability. • The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and provides warnings NOTE and braking effect most effectively at speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h). For The visual warning signal may be tempo- stationary or slow-moving vehicles, the Camera and radar sensor1. rarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature due to system functions best if your vehicle’s In order to function properly, the camera and strong sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the speed is below approximately 45 mph laser sensor must be kept clean. Dirt, ice, audible warning signal will be used, even if (70 km/h). snow, etc., will reduce the function of these it has been deactivated in the menu sys- • Warnings for stationary or slow-mov- components. tem. ing vehicles may not be provided in dark conditions or in poor visibility. Remove ice and snow when necessary and wash these areas regularly with a suitable car washing liquid. The Collision Warning system uses the same radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For more information on the radar sensor and its limitations, see page 156.

1 The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

NOTE The camera’s limitations WARNING The camera is used by Collision Warning with If warnings are given too frequently, the Auto-brake, Driver Alert Control (see • The camera has the same limitations warning distance can be reduced (see page 177), and Lane Departure Warning (see as the human eye. In other words, its page 171). This causes the system to pro- “vision is impaired” by adverse page 180). vide later warnings, which decreases the weather conditions such as heavy total number of warnings provided. snowfall, dense fog, etc. These condi- NOTE tions may reduce the function of sys- WARNING • To help protect the camera in very hot tems that depend on the camera or conditions, it may be temporarily cause these systems to temporarily • The system is not activated at speeds switched off for approximately 15 stop functioning. under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). There- minutes after the engine has been • Never place any objects, decals, etc., 04 fore, it will not brake your vehicle if you started. on the windshield in front of the cam- approach a vehicle ahead at very low era. This could reduce or block the speed, such as when parking. • Keep the section of the windshield in front of the camera clean and free of camera’s function, and could cause • The driver's actions always have high- ice, snow, or condensation. one or more of the systems that utilize est priority and override the Collision the camera to stop functioning. Warning system. This means that the • Strong sunlight, reflections from the system will not intervene in situations road surface, ice or snow covering the where the driver is actively steering, road, a dirty road surface, or unclear braking or pressing the accelerator lane marker lines may drastically pedal, even if a collision is imminent. reduce the camera’s capacity to • When Auto-brake has prevented a col- detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian lision with a stationary object, your or another vehicle. vehicle will remain at a standstill for approx. 1.5 seconds. If your vehicle has been braked for a moving vehicle ahead, your vehicle's speed will be reduced to the same speed as that vehicle's.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Pedestrians The following conditions apply: Fault tracing and actions • In order to detect a pedestrian, the sys- If the message Windscreen Sensors tem must have a full view of the person's blocked is displayed, this means that the entire body and the person must be at camera is obscured and cannot detect least 32 in. (80 cm) tall. pedestrians, vehicles or road marker lines in • The system cannot detect a pedestrian front of the vehicle. carrying a large object. This, in turn, means that Collision Warning • The camera's capacity to see a pedes- with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detec- trian at dawn or dusk is limited, much as tion, Lane Departure Warning, and Driver it is for the human eye. Alert Control will not have full functionality. 04 • The camera's function is deactivated and The table lists possible causes for this mes- will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or sage being displayed, and suitable actions. The system cannot identify all pedestrians in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in the area. The Collision Warning system can only identify and detect a pedestrian who is standing WARNING upright. This person can be standing still, walking or running. • Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is designed This means that the system has to be able to to be a supplementary driving aid. It is identify a person's head, arms, shoulders, not, however, intended to replace the legs, the upper and lower parts of the body driver's attention and judgement. The and a person's pattern of movement when driver is always responsible for operat- walking or running. ing the vehicle in a safe manner. If parts of the body are not visible to the cam- • The system cannot detect all pedes- era, the system cannot detect the pedestrian. trians in all situations, such as in darkness/at night and cannot detect partially hidden pedestrians, people who are less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm) tall, or people wearing clothing that obscures the contours of their bodies.

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Cause Action

The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera. with ice or snow.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the camera.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to regis- display. ter visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this 04 dirty. surface cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description

Collision Warning Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will disappear Off after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK button.

Collision Warning Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate the Unavailable function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Auto braking was Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button. activated

Windscreen Sen- The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by snow, sors blocked ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see page 173 for more information on the camera’s limitations.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175 04 Driver support

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Symbol Message Description

Radar blocked See Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for example manual by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other vehicles, see page 156 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning. Service required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Introduction Driver Alert Control (DAC)– DAC is designed to help detect a slowly The Driver Alert System is designed to help a introduction changing driving pattern. It is primarily driver who may be becoming fatigued or who intended to be used on main roads and is not is inadvertently leaving the lane. meant for use in city traffic.

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ- WARNING ent functions that can be switched on together or separately. • DAC is not intended to extend the duration of driving. Always plan breaks Driver Alert Control (DAC) • at regular intervals to help remain alert. Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see • In certain cases, fatigue may not affect page 180 • the driver’s behavior. In situations of 04 When one or both of the functions has been this type, no warning will be provided. switched on, it is in standby mode and is acti- Therefore, it is important to take vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of breaks at regular intervals, regardless 40 mph (65 km/h). This function is intended to alert the driver if of whether or not DAC has given a warning. The function deactivates if the vehicle's his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the speed goes under 37 mph (60 km/h). driver is distracted or fatigued. Limitations Both functions use a camera that is depend- In certain situations, DAC may provide warn- ent on the road/lane being clearly marked by NOTE ings even if the driver’s driving pattern has painted lines on each side. The camera has certain limitations, see not become erratic. page 156. WARNING • if the driver is testing the LDW function The Driver Alert System does not function A camera monitors the painted lines marking • in strong crosswinds in all situations and is designed to be a the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and • on grooved road surfaces. supplementary aid. It is not, however, compares the direction of the road with the intended to replace the driver’s attention driver’s movements of the steering wheel. and judgement. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the lane smoothly.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Operating DAC 201 for more information on the menu sys- If the vehicle is being driven errati- tem. cally, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal and the message On/Off Driver Alert Time for a break is To put Driver Alert in standby mode: displayed. The warning will be repeated after • In the MY CAR menu, scroll to Car a short time if the driving pattern remains the settings Driver support systems same. Driver Alert and check the box. If the box Press the OK button to erase a message. is not checked, the function is off. Function WARNING 04 Driver Alert is activated when the vehicle • An alert should be taken seriously exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h) and will since it is sometimes difficult for a remain active as long as the speed is over driver to realize that he/she is fatigued. Settings are made using menu system and approx. 37 mph (60 km/h). • In the event of a warning or if the the display in the center console. See page driver feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible in a safe place and rest.

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Symbols and messages Instrument panel Symbol Message Description

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message. break

Windscreen Sensors The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of blocked the windshield in front of the camera. See page 173 for information on the camera’s limitations. 04

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message required remains in the display.

Center console display SymbolA Message Description

- Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on.

- Driver Alert Available The function is actived.

- Driver Alert Standby <65 The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h). km/h

- Driver Alert Unavailable The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 173 for information on the camera’s limitations.

A Symboler .

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)– Operation and function introduction

04 LDW displayed in the instrument panel The LDW symbol has white side marker LDW can be switched on or off by pressing • lines: the function is active and "sees" This function is designed to help reduce the the button on the center console. A light in one or both of the road's side marker the button illuminates when the function is risk of accidents in situations where the vehi- lines. cle leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving on. This is supplemented by graphic displays off the road or into the opposite lane. LDW in the instrument panel, for example: • The LDW symbol has gray side marker consists of a camera that monitors the lane’s lines: the function is active but cannot side marker lines. The driver is alerted by an "see" one or both of the road's side marker lines. audible signal if the vehicle crosses a side marker line or the road’s center dividing line. or • The LDW symbol has gray side marker lines: the function is in standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h). • The LDW symbol has no side marker lines: – the function is deactivated.

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

WARNING Settings Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be The driver will only be warned once for each time the wheels cross a marker line. made in the menu system by pressing My No alarm will be given if a marker line is Car. Go to Settings Car settings between the wheels. Driver support systems Lane Departure Warning. Limitations There are two alternatives: The camera used by LDW has the same limi- On at start-up: This selection switches LDW tations as the human eye. See page173 for on each time the engine is started. Otherwise, more information about the camera's limita- the system will be in the mode that it was in 04 tions. when the engine was switched off. Increased sensitivity: This selection increa- NOTE ses the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be No warning signal will be given in the cer- given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations tain situations, such as: apply. When this setting is being used, the • If the turn signal is being used system only needs to monitor lane marker lines on one side of the vehicle to change sta- The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1 • tus to Lane Depart Warn Available. • The accelerator pedal is pressed quickly1 • If the steering wheel is moved quickly1 • In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s body to sway

1 When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181 04 Driver support

Driver Alert System*

Symbols and messages Symbol Message Description

Lane departure warning ON/ The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds. Lane departure warning OFF

- Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

- Lane Depart. Warning Unavail- The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph able at this speed (65 km/h). 04 - Lane Depart Warn Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines or the camera is not functioning properly. See page 173 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 173 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the required message remains in the display.

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Park assist*

Introduction Function Activating/deactivating The park assist system is designed to assist The system is activated automatically when you when driving into parking spaces, the vehicle is started. garages, etc. It utilizes ultrasound sensors in – Press the Park assist button on the center the front bumper and rear bumper(s) to meas- console to temporarily deactivate the sys- ure the distance to a vehicle or an object that tem(s). may be close to the front or rear of your vehi- > The indicator light in the button will go cle. An audible signal and symbols in the out when the system has been deacti- audio system’s display indicate the distance vated. to the object. Park assist will be automatically reactivated 04 NOTE the next time the engine is started, or if the button is pressed (the indicator light in the A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated button will illuminate). with the vehicle's electrical system will be Park assist button included in the measurement of the availa- The system is activated automatically when NOTE ble space behind the vehicle. the vehicle is started. The indicator light in the button in the center console illuminates when Park assist is disengaged automatically WARNING the system is on. when the parking brake is applied. Park Assist is an information system, NOT • The front park assist system is active a safety system. This system is designed from the time the engine is started until to be a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle exceeds a speed of approxi- the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to mately 6 mph (10 km/h). It is also active replace the driver's attention and judge- when the vehicle is backing up. ment. • Rear park assist is active when the engine is running and reverse gear has been selected.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183 04 Driver support

Park assist*

Signals from the park assist system Audible signal Rear park assist The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone that pulses faster as you come close to an object, and becomes constant when you are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object in front of or behind the vehicle. If there are objects within this distance both behind and in front of the vehicle, the tone alternates between front and rear speakers.

04 NOTE The level of the audible signal can be lowered/raised with the infotainment volume View in the display (warning for objects front left/ control. The level can also be set in the MY The distance monitored behind the vehicle is right rear) CAR menu system. See page 201 for a approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal description of the menu system. Visual indicator comes from the rear speakers. The audio system’s display gives an overview If the volume of another source from the The system must be deactivated when towing of the vehicle’s position in relation to a a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted detected object. audio system is high, this will be automatically lowered. carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park The marked sectors in the display indicate assist system's sensors. that one or more of the sensors has detected an object. The closer the car symbol comes to a sector, the closer the vehicle is to the object. If the infotainment system is switched off, the park assist system will not be able to provide a visual indicator. An audible signal will still be provided.

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Park assist*

NOTE Front park assist Faults in the system If the information symbol illuminates and Rear park assist is deactivated auto- • Park assist syst Service required is shown matically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used. If a non- on the information display, this indicates that Volvo trailer hitch is being used, it may the system is not functioning properly and be necessary to switch off the system has been disengaged. Consult a trained and manually, see page 183. qualified Volvo service technician. • The system will not detect high objects, such as a loading dock, etc. CAUTION • Objects such as chains, thin shiny In certain circumstances, the park assist poles or low objects may temporarily system may give unexpected warning sig- 04 not be detected by the system. This nals that can be caused by external sound may result in the pulsing tone unex- sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This may include pectedly stopping instead of changing The distance monitored in front of the vehicle such things as the horns of other vehicles, to a constant tone as the vehicle is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, approaches the object. In such cases, signal comes from the audio system's front motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does use caution when backing up or stop speakers. not indicate a fault in the system. the vehicle to help avoid damage. It may not be possible to combine auxiliary headlights and front park assist since these lights could trigger the system's sensors.

NOTE Front park assist is deactivated when the parking brake is applied and or when the gear selector is in the P position.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185 04 Driver support

Park assist*

Cleaning the sensors with water and a suitable car washing detergent. Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

NOTE If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, snow, or ice, this could result in false warning signals from the park assist system. 04 G031402

Location of the front sensors

Location of the rear sensors The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

Introduction Function Ambient lighting conditions The Park Assist Camera uses the display in The camera automatically monitors the ambi- the center console to show the area behind ent lighting conditions behind the vehicle and the car while you are backing up. constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This may cause the brightness and quality of the PAC also shows guiding lines in the on- image on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitiv- screen image to indicate the direction that the ity to light is increased in dark conditions or in vehicle will take as it moves rearward, which bad weather, which may affect image quality. helps simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight space or when attaching a trailer to the If the image on the screen seems too dark, vehicle. brightness can be increased with the thumb wheel on the lighting panel. 04 NOTE NOTE A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with the vehicle's electrical system will be The driver sees what is behind the vehicle In order to function properly, the camera included in the measurement of the availa- and if a person or animal should suddenly lens should always be kept clean. This is ble space behind the vehicle. appear from the side. particularly important in bad weather. Keep the lens free of dirt, ice or snow. PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the WARNING opening handle. • PAC is designed to be a supplemen- The camera has built-in electronics that help tary aid when parking the vehicle. It is reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image not, however, intended to replace the shown on the screen is as natural as possi- driver’s attention and judgment. ble. This may cause some objects on the • The camera has blind spots where it screen to “lean,” which is normal. cannot detect objects or people behind the vehicle. WARNING • Pay particular attention to people or Objects seen on the screen may be closer animals that are close to the vehicle. than they appear to be.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187 04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

Using PAC With the camera zoomed in on the trailer Guiding lines hitch, a guiding line showing the hitch's path Activation toward the trailer will be projected. This feature can be activated in the MY CAR menu. See page 201 for a description of the menu system. The guiding lines for the wheels (see the following section "Guiding lines") and for the trailer hitch cannot be displayed at the same time. If the camera shows an enlarged (zoomed) 04 image, turn TUNE counterclockwise, or press EXIT, CAM or OK to return to a normal view. Deactivation The lines on the screen are projected as if Move the gear selector from R to another they were a path on the ground behind the position. There is a slight delay in the PAC PAC is activated when the gear selector is vehicle and are affected by the way in which system, which means that the view from moved to R if the system is selected in the the steering wheel is turned. This enables the behind the vehicle will remain on the screen MY CAR menu system or by pressing the driver to see path the vehicle will take, even if for approximately 15 seconds after the gear CAM button in the center console. See page he/she turns the steering wheel while backing selector has been moved from the R position 201 for a description of the menu system. up. or until the vehicle reaches a forward speed If the Volvo Navigation System (VNS) is in of 6 mph (10 km/h). The screen will then use, PAC will automatically override the navi- revert to the mode that it was in before R was NOTE gation system to show the camera's image selected and will, for example, display navi- When backing up with a trailer, the guiding on the screen instead of navigation informa- gation system information. lines show the path that the vehicle will tion, for as long as reverse gear is selected. take, not the trailer. Zoom NOTE The camera can be useful when attaching a If any button on the center console control trailer. Press CAM to zoom in on the trailer panel is pressed, the camera image will hitch (and press this button again to return to disappear from the display. Pressing CAM the normal camera view). will return the camera image to the display.

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

WARNING The dashed line (2) indicates the clear zone of markers in the display indicate which of the approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the sensor(s) has detected the object. Keep in mind that the image on the screen bumper. These lines also indicate the out- The markers change color (from yellow to only shows the area behind the vehicle. most limits that any object (door mirrors, cor- The driver must always watch for people, orange to red) as the vehicle comes closer to ners of the body, etc.) extends out from the animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides the object. of the vehicle when turning while backing vehicle, even when it turns. up. The "wheel tracks" (3) between the side Marker (color) Distance to object marker lines show where the wheels will roll Marker lines and can extend up to approximately 10.5 ft Yellow more than 5 ft (1.5 m) (3.2 m) behind the bumper if there are no Orange 5–1 ft (0.3–1.5 m) objects in the way. 04 Vehicles equipped with Park Assist Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m) Settings Press OK/MENU when a normal camera view is displayed and make the desired settings. Parking camera settings • Mark Guide lines to display the sidelines while backing up. • Mark Distance bars to display the inter- The PAC system's lines secting lines while backing up. Marker line for a 1-foot (30-centimeter) Activating the system zone behind the vehicle • Mark Automatic activation of rear camera Marker line for the clear back-up zone Colored fields (4-one per sensor) indicate dis- to activate PAC each time tance reverse gear is selected. "Wheel tracks" If the vehicle is equipped with the optional • Mark Off to turn off PAC completely. The solid line (1) indicates a zone within 1 ft Park Assist system, the distance to an object Summary (30 centimeters) of the rear bumper. will be indicated more exactly and colored • The camera is activated when the gear selector is moved to R (this can be

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189 04 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

changed in the MY CAR menu) and the vated when the gear selector is moved to image is shown on the center console R. This setting can be changed in the MY display. CAR menu. • When backing up, two solid lines are pro- • If there are two cameras installed on the jected on the screen to show the path vehicle*, to switch between cameras, turn that the vehicle's rear wheels will take. TUNE (at least one of the cameras has to These lines are affected by movements of be active), press CAM repeatedly or use the steering wheel. The vehicle's approxi- the center console controls. If the front mate outer dimension are shown by two camera is on, it overrides the optional dashed lines. park assist system's visual indicator but The graphic lines will not be displayed there will still be an audible signal. 04 • when backing up with a trailer that is connected to the vehicle's electrical system. Limitations • Objects on the ground that are closer Even if a fairly small section of the screen than 1 ft (30 centimeters) cannot be image appears to be obstructed, this may detected by the camera. mean that a relatively large area behind the • The camera is active for approx. vehicle is hidden and objects there may not 5 seconds after the gear selector is be detected until they are very near the vehi- moved to R or until the vehicle's speed cle. exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). • The optional Park Assist sensors and the NOTE parking camera work together and infor- Bicycle carriers or other accessories mation from the sensors is shown graphi- mounted on the tailgate may obstruct the cally on the display. camera's field of view. • The graphic lines shown on the screen when the vehicle backs up can be disa- Keep in mind bled in the settings menu. • Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice • Manual zoom can be selected in the MY and snow. Remove ice and snow care- CAR menu. fully to avoid scratching the lens. • The system can be switched off by press- • Clean the lens regularly with warm water ing CAM. By default, the system is acti- and a suitable car washing detergent.

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

Introduction WARNING BLIS is an information system that indicates BLIS and CTA are information sys- the presence of another vehicle moving in the • tems, NOT warning or safety systems same direction as your vehicle on roads with and do not function in all situations. several lanes. The system helps provide information about: • BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the need for you to visually confirm the • Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind conditions around you, and the need area" for you to turn your head and should- • Vehicles that are about to pass your vehi- ers to make sure that you can safely cle in the left and/or right lanes change lanes or back up. 04 • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supple- • As the driver, you have full responsibil- mentary BLIS function intended to ity for changing lanes/backing up in a Location of the BLIS indicator light1. detect vehicles crossing behind your safe manner. Indicator light vehicle while you are backing up. BLIS symbol

NOTE The door panel indicator light illuminates on the side of the vehicle where the system has detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is passed on both sides at the same time, both lights will illuminate.

BLIS and CTA are activated when the engine is started; this is confirmed when the indicator lights on the front door panels flash once.

1 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

Activating/deactivating BLIS To erase the message: When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a passing vehicle in zone 2, the indicator light in • Press the OK button on the left steering wheel lever the door panel will glow steadily. If the driver then uses the turn signal on the side on which or the warning is given, the indicator light will • Wait for approx. 5 seconds for the mes- flash and become brighter. sage to disappear WARNING When does BLIS function • BLIS does not function in sharp curves. 04 • BLIS does not function when your vehicle is backing up.

Button for activating/deactivating BLIS BLIS can be deactivated/reactivated by Deactivating/reactivating CTA pressing the button on the center console. On vehicles equipped with the optional Park The number or combinations of options on assist system (see page 183), Cross Traffic the vehicle may not leave a space available Alert (CTA) can be deactivated/reactivated by on the center console for the BLIS button. If pressing the Park assist button on the center this is the case, BLIS can be deactivated/ console. reactivated in the MY CAR menu system (see Zone 1. Blind area, Zone 2. Area for passing page 201) vehicles • Select Off or On in Settings Car The system functions when your vehicle is settings BLIS. moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). When BLIS is deactivated/reactivated, the BLIS is designed to react to: indicator lights will go out/illuminate (the indi- Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind cators will also flash once when the function • area" is reactivated) and a message will appear in the instrument panel. • Vehicles that are passing your vehicle

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

When does CTA function your vehicle the approaching vehicle/ object has been detected. • CTA also provides a warning by illuminating the BLIS indicator lights. • An icon will also illuminate in the Park assist graphic on the center console display. Limitations CTA has limitations in certain situations, for example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" 04 through other parked vehicles or obstruc- Park assist/CTA button tions. CTA can be deactivated separately in the MY How CTA works The following are several examples where CAR menu system (see page 201 CTA supplements BLIS by warning the driver CTA's "field of vision" may initially be limited and approaching vehicles cannot be detected • Go to Settings Car settings BLIS of crossing traffic behind your vehicle, for example, when backing out of a parking until they are too close: Cross Traffic Alert and deselect this space. function to deactivate CTA. BLIS, however, is still activated. It is primarily designed to detect another vehicle but in certain cases may also detect pedestrians or smaller objects such as bicycles. CTA is only activated when the vehicle is backing up and is activated automatically when the gear selector is put in reverse. • An audible signal indicates that CTA has detected something that is approaching from the side. The signal will come from either the left or right audio system speakers, depending on which the side of

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

Maintenance

04 The vehicle is pulled far into a parking space In angled parking spaces, CTA may be "blind" on one side CTA's blind area Location of the BLIS/CTA sensors2 However, as you back your vehicle out of a The BLIS/CTA sensors are located on the CTA's "field of vision" parking space, CTA's "field of vision" inside of the rear fenders/bumper. expands. The surfaces in front of the sensors must be Examples of other limitations include: kept clean for the system to function opti- • Dirt, ice or snow obstructing the sensors mally. may reduce the system's function or make it impossible to detect other vehi- CAUTION cles or objects. Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems should • Do not attach tape, decals, etc., on the only be done by a trained and qualified surface of the sensors (see the illustration Volvo service technician. in the following "Maintenance" section). • BLIS and CTA are deactivated if a trailer's wiring is connected to the vehicle's electrical system.

2 Generic illustration

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Driver support

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

Messages If BLIS/CTA are not functioning normally, a symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel and a text message will be displayed. Follow any instructions that may be provided. These messages include:

Message System status

CTA OFF CTA has been switched off manually. BLIS remains 04 active.

BLIS and BLIS and CTA are tempo- CTA OFF rarily deactivated because Trailer a trailer's wiring has been attached connected to the vehicle's electrical system.

BLIS and BLIS and CTA are not CTA Serv- functioning normally. ice required • If this message recurs, the systems should be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Messages can be erased by pressing the OK button on the left steering wheel lever.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195 Volvo Sensus...... 198 Menus and messages...... 199 The MY CAR menus...... 201 Climate system...... 207 Trip computer...... 216 Active chassis system–Four C*...... 223 Passenger compartment convenience...... 224

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Volvo Sensus

Introduction systems as well as other options such as the park assist camera(s), etc. Volvo Sensus uses the screen in the center instrument panel to display information and selections are made using this panel’s controls and buttons. Certain features can also be controlled using the steering wheel keypad. Press MY CAR to present all of the available settings related to driving and/or controlling the vehicle, such as City Safety, setting the clock, lock settings, etc. Center console control panel Press RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, NAV* and CAM* NAV to change a source and to activated systems 05 Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – : see the separate VNS manual for operat- or functions such as AM, FM1, CD, DVD, ing instructions. Bluetooth, navigation* and the park assist camera *. Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL): see page 230 . See the respective sections in this manual for more detailed information about your vehi- Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR: see cle's various features and functions. page 201. Park assist camera - CAM*: see page 187. Climate system: see page 207.

Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your vehicle providing a coordinated interface for a number of functions such as the individual- ized settings that can be made in the MY CAR menus, the climate and infotainment

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Main instrument panel Menu overview The following menu alternatives may vary, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. Analog instrument panel Digital speed Trip comp. opt. Service status Messages (##)1

Digital Instrument panel* and menu controls Digital instrument panel* Analog Instrument panel and menu controls OK: access to the list of messages and Settings message confirmation. Themes 05 Thumb wheel: browse among menus and options in the list of functions. Contrast mode/Color mode RESET: reset the active function. Used in Service status certain cases to select/activate a func- Messages tion, see the explanation under each respective function. Trip computer reset The menus shown on the information displays in the instrument panel are controlled with the left lever. The menus displayed depend on ignition mode. Press OK to erase a message and return to the menus.

1 Number of messages in parentheses

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Messages Message Description Message Description When a warning, information or indicator symbol comes on, a corresponding message Service Have the vehicle checked Mainte- If the service intervals are appears in the information panel. An error urgentA by an authorized Volvo nance over- not followed, the warranty message is stored in a memory list until the workshop immediately. due does not cover any dam- fault is rectified. aged parts. Contact an Service Have the vehicle checked authorized Volvo work- OK A Press to acknowledge and scroll among required by an authorized Volvo shop for service. the messages. workshop as soon as possible. Temporarily A function has been tem- NOTE OFFA porarily switched off and See man- Read the owner's manual. is reset automatically while If a warning message appears while you ualA are using the trip computer, the message driving or after starting again. must be read and confirmed by pressing Book time Time to book service at an OK before the previous activity can be for mainte- authorized Volvo retailer. Low battery The audio system is 05 resumed. nance Power save switched off to save cur- mode rent. Charge the battery. Time for Message Description Time for regular service at regular an authorized Volvo work- A There will also be a system-specific part of this message Stop Stop and switch off the mainte- shop. The timing is deter- engineA engine as soon as possi- nance mined by the number of ble. Serious risk of dam- miles driven, number of age. Contact an author- months since the last ized Volvo workshop. service, engine running time. Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.

200 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Introduction Operation • Reject and incoming phone call The menu system provides access to The current function will be cancelled Center console controls • menus for operating many of the vehi- • Characters that have been entered will be cle's functions, such as setting the erased clock, door mirrors, locks, etc. • The most recent selection will be cancel- Navigating in the menus is done using the led buttons on the center console control panel • Go back (upward) in the menu system or with the right-side steering wheel keypad. A long press will take you to the highest Some of the features mentioned in this sec- menu level (the main view), giving you access tion are optional. to all of the vehicles/menus. See page 231 for additional information.

Steering wheel keypad

Center console controls for menu navigation 05 Press MY CAR to access the My Car menus. Press OK/MENU to select a highlighted selection or to store a certain function in the system's memory. Turn to navigate up/down among menu selections. EXIT EXIT functions The results of a short press on EXIT vary, The keypad varies according to the vehicle's equipment depending on where the cursor is and where you are in the menu structure. Turn the thumb wheel to go up/down among menu selections. Press the thumb

}} 201 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

wheel to make a selection or store a func- 6. Use the thumb wheel to move to the • Support systems tion in the system's memory. desired choice and press the thumb • Settings EXIT. wheel to put an X in the box. My XC60 7. Finish by exiting the menu system either Paths one step at a time with short presses on The current menu level is displayed at the EXIT (2) or press and hold this button to upper right of the center console display. return to the main menu. Menu paths are displayed as follows, for The OK/MENU (2), EXIT (4) and control (3) in example: the center console can be used in the same way. Settings Car settings Lock settings Doors unlock Driver door, then all MY CAR The following is an example of how to set a When the MY CAR symbol has been function in the menu system: selected, the following menu alternatives are 05 displayed. MY CAR 1. Press the button on the center MY CAR My XC60 console control panel. The display shows all of the vehicle's driver 2. Navigate to a menu, for example support systems, which can be activated/ Settings using the thumb wheel (1) and deactivated here. press it to open a submenu. 3. Navigate to the desired submenu such as Trip statistics Car settings. MY CAR Trip statistics 4. Navigate to Lock settings and press the Information from previous trips is stored and thumb wheel to open a new submenu. can be displayed in the form of a bar chart, see page 221 5. Navigate to Doors unlock and press the thumb wheel to open a submenu with alternatives that can be selected. • My XC60 • Trip statistics

202 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Driver support systems Doors unlock 60 sec All doors 90 sec Driver door, then all See page 61 for more information. Keyless entry Home safe light duration All doors 30 sec Any door 60 sec Doors on same side 90 sec Both front doors See page 105 for more information. Audible confirmation Triple indicator See page 59 and 67 for more information. MY CAR Support systems See page 104 for more information. Side mirror settings (MY CAR > Support systems) 05 Fold mirrors Daytime running lights The screen shows the current status (set- Tilt left mirror See page 100 for more information. tings) for the vehicle's driver support systems. Tilt right mirror Active bending lights See page 112 for more information. See page 102 for more information. Menu settings Light settings Tire pressure system The following pages list the main menus/ submenus and possible selections. Door lock confirmation light Warns if tyre pressure is too low Car key memory Unlock confirmation light Calibrate tire pressure See pages 92 and 59 for more information. See page 59 for more information. See page 322 for more information. This system is optional in Canada. Lock settings Approach light duration Steering wheel force Automatic door locking Off High 30 sec

}} 203 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Medium See page 180 for more information. See page 87 for more information. Low Road Sign Information Time format See page 223 for more information. On 12 h Reset car settings Off 24 h This feature returns the "Car settings" menu Speed alert Screen saver to the original factory settings. On The contents of the screen are replaced by another image if this selection is marked. The Off MY CAR Settings Driver support contents of the screen will be displayed again systems DSTC if one of the buttons (1-4) is pressed, see See page 142 for more information. page 201. Collision Warning City Safety Uncheck the selection to turn the screen Collision Warning saver off. See page 163 for more information. 05 Warning distance Language BLIS Long Select the language for menu texts. See page 191 for more information. Normal Show help text Distance Alert Short This displays help texts for the current menu. See page 160 for more information. Warning sound Distance and fuel units Driver Alert See page 171 for more information. MPG (UK) See page 177 for more information. Lane Departure Warning MPG (US) Lane Departure Warning MY CAR Settings System options km/l On at start-up l/100km Set/change time Increased sensitivity

204 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

See page 216 for more information about the Select this menu alternative and press OK for Navigation System. Refer to the navigation trip computer. spoken information about how the system system's manual for detailed information. Temperature unit works. Voice user setting Voice command list Celsius Default setting Phone commands Fahrenheit User 1 Phone Select the temperature scale to be displayed User 2 by the climate control unit. Phone call contact Two user profiles can be set, which is useful if Volume levels Phone dial number more than one person uses voice commands regularly. Default setting resets the factory Voice output volume Navigation commands settings. Front park assist volume Navigation Voice training Rear park assist volume Navigation repeat instruction User 1 Phone ringing volume Navigation go to address 05 User 2 Reset system options General commands Voice training enables the system to This feature returns the "System options" Help become familiar with the driver's voice and menu to the original factory settings. Cancel pronunciation. A list of phrases is presented on the screen for the driver to read aloud. Voice tutorial MY CAR Settings Voice settingsA. When the system has registered the driver's The menu alternatives under Phone pronunciation, no additional phrases will be A Only on vehicles with the optional Volvo Navigation System commands show examples of the voice displayed. After completed voice training, commands available when a cell phone is select User 1 or User 2 in Voice user Voice tutorial connected to the Bluetooth® hands-free sys- setting to set the system to the current user. tem. See page 268 for more detailed infor- Voice output volume mation. • A volume control will be displayed. To set The menu alternatives under Navigation the volume level: commands show examples of the voice commands available for the optional Volvo

}} 205 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

1. Adjust the volume using the thumb wheel Recirculation timer See page 239 for more information. 2. Test the setting by pressing OK Automatic rear defroster Map and software version 3. Store the setting and leave the menu by Interior air quality system Refer to the optional Volvo Navigation System pressing EXIT. Reset climate settings manual for more information. Voice POI list This feature returns the "Climate settings" Edit list menu to the original factory settings. The navigation system has a large number of For more information about the climate sys- points of interest (POIs). A maximum of 30 tem, see page 207. POIs can be stored in this list. The menu alternative Voice POI list is only MY CAR Settings Favourites (FAV) displayed if the vehicle is equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System. Refer to the navigation system's manual for detailed See page 235 for more information about 05 information. this feature.

MY CAR Settings Audio settings MY CAR Settings Information

See page 230 for more information about the Number of keys infotainment system. See page 58 for more information. VIN number MY CAR Settings Climate settings See page 367 for more information. Automatic blower adjustment DivX® VOD code Normal See page 252 for more information. High Bluetooth software version in car Low

206 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Introduction NOTE commercially available window washing spray will also help prevent fogging or mist- Air conditioning The sunlight sensor monitors which side of ing. The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Cli- the car that is most exposed to sunlight. mate Control (ECC). The climate control sys- This can mean that the temperature may Temporary shut-off of the air differ between the right and left-side air tem cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the conditioning vents, even if the temperatures set for both passenger compartment. sides of the passenger compartment are The air conditioning is momentarily disen- the same. gaged during full acceleration or when driving NOTE uphill with a trailer. This may result in a temporary increase in cabin temperature. • The air conditioning can be switched • The temperature sensor for the passen- off, but to ensure the best possible cli- ger compartment is located below the cli- Ice and snow mate comfort in the passenger com- mate control panel. Always keep the air intake grille at the base of partment and to prevent the windows • The outside (ambient) temperature sensor the windshield free of snow. from misting, it should always be on. is located on the door mirror. In warm weather, a small amount of Climate system maintenance • • The humidity sensor* is located in the 05 water may accumulate under the car interior rearview mirror. Special tools and equipment are required to when it has been parked. This water is maintain and carry out repairs on the climate condensation from the A/C system NOTE system. Work of this type should only be and is normal. done by a trained and qualified Volvo service Do not cover or block the sensors with technician. clothing or other objects. Sensor location Refrigerant • The sunlight sensor is located on the top Volvo cares about the environment. The air side of the dashboard. Side windows and laminated panoramic roof conditioning system in your car contains a CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance To ensure that the air conditioning works will not deplete the ozone layer. The air con- optimally, the side windows, and the lamina- ditioning system contains 1.76 lbs (800 g) of ted panoramic roof should be closed. R134a. The systems uses PAG oil. Fog on the inside of the windows The defroster function should be used to remove fog or mist from the inside of the windows. Keeping the windows clean with a

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Passenger compartment filter NOTE Air distribution Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at the recommended intervals. Please refer to Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter replacement intervals. your Warranty and Service Records Informa- tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for these intervals. Materials used in the cabin The filter should be replaced more often when The materials used in the cabin have been driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The developed to help minimize the amount of filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should dust and make the cabin easier to keep always be replaced with a new one. clean. All floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning. Use car cleaning products rec- NOTE ommended by Volvo. See also the information beginning on page 361. There are different types of cabin air filters. Ensure that the correct type is installed. Menu settings The incoming air is distributed from a number 05 The default settings for four of the climate of different vents in the passenger compart- Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) system's functions can be changed in the ment. menu system. A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO in the incoming air, thereby reducing the lev- • Blower speed in automatic mode. mode. els of odors and contaminants entering the Recirculation timer for passenger com- vehicle. The air quality sensor detects • If desired, air distribution can be controlled partment air. increased levels of contaminants in the out- manually, see page 215. side air. When the air quality sensor detects • Automatic rear window defrosting. contaminated outside air, the air intake closes • The optional Interior Air Quality System and the air inside the passenger compart- (IAQS). ment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters The functions can also be returned to factory the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated settings in the menu system. passenger compartment air. See page 201 for a description of the menu system.

208 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars

Open Closed

Closed Open 05

Horizontal airflow Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow Vertical airflow Direct the outer air vents toward the side win- Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost. dows to defrost. Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain the desired temperature in the rear seat.

}} 209 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Electronic climate control, ECC

05 Temperature control, driver's side Heated front passenger's seat*

Heated driver's seat* Temperature control, passenger's side

Defroster (maximum effect), electrically Recirculation heated windshield* AUTO Blower A/C on/off Manual air distribution—floor

Manual air distribution—dashboard air vents Manual air distribution—defroster

Heated rear window and door mirrors, see page 113

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Climate system controls Seat heating will automatically switch off Blower control when the engine is switched off. Turn the control clockwise to Heated front seats* Starting the seat heating automatically increase or counterclockwise to decrease the blower This setting starts heating the driver's seat (at speed. If AUTO is selected, the highest level) automatically when the blower speed will be regula- engine is started if the ambient temperature is ted automatically and this below approx. 45° F (7° C). will override manual adjust- Activate/deactivate this function in the ment. MY CAR menu system, under Settings Climate settings Auto start driver seat NOTE heater. If the blower is turned off completely, the 1 air conditioning is disengaged, which may Heated rear seats* result in fogging on the windows.

The current seat temperature setting is shown in 05 the center console display Press the lower section of the button repeatedly until the desired number of indicator lights illuminate: Highest heat level – three indicator lights. Medium heat level – two indicator lights. Lowest heat level – one indicator light. If no indicator lights are illuminated, the seat Heat control for the outboard seating posi- heating is switched off. tions is done in the same way as for the front seats.

1 Not available on models equipped with the optional integrated booster cushions

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Air distribution Blower speed in automatic mode can be set under Climate settings Automatic blower adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal or High.

NOTE Selecting the lowest blower speed may increases the risk of fog forming on the windows.

Temperature control Air distribution is shown in the center console The temperatures on the display driver and passenger sides Manual air distribution—defroster can be set separately. When Auto 05 Manual air distribution—dashboard air the vehicle is started, the The function automatically vents most recent setting is regulates cooling, heating, resumed. Manual air distribution—floor blower speed, recirculation, and air distribution to main- The figure consists of three buttons. When a tain the chosen temperature. NOTE button is pressed, the corresponding figure If you select one or more will appear in the display with an arrow indi- Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up manual functions, the other by selecting a higher/lower temperature cating which manual air flow has been functions continue to be controlled automati- than the actual temperature required. selected (see the following illustration). See cally. The air quality sensor is engaged and all also the air distribution chart on page 215. manual settings are switched off when AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE.

212 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

A/C – ON/OFF Max. defroster and electrically heated front side windows. The indicator light (2) When the indicator light in windshield* in the defroster button illuminates when the button is on, the air con- the function is active. ditioning is controlled auto- • Press the button twice to switch off the matically. This cools/heats defroster (the indicator light will switch and dehumidifies the incom- off). ing air. When the indicator Models with an electrically heated wind- light in the button is off, the shield* air conditioning is disengaged. Other functions are still controlled automatically. When • If this feature is switched off, press the maximum defroster is selected, the air condi- button once to start heating the wind- 2 tioning system is set for maximum blower shield . Symbol (1) will illuminate in the speed and dehumidifies the cabin as quickly center console display. as possible. • Press the button twice to start both the The selected settings are shown in the center defroster and the windshield heating. console display Symbols (1) and (2) will illuminate in the 05 center console display. Electrical heating* • If these features are on, press the button Max. defroster to switch them off. The symbols will no longer be displayed.

Models without an electrically heated windshield • Press the button once to start defrosting/de-icing the windshield and

2 If a "C" appears in the rear-view mirror when the button is pressed, the compass* has to be recalibrated, see page 115. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

NOTE Recirculation/air quality system Interior Air Quality System–IAQS* Recirculation This system consists of a multifilter and an air • Triangular areas at the far sides of the This function can be used to quality sensor. The filter helps remove gases windshield are not heated electrically shut out exhaust fumes, and particles from the incoming air, thereby and will take slightly longer to smoke, etc., from the pas- reducing the amounts of odors and contami- defrost/de-ice. senger compartment. The air nants entering the vehicle. The air quality sen- • The heated windshield may affect the in the passenger compart- sor detects increased levels of contaminants performance/range of e.g., transpond- ment is then recirculated, in the outside air. When the air quality sensor ers used to automatically pay highway i.e., no air from outside the detects contaminated outside air, the air tolls or other communication equip- car is taken into the car when this function is intake closes and the air inside the passenger ment. activated. The indicator light in the button will compartment is recirculated, i.e., no outside illuminate when recirculation is selected. air enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air. The following occurs when the defroster/ If the air in the car recirculates for too long, When the AUTO button is depressed the air windshield heating functions have been acti- there is a risk of condensation forming on the quality sensor is always engaged. vated: 05 insides of the windows, especially in winter. Activate or deactivate this function in Climate • Blower speed increases automatically Timer settings Interior air quality system. and the air conditioning will switch on (if The timer function minimizes the risk of fog- not already on and if the passenger com- ging, or stale air when the recirculation func- partment blower is not turned off) to NOTE tion is selected by automatically switching off dehumidify the air in the passenger com- the function after a certain length of time, partment. Air conditioning can be • The air quality sensor should always switched off by pressing the AC button. depending on the ambient temperature. Acti- be engaged in order to obtain the best vate/deactivate the function under Climate air in the passenger compartment. Recirculation will not function while • settings Recirculation timer. See page defrost is engaged. • Recirculation is limited in cold weather 201 for a description of the menu system. to avoid fogging. The climate system will return to its previous If the insides of the windows start fog- settings when the defroster/windshield heat- • NOTE ging, disengage the air quality sensor. ing function is switched off. When Defroster is selected, recirculation is Use the defroster function to increase See also page 113 for additional information. always deactivated. airflow to the front, side, and rear windows.

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Air distribution table Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air To remove de-fog/de- Air to the floor and To ensure comfortable flows from the dashboard air ice the front side win- windows. Some air conditions and good de- vents. The air is not recircula- dows and windshield flows from the dash- fogging in cold or humid ted. Air conditioning is always quickly. board air vents. weather. engaged.

Air to windshield and side win- In cold or humid Air to floor and from In sunny weather with dows. Some air flows from the weather (blower dashboard air vents. cool outside tempera- air dashboard vents. speed should be tures. moderate to high).

05 Airflow to windows and from To ensure good com- Air to floor. Some air To warm or cool the dashboard air vents. fort in warm, dry flows to the dashboard feet. weather. air vents and windows.

Airflow to the head and chest To ensure efficient Airflow to windows, To cool the feet or pro- from the dashboard air vents. cooling in warm from dashboard air vide warmer air to the weather. vents and to the floor. upper body in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

215 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

Introduction • Trip computer functions Functions The content and appearance of the trip com- • Trip computer information headings in the To open and make settings in the trip computer varies depending on whether the vehi- instrument panel puter functions: cle is equipped with an analog or digital 1. Ensure that none of the trip computer instrument panel. controls are being used in a command The instrument panel illuminates as soon as sequence; reset them by pressing RESET the vehicle is unlocked and trip computer set- twice. tings can be made. If none of the trip com- 2. Press OK to open the list of functions. puter's controls are used within 30 seconds after the driver's door has been opened, the 3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the instrument panel lighting will go out and the functions and select/confirm your choice trip computer cannot be used again until: by pressing OK. • the ignition is put in mode II1 4. After completing your selection, exit by pressing RESET twice. • the engine is started 05 Information display and controls The following table lists the analog trip computer's functions: NOTE OK–press to access the trip computer's If a warning message appears while you functions or acknowledge/confirm/erase are using the trip computer, this message a message must be acknowledged in order to return Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of to the trip computer function. Acknowl- edge a message by pressing OK. trip computer information headings and to scroll among the alternatives RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a func- Trip computer in models with an tion after a selection has been made analog instrument panel The trip computer has two different menu groups:

1 See page 89 for information about the various ignition modes.

216 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

Function Description

Digital speed This displays the vehicle's speed digitally in the center of the instrument panel – km/h • Open by pressing OK, scroll using the thumb wheel, confirm by pressing OK and exit by pressing ENTER. – mph – None

Trip comp. opt. Selections among the trip computer information headings are made here. The symbols that have already been selected have a check mark and are displayed in white. Those not selected are not checked and are – Distance to empty displayed in gray: – Fuel consumption 1. Open the function by pressing OK and scroll to the desired heading using the thumb wheel. – Average speed 2. Confirm by pressing OK. The symbol will change colors from gray to white and will be checked. – Trip odometer T1 and total dist. 3. Continue this procedure or exit by pressing RESET. – Trip odometer T2 and total dist. 05

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Messages (##) For additional information, see page 199.

Information headings 2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin display- Any of the information headings in the following the information headings. Stop on the ing table can be displayed. To do so: desired heading. 1. Ensure that none of the trip computer 3. See the table for an explanation of the controls are being used in a command heading or the actions that can be taken. sequence; reset them by pressing RESET twice.

}} 217 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

Information headings in the instrument Description panel Trip odometer T1 and total dist. • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1. Trip odometer T2 and total dist. • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2. Distance to empty See Distance to empty on page 220.

Fuel consumption Current fuel consumption.

Average speed Press and hold RESET to reset Average speed.

- No information will be displayed. This also indicates the beginning/end of the list of information headings.

05 Scroll among the trip computer information Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of headings at any time by turning the thumb trip computer information headings and wheel until the desired heading is displayed. to scroll among the alternatives RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a func- Trip computer in models with a digital tion after a selection has been made instrument panel Functions The trip computer has two different menu To open and make settings in the trip com- groups: puter functions: Trip computer functions • 1. Ensure that none of the trip computer • Trip computer information headings in the controls are being used in a command instrument panel sequence; reset them by pressing RESET Information displays and controls twice. OK–press to access the trip computer's 2. Press OK to open the list of functions. functions or to activate a selection

218 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the 4. After completing your selection, exit by The following table lists the digital trip com- functions and select/confirm your choice pressing RESET twice. puter's functions: by pressing OK.

Function Description

Trip computer reset NOTE: This function does not reset the trip odometers, see page 221 for a description of how this is done. – Average fuel consumption – Average speed

Messages For additional information, see page 199.

Themes Set the way in which information is displayed in the instrument panel, see page 80.

Settings* Select Auto On or Off. 05

Contrast mode/Color mode Adjust the instrument panel's contrast and color.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Information headings 1. Ensure that none of the trip computer 3. See the table for an explanation of the Three trip computer headings can be dis- controls are being used in a command heading or the actions that can be taken. sequence; reset them by pressing RESET played at the same time; one in each of the Scroll among the combinations of trip com- twice. displays (see the previous illustration). One of puter information headings at any time by the combinations of information headings in 2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin display- turning the thumb wheel until the desired the following table can be displayed. To do ing the combinations of information head- combination is displayed. so: ings. Stop on the desired combination.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 219 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

Heading combinations Description Average fuel consumption Trip odometer T1 + mileage Average speed • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1. Current fuel consumption Trip odometer T2 + mileage Distance to empty • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2. Current fuel consumption Mileage mph<>kmh Change between mph<>kmh – see "Digital speed display" on page 220.

- No trip computer informa- - No information will be displayed. This also indicates the begin- tion displayed ning/end of the list of information headings.

Scroll among the trip computer information Miles or kilometers can be displayed, see the Digital speed display* headings at any time by turning the thumb heading "Changing units" on page 221 Speed is expressed in the unit not used by wheel until the desired heading is displayed. the instrument panel's speedometer e.g., if Distance to empty the normal speedometer is in mph, the trip 05 This function shows the approximate dis- Supplementary information computer will display in the speed in km/h tance that can be driven on the fuel remaining and vice versa. Average fuel consumption in the tank. When Distance to empty shows Fuel consumption since the last time this "----", there is very little useable fuel remain- Resetting an analog instrument panel function was reset. ing in that tank; refuel as soon as possible. Trip odometer(s) and average speed The calculation is based on average fuel con- 1. Display trip odometer T1 or T1, or Aver- sumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of Average speed age speed. The vehicle's average speed since the last driving and the amount of fuel remaining in time this function was reset. the tank (the accuracy of this figure may vary 2. Press and hold RESET until selected if your driving style changes). An economical function is reset. Current fuel consumption driving style will generally increase this dis- Each trip computer heading must be reset Current fuel consumption is calculated tance. individually. approximately once a second. When the vehi- See page 274 for information about driving cle is moving at low speed, fuel consumption economically. is displayed per unit of time. At higher speeds, it is displayed in terms of distance.

220 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

Resetting a digital instrument panel NOTE scale; the bar at the far right shows the value for the current mile/10 miles. Trip odometer In addition to changing units in the trip 1. Turn the thumb wheel to select the com- computer, this also changes the units used Use TUNE to change between 1 mile and bination of headings containing the trip in the Volvo Navigation System (VNS)*. 10 miles; the marker at the right will also odometer to be reset. change according to the scale selected. 2. Press and hold RESET until selected trip Trip statistics* Settings odometer is reset. Trip information from previous trips regarding Settings can be made in the MY CAR menu Average speed and fuel consumption average fuel consumption and average speed system as follows: 1. Select Trip computer reset and press is stored and can be displayed in the form of MY CAR My XC60 Trip statistics: OK. a bar chart. Start new trip: press ENTER to erase all 2. Select one of the following alternatives • Function pervious statistics. Exit the menu by using the thumb wheel and press OK: pressing EXIT. • mpg • Reset for every driving cycle: select by 05 • mph pressing ENTER. Exit the menu by press- • Reset both ing EXIT. Selecting Reset for every driving cycle era- 3. Finish by pressing RESET. ses all trip statistics automatically if the igni- Changing units tion is switched off for at least 4 hours. When To change the unit (miles/km) used to meas- the engine is restarted, new statistics will be ure distance and speed, go to MY CAR stored. Settings System options Distance To get new statistics if the engine is restarted and fuel units. before 4 hours have elapsed, the existing Trip statistics2 ones have to be erased manually by selecting Start new trip. Each bar represents a driving distance of 1 mile or 10 miles, depending on the current For additional information, see page 199.

2 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

See also the information about Eco Guide on page 132.

222 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Active chassis system–Four C*

Active chassis (Four C) Advanced Speed-dependent steering force* Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con- In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal Steering force increases with the speed of the trolled Chassis Concept), regulates the cha- and steering response is very direct. Gear vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. racteristics of the shock absorbers so that the shifting is done at high rpm in each gear for At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in car's driving characteristics can be adjusted. dynamic and active driving. order to facilitate parking, etc. There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Operation Steering force can be changed under MY Advanced. CAR Car settings Steering wheel NOTE force. Select Low, Medium or High. For a description of the menu system, see This system is available on Canadian mod- page 201. els only. NOTE Comfort This steering force level menu function Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride cannot be accessed when the vehicle is in and the transmission shifts gears at lower motion. 05 rpm. This mode is particularly suitable for long-distance highway driving. The indicator light in the button will be on when this mode is selected. Chassis settings Sport Use the buttons in the center console to change setting. The setting in use when the In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is engine is switched off is activated the next reduced during cornering and steering time the engine is started. response is more immediate. The transmission shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The indicator light in the button will be on to indicate that Sport mode has been selected.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 223 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Storage spaces

224 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Compartment in door panel Tunnel console Glove compartment Storage pocket on the front edge of the front seat cushions Glove compartment

Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and AUX input/USB connector* Jacket holder

Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket

Jacket holder Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) The owner's manual and maps can be kept The jacket hanger is located on the inboard under armrest, AUX input/USB connec- here. There are also holders for pens and fuel 05 side of the front passenger's seat head tor. cards. The glove compartment can be locked restraint. It is only intended for hanging light Includes cup holder for driver and pas- manually with the key blade, see page 71. garments. senger, 12-volt socket and a small storage compartment.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Vanity mirror 12-volt sockets ignition must be in at least mode I, see page 88. The maximum current consumption is 10A (120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in the passenger compartment is in use. If both the front and rear sockets are used at the same time, the maximum current consumption per socket is 7.5A (90W). The auxiliary sockets can also be used to power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from

G021438 your Volvo retailer. Vanity mirror with lighting 12-volt socket in the front tunnel console WARNING 05 The light comes on automatically when the cover is lifted. Always keep the sockets covered when not in use. G021440

12-volt socket in the rear center console The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt accessories such as cell phone chargers and coolers. For the socket to supply current, the

226 05 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

12-volt socket in the cargo area*

Fold down the cover to access the electrical socket. 05

NOTE The 12-volt socket in the cargo area provides electrical current even when the ignition is switched off. Using the socket while the engine is not running will drain the battery.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 227 Introduction...... 230 Radio...... 240 Media player...... 249 AUX/USB sockets...... 254 Bluetooth® media ...... 257 Bluetooth® hands-free connection ...... 259 Cell phone voice control*...... 268

228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT 06 Infotainment

Introduction

General information NOTE Audyssey MultEQ1 The infotainment system consists of radio To help avoid excessive battery drain, and media player features and also makes it remove the remote key from the ignition possible to communicate via a cell phone. slot if the infotainment system is used The information is displayed on a 7" screen in while the engine is switched off. the center console. Infotainment functions can be controlled from the center console or Dolby Pro Logic via the buttons on the steering wheel keypad. On models equipped with the navigation system*, voice commands can also be used to e.g., set destinations, make calls from a Bluetooth®-connected cell phone, etc. The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used to optimize sound quality to help ensure a If the infotainment system was on when the world-class listening experience. ignition was switched off, the most recently used source (FM1, etc.) will restart the next time the ignition is put in mode I or higher. The driver's door must also be closed on vehicles with keyless drive*. The system is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing 06 The infotainment system can be operated for Corporation. 15 minutes at a time while the engine is switched off by pressing the On/Off button. Dolby Pro Logic II and the symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing While the engine is being started, the infotain- Corporation. ment system will be temporarily interrupted and will resume when the engine has started.

1 Applies only to models with Premium Sound Multimedia.

230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Infotainment system overview Basic infotainment functions Left/right arrow keys – short press moves between preset radio stations, tracks on a disc or chapters on a DVD. Press and hold to search within tracks or to tune to the next/previous available radio station. SOUND – press to access the menu for adjusting bass, treble, etc., see page 235 for additional information. VOL – turn to raise or lower the volume level. ON/OFF/MUTE – short press - switch the system ON. Press and hold (until the Sockets for external audio sources (AUX screen turns black) - switch the system and USB) OFF. A short press when the infotainment Steering wheel keypad system is on will mute/unmute the sound. The entire infotainment system, including the 7" display navigation* and telephone functions, is Center console control panel switched on/off at the same time by using 06 this button. Rear seat control panel with headphone socket* CD/DVD* slot. Not in use Mode buttons – select a mode (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.) by pressing its button on the center console. The most recent source in the selected mode (e.g., FM1 in RADIO mode) will be displayed. In Corresponding controls - steering wheel keypad TEL or NAV* modes, pressing the respective and center console source button will display a shortcut menu.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Eject a disc. Keypad for entering text/numbers, storing radio stations, etc. OK/MENU – press the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad or this button on * FAV – this button can be used to store a the center console to confirm a menu selec- shortcut to a commonly used function in tion or accept an incoming phone call. From AM/FM/SIRIUS/DISC, etc. See the section "* RADIO or MEDIA mode's main view, press- FAV—storing a shortcut" on page 235 for ing this button displays a menu for the information on using this button. selected source. Arrows at the right of the MUTE screen indicate submenus. (models without the navigation system*) – press to mute/unmute infotainment TUNE – turn the thumb wheel on the system sound. steering wheel keypad or this button on the Voice control center console to scroll among tracks/folders, (models with the navigation radio stations, phone contacts or to navigate system*) – press to activate voice commands ® among the alternatives shown on the screen. (for Bluetooth -connected cell phones and the navigation system*). EXIT – short press - go upward in the menu system, cancel a current function, reject an incoming phone call or erase char- 06 acters that have been entered on the screen. Press and hold - to go to the mode's main view. From a mode’s main view, pressing and holding EXIT takes you to the infotainment system's main view, which enables you to access the same modes as by pressing the respective mode keys on the center console. # INFO – if more information is available than is currently displayed on the screen, press # INFO to display the remaining information.

232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Menu navigation

An example of menu navigation in MEDIA mode when a CD is playing

}} 233 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Mode button (in this example, the MEDIA Scroll/search forward and back button). The number of buttons varies, Press briefly on (2) to scroll between CD depending on your vehicle’s specifica- tracks/audio files or to search for the next tions). Each mode has four basic views: available radio station. Normal view Limitations Shortcut view NOTE Quick scroll view • The sound source (AM, FM1, Disc, Menu view etc.) being played through the infotainment system's speakers cannot be Select a mode by pressing its button (1) controlled from the rear control panel. (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.). Navigate using Volume control (right/left sides) TUNE, OK/MENU or EXIT. • In order to select and play an external device using MODE, the device must Scroll/search forward and back be connected to the infotainment sys- Rear control panel with headphone MODE – select: AM, FM1, FM2,HD tem. sockets* Radio2, SAT1*, SAT2*, Disc, USB, iPod, Headphones with an impedance of Bluetooth, AUX and ON/OFF. 16 – 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or 06 higher are recommended for best sound Headphones sockets (3.5 mm) reproduction. Activating/deactivating The control panel is activated by pressing MODE when the infotainment system is switched on. It is switched off automatically when the infotainment system is switched off or by a long press on MODE.

2 U.S. models only.

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Introduction

* FAV—storing a shortcut • iPod Basic sound settings • Bluetooth Press SOUND to display the basic sound set- • AUX ting menu (Bass, Treble, etc). Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to display the Favorites can also be stored for MY CAR, other setting alternatives. CAM* and NAV*. See page 201 for a description of the menu system. Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save the new setting by pressing OK/MENU. To program a function on the * FAV button: Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to 1. Select a mode (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA, display: etc.). • Surround:3 Can be set to On or Off. 2. Select e.g., a waveband (FM1, etc.) or When switched on, the system will auto- source (Disc), etc. matically select settings for the best The * FAV button can be used to store fre- 3. Press and hold * FAV until the "favorite" sound quality, which is normally DPLII quently used functions, making it possible to menu is displayed. and will appear in the display. If the start the stored function by simply press- 4. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of recording was made using Dolby Digital technology, playback will be provided ing * FAV. One favorite (for example, alternatives displayed and press OK/ Equalizer) can be programmed for each of MENU to confirm (store) your choice. with this setting and will appear the following infotainment system functions: in the display. If Surround is switched off, > The next time the infotainment system audio will be provided using 3 channel 06 In RADIO mode mode (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.) is stereo. selected, a short press on * FAV will AM • start the stored function. • Bass: Bass level. • FM1/FM2 • Treble: Treble level. • SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2* • Fader: Balance between the front and In MEDIA mode rear speakers. • DISC • Balance: Balance between the right and left speakers. • USB

3 Premium Sound Multimedia only }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235 06 Infotainment

Introduction

• Subwoofer*: subwoofer volume level. Sound stage5 NOTE DPL II centre level/3 channel centre The sound experience can be optimized for • Sound quality may be affected if the MP3 3 the driver's seat, both front seats or the rear level : Volume for the center speaker. player is being charged while the system is seat. If the front and rear seats are occupied, • DPL II surround level3/4: Surround level. in AUX mode. To help prevent this, avoid the sound stage setting Front seats is rec- charging the MP3 player in a 12-volt ommended. Select one of the options under socket while it is being played. Advanced sound settings Audio settings Sound stage. 1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to AUX. Equalizer Audio volume and automatic volume Press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on Sound levels for different frequencies can be control adjusted separately using this feature. the steering wheel keypad. The infotainment system compensates for To do so: disrupting noises in the passenger compart- 2. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to AUX ment by increasing the volume according to input volume. Confirm by pressing OK/ 1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio the speed of the vehicle. The level of sound MENU. settings and select Equalizer compensation can be set at low, medium, 3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume. 2. Turn TUNE to select one of the frequen- high or off. Select the level under Audio cies and press OK/MENU. settings Volume compensation. Optimal sound reproduction 3. Turn TUNE to adjust the sound setting The infotainment system is pre-calibrated for External audio source volume and confirm the change by pressing OK/ optimal sound reproduction using digital sig- If an external device such as an MP3 player 06 MENU. Do the same for the other fre- nal processing. or an iPod ® is connected to the AUX socket, quencies. This calibration takes into account factors the device's volume may be different than the such as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acous- 4. When you have finished making your set- volume of the internal sound sources such as tics, the listeners' seating positions, etc., for tings, press EXIT to save and return to the disc player or the radio. If the external each combination of vehicle/infotainment normal view. sound source's volume is too high, the quality system. For general information regarding menu navi- of the sound may be impaired. To help pre- gation, see page 233 and menu overview see vent this, adjust the input volume of the exter- page 237. nal audio source:

3 Premium Sound Multimedia only 4 Only when Surround is on. 5 Premium Sound Multimedia only

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Introduction

There is also a dynamic calibration that takes Main FM1/FM2 menu View song memory into consideration the volume level, radio FM menu Channel list information reception, and the speed of the vehicle. Show radio text Station name The settings that are described in this man- Show presets ual, (Bass, Treble, Equalizer etc.) are only Artist intended to enable the user to adapt sound Scan Title reproduction to his/her personal tastes. Advanced settings Information Reset all FM settings Infotainment system menus Show presets 7 Audio settings Category list RADIO menus Advanced SIRIUS settings Main SAT1*/SAT2* menu (SiriusXM™ Main AM menu satellite radio) Skip options AM menu SAT1 Channel skip list Show presets6 SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO Lock options button to activate SIRIUS. Scan Channel lock list SAT2 Audio settings7 Unlock all channels SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO 06 8 Sound stage button to activate SIRIUS. Temporarily unlock all channels Equalizer9 Song memory Change code Volume compensation Add song Audio settings7 Reset all audio settings Song Seek Delete song

6 High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia only. 7 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes 8 Premium Sound Multimedia only. 9 To reach sub menus, see "Main menu AM. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237 06 Infotainment

Introduction

MEDIA menus Stop Change audio track Main CD Audio menu Subtitles Scan Disc menu Audio tracks Audio settings7 Random Advanced settings Main AUX menu Scan Angle AUX menu 7 Audio settings DivX® VOD code AUX input volume 7 Audio settings 7 Main CD/DVD10 Data menu Audio settings Disc menu Main iPod menu Play/Pause iPod menu TEL menus Stop Random Main Bluetooth media menu Random Scan Bluetooth menu Repeat folder Audio settings7 Random Change subtitles Change device Main USB menu Remove Bluetooth device 06 Change audio track USB menu Scan Scan Play/Pause 7 Bluetooth software version in car Audio settings Stop Audio settings7 Random Main DVD10 Video menu DVD Video Menu Repeat folder DVD disc menu Select USB device Play/Pause/Continue Change subtitles

7 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes 10The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system. Images are only displayed when the vehicle is not in motion.

238 06 Infotainment

Introduction

Main Bluetooth® hands-free menu Call options Phone menu Auto answer Call lists Voicemail number All calls Disconnect phone Missed calls Answered calls Dialled calls Call duration Phone book Search New contact Speed dials Receive vCard Memory status 06 Clear phone book Change phone Remove Bluetooth device Phone settings Discoverable Sounds and volume Download phone book Bluetooth software version in car

239 06 Infotainment

Radio

General functions Menu navigation area. The currently tuned station will be RADIO menu selections can be made from indicated in the list by magnified text. the center console or the steering wheel key- 3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to pad, see page 231 for more information. select a station on the list. Selecting a station (in wavebands 4. Confirm by pressing OK/MENU or the AM/FM1/FM2) thumb wheel on the steering wheel key- Automatic tuning pad. 1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE to toggle to the desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and NOTE press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on • This list will only display the frequen- the steering wheel keypad. cies of the stations currently being received, not a complete list of all 2. Press / keys on the center con- RADIO button for selecting the AM, FM1, radio frequencies on the currently sole control panel or steering wheel key- selected waveband. FM2, SAT1* or SAT2* wavebands. pad to search for the next available sta- Keypad (buttons 0-9) tion. • If the signal from the currently tuned station is weak, this may prevent the Navigate among the menu alternatives in List of stations (in wavebands FM1/FM2 radio from updating the list of stations. the display by turning TUNE or the thumb only) If this occurs, press while the list 06 wheel on the steering wheel keypad. The radio automatically compiles a list of the of stations is displayed to switch to strongest FM stations whose signals are cur- Confirm your selection or access the manual tuning mode and select a sta- rently being received. This enables you to find tion. If the list of stations is no longer radio menus by pressing OK/MENU or stations when driving in areas where radio displayed, turn TUNE in either direc- the thumb wheel on the steering wheel stations and their frequencies are unfamiliar. tion to display the list again and press keypad. . Left/right arrow keys: Press and hold to To access this list: go to the next/previous strong station, 1. Select the desired waveband (FM1 or press briefly to tune to a preset station. FM2). The list will disappear from the display after several seconds. 2. Turn TUNE slightly in either direction. This displays the list of stations in the If the station list is no longer displayed, turn TUNE in either direction and press on

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Radio the keypad on the center console to switch to NOTE > The sound will be muted for several manual tuning (or to switch back from manual seconds and when it returns, the sta- tuning to the "list of stations" function). The radio is initially set to automatically tion has been stored on the number search for stations in the area in which you key button used. Manual tuning are driving (see the preceding section, By default, the list of stations of the strongest "List of stations"). A list of preset stations can be displayed. This stations in the area will be displayed when However, if you have switched to manual function can be activated/deactivated in you turn TUNE (see the preceding section, tuning (by pressing on the keypad AM/FM mode in FM menu Show presets "List of stations"). While the list of stations is on the center console while the list of sta- or in AM menu Show presets displayed, press on the center console tions is displayed), the radio will remain in keypad to switch to manual tuning, which manual tuning mode the next time it is Scan enables you to select a frequency from the switched on. To switch back to "list of sta- The function automatically searches the cur- TUNE complete list of all radio frequencies availa- tions" mode, turn one step (to dis- rent waveband for radio stations. When a sta- play the full list of stations) and press ble on the currently selected waveband. In tion is found, it is played for several seconds . other words, in manual tuning mode, turning before scanning is resumed. While the station TUNE one step will change from e.g., 93.3 to Please note that if you press when is playing it can be stored as a preset in the 93.5, etc.). the list of stations is not displayed, this will usual way (see "Manually storing preset sta- activate the INFO function. tions"). To manually tune a station: – To start scanning in AM/FM mode, go to 1. Press RADIO. Turn TUNE to scroll to the Storing preset stations desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and FM menu Scan or in AM menu 06 Ten preset stations can be stored for each press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on Scan. waveband (AM, FM1, etc.). the steering wheel keypad to confirm. Stop station scanning by pressing EXIT. Stored preset stations are selected using the 2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel to select buttons on the keypad on the center console. a frequency. NOTE Manually storing preset stations Storing a station interrupts the SCAN func- 1. Tune to a station (see "Selecting a station. tion" on page 240). 2. Press and hold one of the number key buttons.

241 06 Infotainment

Radio

Radio text NOTE More information about HD radio and IBOC Some stations transmit information on pro- can be found on Ibiquity's website, gram content, artists, etc. This information HD radio volume may fade in and out at www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com. times due to coverage limitations. can be shown on the display. Benefits of digital broadcasting Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Show HD radio is a brand name registered by the • Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality radio text. Ibiquity digital corporation1. They are the and AM as analogue FM). developer of a broadcasting technology • Some FM frequencies offer a greater HD Radio™reception (U.S. models called IBOC or In Band On Channel, which number of listening choices through “mul- only) refers to the method of transmitting a digital ticasting” (consisting of a frequency's radio broadcast signal centered on the same main channel and any sub-channels that Introduction frequency as the AM or FM station's present may also be available on that particular frequency. frequency. See also the section "Sub- channels" below). The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" When receiving a digital signal there is no since it is both analogue and digital. During • multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/ hybrid operation, receivers still continue to crackling due to outside influences. receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD radio receivers incorporate both modes of How HD broadcasting works reception, where the receiver will automati- HD Radio works similarly to conventional 06 cally switch to the analogue signal if the digi- radio and broadcasts of this type are availa- tal signal cannot be decoded or is lost by the ble in many areas of the United States. How- receiver. When you have tuned to an HD ever, there are a few key differences: Radio station, the symbol will appear in • Instead of transmitting one analogue sig- Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio the infotainment system display. The symbol nal, stations send out a bundled signal – broadcast is "grayed-out" when HD Radio is in standby both analogue and digital. mode and white when the radio is actively receiving an HD broadcast. • An HD radio receiver can receive both digital and analogue broadcasts. Depending on the terrain and location of the vehicle (which will influence the signal

1 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

242 06 Infotainment

Radio

strength), the receiver will determine NOTE 1. Be sure the infotainment system is which signal to receive. switched on and in one of the AM or FM There may be a noticeable difference in modes. Limitations sound quality when a change from analogue to digital or digital to analogue 2. Press OK/MENU in the center console Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM • occurs, such as: control panel. only): The main channel is the only chan- 3. Turn TUNE and move the marker to HD nel that can receive in hybrid mode (both • Volume increase or decrease Radio. digital and analogue). If a frequency has • Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Mid- sub-channels, they are broadcast in digi- range/Treble cut or boost 4. Press OK/MENU to turn HD off (the X will tal mode only. The main FM channel will disappear from the box on the display Time alignment (Digital program mate- be displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC • screen). rial in extreme cases can be as much (Volvo uses the symbol ">" to indicate as 8 seconds behind the analogue). This will disable the radio's capability to there are sub-channels available) The This will noticeable as a "stuttering" receive digital broadcasts but it will continue sub-FM channels will be displayed as effect. to function as a conventional (analogue) 93.9 – 2 WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc. The above items are dependant on the AM/FM receiver. Please note that when HD is • Reception coverage area: Due to cur- broadcaster's equipment settings and switched off, it will not be possible to tune to rent IBOC transmitter power limitations, do not indicate a fault in the vehicle's sub-channels (see the following section for a the reception coverage area in digital radio receiver or antenna systems. more detailed explanation of sub-channels). mode is somewhat more limited than the station's analogue coverage area. Please Repeat steps 2-4 above to reactivate HD (an be aware that as with any radio broadcast Switching HD on or off X will appear in the box on the display 06 technology, terrain, time of day, foliage The factory setting for HD radio is off. If acti- screen). Please note that this will only switch level and building location can have posi- vated when driving through areas with weak HD on or off for the selected waveband (AM, tive or negative effects on radio recep- HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience FM1, etc.). tion. that the radio repeatedly switches between • Analogue to digital/digital to analogue analogue/digital and digital/analogue recep- blending: Analogue to digital blending tion. If this happens, it may be desirable to will occur as the signal strength reaches a switch HD off. To do so: preset threshold in the receiver. This will be noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak reception) and is normal.

243 06 Infotainment

Radio

Sub-channels main channel, press and hold the left arrow Sub-channels can also be stored as presets, key on the center console or on the steering see page 241 for information on storing sta- wheel keypad for approximately 1 second. To tions. go to subchannel 2 (if available), press and If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it hold the right arrow key on the center console may take up to 6 seconds before the channel or on the steering wheel keypad for approxi- becomes audible. If you press this button mately 1 second. while you are out of digital range of the trans- If you are currently tuned to a frequency's mitter, No reception will be displayed. main channel, pressing and holding the left arrow key for approximately 1 second will SiriusXM™ satellite radio* tune to the next lower radio frequency. Listening to satellite radio NOTE The SiriusXM™ satellite system consists of a Example of an HD Radio station with sub-chan- number of high elevation satellites in geosyn- nels • When the radio has gone into HD mode, it may take several seconds chronous orbit. In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM before the ">" symbol (if the current wavebands only) will also have sub-channels frequency has any sub-channels) is NOTE offering additional types of programming or displayed to the left of the frequency. • The digital signals from the satellites music. Pressing and holding the arrow keys 06 are line-of-sight, which means that In such cases, the “-” symbol will be dis- for approximately 1 second before the physical obstructions such as bridges, played to the left of the frequency number main-/sub-channel icon is displayed tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere and a number will be displayed to the right of will cause the radio to tune to the next with signal reception. the frequency number indicating that the cur- available radio station, not to the cur- Avoid any obstructions, such as metal- rently tuned frequency has at least one sub- rent station's sub-channels. • lic objects transported on roof racks or channel. • When you are no longer in broadcast- in a ski box, or other antennas that ing range of the currently tuned sub- Selecting sub-channels may impede signals from the Sir- channel No reception , will be dis- iusXM™ satellites. To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press played. The radio will then be muted and hold the right arrow key on the center and it will be necessary to tune to or console or on the steering wheel keypad for search for a new radio station. approximately 1 second. To go back to the

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Radio

Selecting SiriusXM™ radio mode SiriusXM™ ID Selecting a channel 1. With the infotainment system switched The SiriusXM™ ID (sometimes referred to as There are three ways of tuning in a channel: RADIO on, press . the Electronic Serial Number or ESN) is • Using the left and right arrow keys to go required when contacting the SiriusXM Call 2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel on the ™ to the next channel. Skipped channels steering wheel keypad to scroll to the Center. It is used to activate your account (see page 247) will be excluded. and when making any account transactions. desired waveband (SAT1 or SAT2) and • By turning the TUNE control and select- press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on Selecting a channel category ing a channel from the list the steering wheel keypad. 1. Turn TUNE to display a list of channels. • Through direct channel entry. Activating SiriusXM radio ™ 2. Press EXIT. 1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no NOTE audio, which means that the channel is 3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of The numbers of skipped or locked unsubscribed and the text Subscription categories and press OK/MENU to make • channels will not be displayed. update needed is displayed (see also a selection. "Selecting a channel"). > The channels in the selected category • If a channel is locked, the access code are displayed. must be entered before the channel 2. Call SiriusXM™ at 1-888-539-SIRIUS can be selected. See "Unlocking a (7474). channel" on page 248. NOTE 3. If you tune to an unsubscribed channel, the SiriusXM™ ID will be displayed. The • The category All is default, which ena- Direct channel entry bles you to scroll through the entire list 06 SiriusXM™ ID can also be accessed from The SiriusXM™ satellite channels are in of available satellite channels. the menu (press OK/MENU, turn TUNE numerical order throughout all of the catego- to scroll to the Advanced settings • The channel categories are automati- ries. To access a channel directly: menu, press OK/MENU, scroll to SIRIUS cally updated several times a year. 1. Turn TUNE to access the channel list. ID and press OK/MENU to display the This takes approximately two minutes number). and will interrupt normal broadcasting. 2. Use the keypad buttons to enter the A message will be displayed while channel's number. 4. Updating subscription will be displayed updating is in progress. Information on while the subscription is being updated, channel or feature updates is available 3. Press OK/MENU. The radio will tune to after which the display will return to the at www.siriusxm.com. this channel, even if it belongs to a cate- normal view. gory other than the currently selected one.

245 06 Infotainment

Radio

Scanning the Song seek feature is activated, the lis- 3. Scroll to Add current song to song Scan automatically searches through the list tener will be alerted by a text message and an memory and press OK/MENU. audible signal. of satellite channels. The search will only be If a new song is selected when the memory is carried out in the selected category, see Press OK/MENU to listen to the song or EXIT full, you will be prompted to delete a song page 241 for more detailed information on the to cancel. from the list. To do so: scan function. To activate/deactivate the song seek func- 1. Press OK/MENU. Storing a channel tion: 2. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored; 1. Press OK/MENU. songs. Select a song and press OK/ 10 channels each for SAT1 and SAT2, see MENU to delete it from the list. page 241 for detailed information on storing 2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song memory channels. and press OK/MENU. Radio text • A long press on one of the number keys 3. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song Seek and This text provides information about the song stores the currently tuned channel on that press OK/MENU to activate or deactivate that is currently playing. To turn this feature key. the function. on or off, press OK/MENU and scroll to • A short press on a number key while the Show radio text and press OK/MENU to radio is in SAT1 or SAT2 mode will tune NOTE toggle between on or off. to the preset satellite channel stored on When the song has ended, the radio will that button, regardless of the currently remain tuned to the channel on which the Advanced SiriusXM™ settings selected channel category. 06 song was played. This menu function enables you to make set- Searching for and storing songs tings on certain SiriusXM™ satellite radio The Song Seek function provides notification Song memory functions. To access this menu: when SiriusXM™ is broadcasting the songs Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's 1. Press OK/MENU. selected in song memory. Song memory memory. 2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu enables you to store the name of the song for To add the currently playing song to the list: and press OK/MENU. future advance notification when that song is being played. 1. Press OK/MENU. Song seek 2. Scroll to Song memory and press OK/ When a satellite radio channel plays one of MENU. the songs stored in the song memory while

246 06 Infotainment

Radio

WARNING 5. Press OK/MENU to select All categories Locking a channel or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and 1. Press OK/MENU. Settings should be made when the vehicle press OK/MENU to select it. is at a standstill. 2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu. 6. Press OK/MENU to select Skip all 3. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to scroll channels in the category or turn TUNE The following settings can be made in the to the Lock options menu and press to scroll to a channel and press OK/ satellite menus: OK/MENU. MENU to select or deselect it. Multiple • Channel skip settings can be made channels can be selected. 4. Use the keypad in the central control 2 • Channel lock settings can be made Unskip all channels panel to enter the channel access code • The channel access code can be dis- This removes all channels from the skip list and press OK/MENU. played or changed (see also "Locking a and makes them available for selection. 5. Press OK/MENU to enter the Channel channel" on page 247) Temporary unskip all channels lock list. Your SiriusXM™ ID can be displayed • This function will temporarily unskip all chan- 6. Press OK/MENU to select All categories • Reset SiriusXM™ settings nels and make them available for selection. or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and The channels remain on the skip list and will press OK/MENU to select it. Skip options again be skipped the next time the ignition is This function is used to remove a channel switched on. 7. Press OK/MENU to select Lock all from the list of available channels. channels in the category or turn TUNE Channel lock to scroll to a channel and press OK/ Skipping a channel 06 Access to specific channels can be restricted MENU to select it. Multiple channels can OK/MENU 1. Press . (locked). A locked channel will not provide be selected. 2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu. audio, song titles, or artist information. The selected channel is now locked and a 3. Press OK/MENU to enter the Skip checked box will be displayed to indicate options menu. NOTE this. It will be necessary to enter the channel access code2 in order to listen to a locked 4. Press OK/MENU to enter Channel skip All channels are initially unlocked. channel. list.

2 The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

247 06 Infotainment

Radio

Unlocking a channel If you have forgotten the access code: 2 A channel's access code is required to 1. Select SIRIUS ID in the Advanced unlock a channel. settings menu and press OK/MENU. Unlock all channels 2. Press and hold the OK/MENU button for This permanently removes all channels from several seconds. the locked list and makes them available for selection. 3. The current code will be displayed. Temporarily unlock all channels Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with This function will temporarily unlock all chan- assistance. nels and make them available for selection. SiriusXM™ ID The channels remain on the locked list and This function displays the 12-digit SiriusXM™ will again be locked the next time the ignition activation ID. is switched on. CHANGE CODE This function makes it possible to change the channel access code. The default code is 0000. To change the code: 06 1. Select Change code in the Lock options menu and press OK/MENU. 2. Enter the new code and press OK/ MENU. 3. Confirm the new code and press OK/ MENU. If an incorrect code is entered, the text Incorrect code is displayed.

2 The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

248 06 Infotainment

Media player

CD/DVD1 functions OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec- Playing a disc tion or access the menus for the currently Press MEDIA ans scroll to Disc. Press OK/ selected source (e.g., Disc) or press the MENU or the thumb wheel on the steering thumb wheel on the steering wheel key- wheel keypad. If there is a disc in the player, pad. it will begin playing automatically. Otherwise, Left/right arrow keys: Fast back/forward Insert disc will be displayed. Insert the disc and change track or chapter2. into the slot with the text side upward and it will begin playing automatically. The media player supports and can play the following main types of discs and files: If a disc with audio/video files is inserted, its folder structure will be read by the system. It • Purchased CDs (CD Audio) may take several seconds until the disc • Home-burned CDs with audio and /or begins playing, depending on its quality and video files the amount of information it contains. Center console control panel • Home-burned DVDs with audio and /or Disc eject Disc slot video files • Purchased DVDs For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected disc MEDIA button, the most recently used must be removed within 12 seconds or it will active source will start when MEDIA is For a list of compatible formats, see be automatically drawn back into the slot. pressed. Pressing this key from Media page 252. Pause mode's main view will display a shortcut Media menu selections can be made from 06 menu. the center console or the steering wheel key- When the infotainment system volume is pad, see page 231. turned off completely or the sound is muted, Eject the player will pause. It will resume playing For general information regarding menu navi- Keypad when the volume is turned up again or if the gation, see page 233 and menu overview see sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via TUNE:Turn to navigate among menu page 237. the menu system, select Play/Pause. selections/folders/tracks (or turn the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad).

1 The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system. Images are only displayed when the vehicle is not in motion. 2 DVDs only }} 249 06 Infotainment

Media player

Navigating a disc and playing tracks When a file has been played, the player will NOTE CD audio discs continue to play the rest of the files (of the same type) in the current folder. When all of Some copy protected audio files or home- Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and the files in the folder have been played, the burned audio files may not be read by the to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to player. player will automatically go to the next folder confirm a choice and begin listening. Press and play the files in it (unless Repeat folder EXIT to cancel. Press and hold EXIT to return is activated). DVD videos to the playlist's root level. For information, see page 249. The system automatically detects and The / buttons on the center console changes settings if a disc containing only Fast forward/reverse or steering wheel keypad can also be used to audio or only video files is inserted in the change tracks. Press and hold the / buttons to fast player and will play these files. However, the forward/reverse. This is done at one speed Home-burned CD/DVD audio/video files system will not change settings if a disc con- for audio files but several speeds can be Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and taining both audio and video files is inserted chosen for video files. Press the / but- to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to and the player will continue to play the cur- tons several times to increase the speed. confirm a choice and begin listening. Use rent type of file. Release the button to return to normal view- EXIT to stop or to go back in the disc's folder ing speed. structure. Press and hold EXIT to return to NOTE the playlist's root level. 3 Video images will only be visible when the Scan vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is This function plays the first ten seconds of 06 The / buttons on the center console or steering wheel keypad* can also be used traveling faster than approximately 4 mph each track/audio file. To start scanning: (6 km/h), No visual media available to change audio/video files. while driving will be displayed. Sound 1. Press OK/MENU. The following symbols are used in the dis- from the film will still be audible and video 2. Scroll to Scan. play: images will be shown again when the vehicle stops. > The first ten seconds of each track/ • - audio files audio file will be played. • - video files 3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The current track/audio file will continue playing. • - folders

3 Not video DVDs

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Media player

Random3 Playing video DVDs Navigating in a DVD's menus This function plays the tracks in random order Play (shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can When playing a video DVD, a disc menu may be scrolled through in the normal way. To lis- appear on the display, giving you access to ten to tracks in random order: extra functions and settings such as choice of 1. Press OK/MENU, subtitle and language, scene selection, etc. 2. Scroll to Random NOTE 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate Video images will only be visible when the the random play function. vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is Press the / buttons on the center traveling faster than approximately 4 mph (6 km/h), No visual media available console or steering wheel keypad to change while driving will be displayed. Sound tracks/audio files. from the film will still be audible and video Buttons in the center console control panel, 4 images will be shown again when the vehi- shown in the illustration, are used to navigate Repeat folder cle stops. This function makes it possible to play files in in a DVD's menus. a folder repeatedly. When the last file has Changing chapters or title been played, the first file will begin again. To Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and activate: navigate in this list (the film will pause if it is 06 1. Press OK/MENU. currently playing). Press OK/MENU to choose a chapter and return to the normal 2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder. view in the display (if a film was playing, it will 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate resume). Press EXIT to access the list of the function. titles. In the list of titles, turn TUNE to make a selection and press OK/MENU to confirm. This also returns you to the list of chapters.

3 Not video DVDs 4 Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only.

251 06 Infotainment

Media player

Press EXIT to cancel and return to the normal See also www.divx.com/vod for more infor- view (without having made a selection). mation. It is also possible to change chapters by Screen settings pressing / on the center console Screen settings can be made (when the vehi- control panel or on the steering wheel key- cle is not moving) for: pad. • Brightness Advanced settings • Contrast Angle 1. Press OK/MENU and choose Image If the DVD supports this function, it is possi- DivX Certified® to play DivX® video. DivX®, settings and confirm by pressing OK/ ble to select a camera angle for a certain DivX Certified® and associated logos are MENU. scene. registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are 2. Turn TUNE to the desired setting and This can be done in DVD mode under DVD used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: press OK/MENU. DivX® is a digital video format created by disc menu Advanced settings Angle. DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified 3. Change the setting by turning TUNE and DivX® Video On Demand device that plays DivX video. Visit confirm the change by pressing OK/ The media player can be registered to play www.divx.com for more information and MENU. DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or software tools to convert your files into DivX Press OK/MENU or EXIT to return to the USB. The registration code can be found by video. 06 screen settings list. pressing the MY CAR button, and going to ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX To return to the factory settings, select Settings Information DivX® VOD Certified® device must be registered in order Reset . code. See page 201 for more information to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) about the menu system. content. To generate the registration code, Compatible formats locate the DivX VOD section in the device The media player can play a number of differ- setup menu. Go to http://vod.divx.com with ent types of files and disc formats, and is this code to complete the registration compatible with the formats listed in the fol- process and learn more about DivX VOD. lowing table. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274.

252 06 Infotainment

Media player

NOTE Dual format (double-sided discs) such as DVD Plus or CD-DVD are thicker than normal discs and may not play in your infotainment system. If a disc containing both CDDA and MP3 tracks is played, all MP3 tracks will be ignored.

Audio for- CD-Audio, mp3, wma, mats aac, m4a

Video for- CD-Video, DVD-Video, divx, mats avi, asf

253 06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

Connecting external devices 1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to select NOTE the desired source (iPod, USB or AUX). Press OK/MENU. • The system supports a number of iPod® models produced in 2005 or > For example, if a USB device has been later. selected, the text Connect USB will be displayed. • In order to help avoid damage to the USB socket, it will be switched off if 2. Connect the device to one of the sockets there is a short circuit or if the con- in the center console storage compart- nected device uses too much current ment (see the illustration). (which can happen if the device does The text Reading USB will be displayed not comply with the USB standard). The USB socket will reactivate the while the system reads the device's folders. next time the ignition is switched on if This may take a short time, depending on the the problem no longer exists. If the folder structure and the number of files. Sockets for auxiliary devices in the storage com- problem persists, contact a trained partment between the front seats When this information has been loaded, track and authorized Volvo service techni- An auxiliary device, such as an iPod® or MP3 information will be displayed and a track can cian. player can be connected to the infotainment be selected. system via one of the sockets in the center Media menu selections can be made from the console storage compartment. A device con- center console or the steering wheel keypad, 06 nected to the USB socket can be operated see page 231 for more information. using the vehicle's infotainment system controls. Navigating and playing tracks1 Turn TUNE to access the device's playlist An iPod® or an MP3 player with rechargeable and to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU batteries will also be charged if the device is to either select a sub-folder or confirm a connected to the USB socket (if the vehicle's choice and begin playback. Press EXIT to ignition is on or if the engine is running). cancel and exit the playlist or to go back in To connect a device: the folder structure. Press and hold EXIT to go to the highest level in the playlist.

1 USB and iPod® only

254 06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

The / buttons on the center console Scan1 sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via or steering wheel keypad can also be used to For information, see page 250. the menu system, select Play/Pause. change tracks/files. Random1 External sound sources The following symbols are used in the dis- For information, see page 251. USB flash drive play: 1 To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is • - audio files Search advisable to only store music files on the The keypad in the center console can be drive. It will take considerably longer for the • - video files used to search for a file in the currently system to index the files on the drive if it con- • - folders selected folder. tains anything other than compatible music When a file has been played, the player will Start the search by either turning TUNE (to files. continue to play the rest of the files (of the access the folders) or by pressing one of the same type) in the current folder. When all of character keys to enter a letter/number. Pos- NOTE sible search results will be displayed as char- the files in the folder have been played, the • The system supports removable media 1 acters are entered. player will automatically go to the next folder that uses the USB 2.0 standard and (unless Repeat folder is activated) and play Play the file by pressing OK/MENU. the FAT32 file system. It can index up the files in it. to 1,000 folders and a maximum of Repeat2 The system automatically detects and 254 sub-folders/files for each folder. However, the highest folder level can changes settings if a device containing only This function makes it possible to play files in support up to 1,000 sub-folders/files. 06 audio or only video files is connected to the a folder repeatedly. When the last file has USB socket and will play these files. How- been played, the first file will begin again. For • When using a longer type of USB ever, the system will not change settings if information, see page 251. device, connecting it with a USB adapter cable will help reduce the device contains both audio and video files Pause and will continue to play the current type of mechanical wear on the USB socket When the infotainment system volume is and on the device. file. turned off completely or the sound is muted, Fast forward/reverse1 the player will pause. It will resume playing when the volume is turned up again or if the For information, see page 250.

1 USB and iPod® only 2 USB only

255 06 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

USB hub Compatible file formats via the USB A USB hub can be connected to the USB socket socket, making it possible to connect several The following audio and video files are sup- USB devices at the same time. To select one ported by the system when playing a device of the devices, go to the menu USB menu connected to the USB socket. Select USB device MP3 player Audio formats mp3, wma, aac, m4a Many MP3 players have a file indexing sys- Video formats divx, avi, asf tem that is not supported by the vehicle's infotainment system. In order to use an MP3 player, the system must be set to USB Removable device/Mass Storage Device. iPod® An iPod® receives current and its battery is charged through the USB cable. The system will only play audio files from an iPod®.

06 NOTE When an iPod® is used as a sound source, the vehicle's infotainment system has a menu structure similar to the one in the iPod®. See the iPod's manual for detailed information.

256 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® media

Introduction The vehicle's media player can only play EXIT: Press to go back in the menu The vehicle's media player is equipped with audio files through the Bluetooth® function. structure or cancel a function. Bluetooth® and can play streaming audio files Left/right arrow keys: Short press: from a Bluetooth® device such as a cell Overview change tracks. Long press: fast forward/ phone or mp3 player. Navigation and control reverse within a track. The arrow keys on of the device can be done through the vehi- the steering wheel keypad can be used in cle's center console control panel or the the same way. steering wheel keypad. On certain external devices, it is also possible to change tracks Pairing and connecting an external from the device. device Before an external device can be connected, NOTE it must be paired to the infotainment system. Any Bluetooth cell phones used must sup- The procedure for connecting an external port Audio/Video Remote Control Profile device varies, depending whether or not the (AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution device has previously been paired to the info- Profile (A2DP). The phone must use tainment system. A maximum of 10 external AVRCP version 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older Center console control panel devices can be paired and each device only versions of these standards are used, certain features (e.g., scan or random) may VOL: Volume control needs to be paired once. To pair a device, not function. see page 260. MEDIA button, the most recently used 06 Not all cell phones are fully compatible active source will start when MEDIA is with the vehicle's Bluetooth system. A list pressed. Pressing this key from Media Automatic connection of compatible phones is available at you When the Bluetooth® function is active and Volvo retailer or at www.volvocars.us. mode's main view will display a shortcut menu. the most recently used device is within range, it is automatically connected. When the info- TUNE: Turn to navigate among menu Menu navigation tainment system searches for the most alternatives and folders shown in the dis- Choices can be made in the Bluetooth recently used device, its name is shown in the play. menus from the center console control panel display. To connect another paired device, or the steering wheel keypad. For additional OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec- press EXIT. See the following section for information about navigating the various tion or access the menus. information about switching to another menus, see page 231. device.

257 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® media

Switching to another device Disconnecting an external device Scanning audio files on an external It is possible to switch among paired The external device is automatically discon- device1 Bluetooth® devices that are in the vehicle. To nected from the infotainment system if it is This function plays the first ten seconds of do so: moved out of range. each audio file. This function can be acti- 1. Press MEDIA,scroll to Bluetooth and vated/deactivated under: Bluetooth menu press the thumb wheel on the steering Removing a paired device Scan. Scanning can be canceled by pressing wheel keypad or OK/MENU. 1. In Bluetooth mode, press OK/MENU. EXIT. 2. Be sure the Bluetooth® device is discov- 2. Scroll to Remove Bluetooth device and ® erable (refer to its user manual if neces- press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. Bluetooth version information sary). This feature offers information about the 3. Scroll to the device to be removed by Bluetooth® version installed in the vehicle's 3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. turning the thumb wheel or TUNE and infotainment system. This information can be 4. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to confirm by pressing the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. found under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth Change device and confirm by pressing software version in car. the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. > A question asking if you would like to remove the device will be displayed. > After several seconds, the names of any paired external devices will be dis- 4. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU to played. confirm or EXIT to cancel. 06 5. Scroll to the device to be connected and press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. Random1 > The device will be connected. This function plays the audio files on the Audio files can now be selected using the external device in random order (shuffle). This function can be activated/deactivated under: / buttons in the center console or on Bluetooth menu Random the steering wheel keypad. Press the / buttons on the center console or steering wheel keypad to change tracks.

1 Function is not supported on all cell phones.

258 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Introduction Compliance (20 cm) or more away from person’s body This feature makes it possible to set up a FCC/IC common sentence (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ® ankles). wireless connection between a Bluetooth - This device complies with Part 15 of FCC enabled cell phone or other device and the Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules and Industry Canada: IC 700BIAM2103 vehicle’s infotainment system. This enables Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Canada: IC 700BIAM2104 the infotainment system to function as a Operation is subject to the following two con- hands-free connection and allows you to ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- Menu navigation remote-control a number of the phone’s func- ence, and (2) this device must accept any TEL menu selections can be made from the tions. The microphone used by this system is interference, including interference that may center console or the steering wheel keypad. located near the driver's side sun visor (2). cause undesired operation of this device. For additional information about navigating The buttons and other controls on the cell the various menus, see page 231. phone can always be used regardless of USA: FCC ID A269ZUA134 whether or not the phone is connected to the USA: FCC ID A269ZUA135 hands-free system. FCC WARNING NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli- Not all cell phones are fully compatible ance could void the user’s authority to oper- with the hands-free system. A list of com- ate the equipment. patible phones is available at your Volvo retailer or at www.volvocars.us IC RSS-Gen 06 This equipment complies with FCC/IC radia- WARNING tion exposure limits set forth for an uncontrol- led environment and meets the FCC radio fre- Never use the hands-free feature or any quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supple- System overview other device in your vehicle in a way that ment C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC Cell phone distracts you from the task of driving radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This safely. Distraction can lead to a serious equipment has very low levels of RF energy accident. Location of the microphone that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it Steering wheel keypad is desirable that it should be installed and Center console control panel and display operated keeping the radiator at least 8 in.

259 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Bluetooth® functions in the center steering wheel keypad can be used in the Pairing (connecting) external console control panel same way. Bluetooth® devices OK/MENU: Press to answer an incoming A maximum of 10 cell phones or other devi- call, confirm your selection or access the ces can be paired with the hands-free sys- phone menus. Incoming calls can also be tem. Pairing only needs to be done once for answered by pressing the thumb wheel each phone. After pairing, the cell phone no on the steering wheel keypad. longer needs to be in sight or discoverable. EXIT: Press to end or reject calls, erase Two Bluetooth® devices (e.g., a phone and an characters that have been entered, end iPod®) can be active at the same. However, an ongoing function and goes back in the two phones cannot be used at the same time menus. This button on the steering wheel to make calls. keypad can also be used in the same way. There are two ways of pairing a cell phone to the hands-free system for the first time: Control panel in the center console. Getting started Method 1: Search for the external device Keypad containing letters and numbers using the infotainment menus Use the controls on the steering wheel key- for dialing numbers, adding phone book pad and in the center console to access, nav- 1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth® func- entries, etc. igate and make selections in the hands-free tion to make it discoverable (refer to the TEL 06 : Press this button to activate/deacti- system’s menus. phone’s user manual if necessary) or go vate the Bluetooth® function. If TEL is to www.volvocars.com already active, pressing this button again Activation 2. Press TEL. will display a shortcut menu with com- A short press on the TEL button in the center monly used functions. console activates the Bluetooth® hands-free > The infotainment system will search for previously paired devices. TUNE: From TEL mode's normal view, system. If the system is already activated turn clockwise to display the phone book when the button is pressed, a shortcut menu 3. Press the thumb wheel on the steering or counterclockwise for the phone list. It will be displayed. The symbol at the wheel keypad or OK/MENU and select can also be used for navigating in dis- upper right of the display indicates that the Add phone.1 played menus. The thumb wheel in the hands-free system is active.

1 Select Change phone if the cell phone or device has already been paired with the infotainment system. If several phones or devices have already been paired, their names will also be displayed. Scroll to the device to be connected and press the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad or OK/MENU.

260 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

4. With the cell phone in discoverable mode, 2. Make the vehicle discoverable by press- connected phone, its name appears in the press OK/MENU. ing the thumb wheel or OK/MENU and display. > The infotainment system will search for selecting Phone settings Connect manually cell phones or devices that are in Discoverable. To connect a phone other than the one that range, which takes approximately 30 3. Search for the vehicle using the phone or was most recently connected or to switch seconds. Any phones detected will be external device's Bluetooth® function. between cell phones that are already paired displayed using their Bluetooth® Refer to its user manual if necessary. with the hands-free system, go to Phone names. The hands-free system’s menu Change phone. Bluetooth® name will appear in the cell 4. Select My Volvo Car on the phone or phone’s display as My Volvo Car. external device’s screen and follow the Changing phones or devices directions provided. More than one device can be used in the 5. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to select vehicle as long as this device has been one of the cell phones shown in the cen- 5. Enter a PIN code of your choice in the paired. To do so, see page 260. ter console display and press the thumb external device and press its button to wheel or OK/MENU. pair the device. When prompted, enter Changing devices: the same PIN code in the vehicle using 6. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the the center console keypad. 1. Check that the external device is discov- digits (PIN code) shown in the center con- erable. sole display and press the button on the 6. Pair My Volvo Car from the external 2. Press TEL and select Change phone. cell phone used to confirm a choice. device. > The infotainment system will search for 06 The external device is now paired and can be When the external device has been paired, its previously paired devices. Those that ® controlled from the infotainment system. Bluetooth name appear in the center con- are detected will be displayed on the sole display. This device can now be con- If the connection failed: Press EXIT and con- screen. trolled from the infotainment system. nect with method 2 below. 3. Select the desired device by turning the Connect automatically Method 2: Search for the vehicle using the thumb wheel or TUNE and confirm by When the hands-free system is active and the external device’s Bluetooth® function. pressing the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. most recently connected cell phone is within > The device will be connected. 1. Press TEL. If a phone or external device range, it will be connected automatically. If is already connected, disconnect it. this phone is not within range, the hands-free > The Bluetooth® function will search for system will attempt to connect one of the previously paired devices. other paired cell phones. When the infotainment system searches for the most recently

}} 261 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Making a call The hands-free system is also deactivated Auto answer 1. Ensure that is shown at the top of when the ignition is switched off (or if the This function means that incoming calls will the center console display and that the driver’s door is opened). be answered automatically. Activate or deac- hands-free function is in telephone mode. When the cell phone is disconnected from the tivate the function in the menu system under Phone menu Call options Auto 2. Dial the desired phone number using the hands-free system, a call in progress can be answer. center console keypad or use the speed continued using the cell phone’s own speaker and microphone. dial function (see page 266). In normal Call settings view (see page see page 231 for informa- Even if the cell phone has been disconnected While a call is in progress, press OK/MENU tion about the various display views), it is manually, some phones may reconnect auto- or the thumb wheel on the steering wheel also possible to turn TUNE clockwise to matically, for example when a new call is initi- keypad to access the following functions: access the phone book and then counter- ated. clockwise for the call list. See page 267 • Mute: mute the infotainment system’s for more information about the phone Removing a paired device microphone. book. A paired phone or device can be removed • Mobile phone: transfer the call from from the list. To do so: hands-free to the cell phone. On certain 3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU. cell phones, the connection will be bro- 1. Press TEL. End or reject a call by pressing EXIT. ken, which is normal. The hands-free 2. Select Phone menu Remove function will ask if you would like to Disconnecting the cell phone Bluetooth device. reconnect. The cell phone is automatically disconnected 06 • Dial number: dial a third party during an from the infotainment system if it is moved Handling calls ongoing call using the keypad (the current out of range. call will be put on hold). The cell phone can be manually disconnected Incoming calls Call lists from the hands-free system by pressing and – Press OK/MENU (or the thumb wheel on holding TEL or in phone mode, going to the steering wheel keypad) to answer a Call lists are copied to the hands-free function each time a cell phone is connected and Phone menu Disconnect phone. See also call, even if the infotainment system is the lists are updated while the phone is con- page 263 for more information about con- currently in another mode (e.g., RADIO or nected. In normal view, turn TUNE counter- nections. MEDIA). clockwise to see the All calls list. Press EXIT to reject a call.

262 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

In phone mode, the various call lists can be Sound settings Phone settings Sounds and volume displayed in Phone menu Call lists: Call volume Ring signals Ring signal 1, etc. • All calls Call volume can be only be adjusted during a • Missed calls call. Use the buttons in the steering wheel NOTE • Answered calls keypad or the infotainment system’s VOL The connected cell phone’s ring tone may control. not be switched off when one of the • Dialled calls (certain cell phones show hands-free system's ringing tones is used. this list in reverse order) Infotainment system volume If no phone call is in progress, volume for the • Call duration If you prefer to use the connected cell infotainment system can be adjusted in the If no number has been stored, this menu can 2 normal way with the infotainment system's phone’s ring tone , go to Phone menu be accessed by pressing and holding 1. VOL control or from the steering wheel key- Phone settings Sounds and volume Voice mail pad. Ring signals Mobile phone ring signal. In normal view, a speed dial number for voice Infotainment system sound can be automati- mail can be programmed and accessed by cally muted when a phone call is received in Phone book pressing and holding 1. Phone menu Phone settings Sounds The hands-free system uses two phone The number for voice mail can be changed in and volume Mute radio/media. books (one with the cell phone's list of con- phone mode in Phone menu Call options tacts and one with contacts saved directly in Ringing volume Voicemail number Change number. the infotainment system), which are com- 06 In phone mode, go to Phone menu Phone bined to form one phone book. settings Sounds and volume Ring • The infotainment system downloads the volume and adjust the volume by turning phone book from a connected cell phone. VOL. Save the setting by pressing EXIT. This phone book will only be displayed when this cell phone is connected to the Ringing tones hands-free system. The hands-free system’s integrated ringing • The infotainment system also has an inte- tones can be selected in Phone menu grated phone book made up of contacts that have been saved in the system, regardless of which cell phone is currently

2 Not supported by all cell phones.

263 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

connected when the contact is saved. – Activate/deactivate this function in phone first letter of the contact's name. For exam- These contacts will be displayed regard- mode in Phone menu Phone settings ple, pressing and holding button 6 would pro- less of the cell phone that is connected. If Download phone book. vide direct access to the section of the list a contact has been saved in the infotain- with contacts whose names begin with M. ment system, the symbol will be If the phone book contains information about displayed next to it. someone who is trying to call you, this infor- Buttons in the center console mation will be shown in the display. Button Function NOTE Contact shortcuts Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1 Changes made from the infotainment sys- A quick way of searching the phone book for tem to a contact in the cell phone's phone contacts in normal view is to turn TUNE A B C Å Ä Æ À Ç 2 book will result in a new contact being clockwise to access the phone book and then added to the infotainment system's phone counter-clockwise to select a contact from book. However, this contact will not be D E F È É 3 saved in the cell phone's phone book. The the list. Press OK/MENU to call. infotainment system's display will show Each name in the phone book has a default duplicate contacts with different icons. phone number. If the symbol is displayed G H I Ì 4 Please also note that if a speed dial num- to the right of it, this indicates that there are ber is saved or if a contact's information is additional phone numbers for this contact. To J K L 5 edited, this will result in a new contact in use a phone number other than the default the infotainment system's phone book. 06 one, press the button on the center M N O Ö Ø Ñ Ò 6 console control panel. Turn TUNE to select a The symbol must be displayed before different phone number and press OK/MENU P Q R S ß 7 the phone book can be used and the hands- to call. free function must be in phone mode. It is also possible to search for a contact by T U V Ü Ù 8 The infotainment system saves a copy of using the center console keypad to enter the each paired cell phone's phone book. This first letter(s) of the contact's name (see also phone book can be copied each time the the following table "Buttons in the center con- W X Y Z 9 phone is connected. sole" for each button's function). Shift between upper and lower The list of contacts can also be accessed case from normal view by pressing and holding the button on the center console keypad with the

264 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Button Function 1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character. OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the char- + 0 p w keys on the center console can also be acters that have been entered. used. If a number button on the center console is # * 2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The pressed while the text wheel is displayed, a results of the search will be displayed in list of characters (1) will be displayed. Briefly the phone book (3). press the button once to enter its first letter, Searching for contacts twice to enter the second letter, etc. Continue 3. To switch from letter entry mode to the to press the button to display other charac- entry mode for numbers or special char- ters. Continue with the next character, etc. acters, or to go to the phone book, turn TUNE to one of the selections (see the To enter a number, press and hold the but- explanation in the following table) in the ton. list for switching character entry mode (2) and press OK/MENU. Adding a new contact

Character entry modes 123/ABC Toggle between letters and numbers by pressing OK/ MENU. 06 Searching for contacts using the text wheel More Switch to special characters List of characters by pressing OK/MENU. Switch between character entry modes This leads to the phone book (see the following table) (3). Turn TUNE to select a con- Phone book (list of contacts) tact and press OK/MENU to display the contact's informa- To search for or edit a contact in phone Enter the name of a new contact tion. mode, go to Phone menu Phone book Switch between character entry modes Search. (see the following table) Character entry field

}} 265 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

New contacts can be added in phone mode When all of the contact's information has Speed dial in Phone menu Phone book New been entered, select Save contact in the Speed dial numbers can be added in phone contact. menu to save. mode in Phone menu Phone book 1. When Name is highlighted, press OK/ Speed dial. 123/AB Toggle between letters and MENU to go to the character entry mode To use speed dial to make a call in phone C numbers by pressing OK/ (see the illustration). mode, press a button on the center console MENU. 2. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press keypad followed by OK/MENU. If a contact OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter More Switch to special characters has not been saved on the speed dial number keys on the center console can also be by pressing OK/MENU. used, you will be prompted to save a contact used. on the number selected. OK Save and return to Add con- 3. Continue to the next letter, etc. The name tact by pressing OK/MENU. Accept vCards entered will be displayed in the character vCards from other cell phones can be added entry field (2). Toggle between upper and to the infotainment system's phone book. To lower case letters by pressing enable this feature, put the infotainment sys- 4. To switch from letter entry mode to the OK/MENU. tem in discoverable mode for Bluetooth®. The entry mode for numbers or special characters, or to toggle between upper and Press OK/MENU and the cur- feature is activated in Phone menu Phone lower case letters, etc., turn TUNE to one sor will move to the character book Receive vCard. of the selections (see the explanation in 06 entry field (2) at the top of the the following table) in the list (1) and press display. The cursor can now be Memory status OK/MENU. moved by turning TUNE to a In phone mode, the memory status of the position where new characters infotainment system's phone book and the When you have finished entering the name, connected cell phone's phone book can be select OK in the list in the display (1) and can be entered or deleted by EXIT seen in Phone menu Phone book press OK/MENU. Continue by entering the pressing . In order to add Memory status. phone number in the same way. characters, return to text entry mode by pressing OK/MENU. When you have entered the phone number, Clearing the phone book press OK/MENU and select a tag for the In phone mode, all entries in the infotainment number (Mobile phone, Home, Work or system's phone book can be cleared in General). Press OK/MENU to confirm.

266 06 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Phone menu Phone book Clear phone book.

NOTE Clearing the entries in the infotainment system's phone book does not delete entries in the cell phone's phone book.

Bluetooth® version information For information about the Bluetooth® version installed in the vehicle, go to Phone menu Phone settings Bluetooth software version in car.

267 06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control*

Introduction WARNING Languages The infotainment system's voice control fea- 1 As the driver, you have full responsibility ture enables the driver to voice-activate cer- for operating the vehicle safely and adher- tain functions in a Bluetooth®-connected cell ing to all applicable traffic regulations. phone or the navigation system. The voice control feature provides access to NOTE a number of functions in the Bluetooth® • The information in this section applies hands-free and navigation systems while to using voice commands to operate a allowing you to keep your hands on the steer- Bluetooth®-connected cell phone. ing wheel. Input is in dialogue form using See also the section "Bluetooth® spoken commands from the user and verbal hands-free connection" beginning on prompts from the system. Voice control uses ® page 259 for detailed information the same microphone as the Bluetooth List of languages. about using a cell phone with the vehi- hands-free system (see the illustration on cle's infotainment system. page 259) and system prompts are provided Voice control is not available for all languages. The available languages are indi- • The navigation system has a separate through the infotainment system's front user's guide containing information speakers. cated by the icon. The language can be about voice commands for operating changed in the MY CAR menu system under that system. MY CAR Settings System options 06 Language. Voice commands offer convenience and help avoid distractions so that you can concentrate on driving and focus your attention on road and traffic conditions.

1 Available in vehicles equipped with the Volvo Navigation System* only

268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control*

Getting started • When giving commands, speak at your This feature can be accessed by pressing the usual speed and in a normal tone of voice MY CAR button in the center console and after the tone turning TUNE. • The vehicle's doors, windows and moon- Tutorial roof should be closed when using the The tutorial feature can be started in two voice control system ways: • Avoid background noises in the cabin when using the system NOTE NOTE The tutorial feature can only be started when the vehicle is parked and the parking If you are uncertain of the commands that brake is applied. you can use, saying "help" will prompt the system to provide a number of commands Voice control button (1) on the steering wheel. that can be used in a specific situation. • By pressing the voice control button and saying "Voice tutorial." Activating the system Voice control commands can be cancelled • By pressing MY CAR and going to Before any phone voice commands can be by: Settings Voice settings Voice ® Saying "cancel" used, a Bluetooth -enabled cell phone must • tutorial. Press OK/MENU to begin the be paired with the infotainment system. If a • Not speaking tutorial lesson. phone command is given, the system will Pressing and holding the voice control 06 inform you If there is no cell phone paired. • The tutorial is divided into three lessons, button See page 260 for information on pairing a cell which take a total of approximately 5 minutes phone. • Pressing EXIT or one of the mode but- to complete. tons (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.). Press the voice control button (1 in the illus- By default, the system will begin with the first tration) to activate the system and initiate a lesson. To skip to the next lesson, press the command dialogue. The system will display Voice control support feature voice control button and say "next." Go back commonly used commands on the screen • Tutorial: A feature that helps acquaint to a previous lesson by saying "previous." you with the system and the procedure when the button has been pressed. Press and hold the voice control button to for giving commands. While using the voice control system, keep exit the tutorial. the following points in mind:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269 06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control*

Voice output volume The following is a list of features that can be User action Press MY CAR and go to Settings Voice voice-controlled with a Bluetooth®-connected Begin saying the digits in the phone number. settings Voice output volume. Press OK/ cell phone. If you say several digits and pause, the sys- MENU and turn TUNE to raise or lower the tem will repeat them and prompt you by say- Shortcuts ing "Continue." volume. Press EXIT to save the change and Shortcut commands for using the phone can exit the menu. be found in the MY CAR menu system, under Continue saying the digits. When you have finished, complete the command by saying Settings Voice settings Voice "Dial." Using voice commands command list Phone commands and The driver initiates a voice command dialogue General commands. See page 201 for more • You can also change the number by by pressing the voice control button (see the information on the menu system. using the commands "Correction" (which illustration on page 269). deletes the last group of digits spoken) or Dialing a number "Delete" (which will erase the entire When a dialogue has been initiated, com- The system understands the digits zero to phone number). monly used commands will be shown in the nine. These numbers can be spoken individu- display. Grayed-out texts or texts in paren- Dialing from a call list ally, in groups of several digits at a time, or theses are not part of the spoken command. The dialogue below enables you make a call the entire number can be given at once. from one of your cell phone's call lists. Once you become familiar with the system, Numbers above nine will not be recognized. you can speed up the command dialogue by The user initiates the dialogue by The following is an example of a voice com- briefly pressing the voice control button to 06 mand dialogue. The system's response may saying: skip prompts from the system. vary depending on the situation. Phone > dial from call list Commands can be given in several ways. The user initiates the dialogue by or For example, the command "Phone call contact" can be spoken as: saying: Phone dial from call list Phone > dial number • "Phone > Call contact"—say "Phone," Continue by responding to the system's wait for a system response, and then or prompts. continue by saying "Call contact." Phone dial number Calling a contact • "Phone call contact"—give the entire System response The dialogue below enables you to call the command at one time Number please pre-defined contacts in your cell phone. See the phone's user's guide if necessary.

270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control*

The user initiates the dialogue by or saying: Phone dial voice mail Phone > call contact Continue by responding to the system's or prompts. Phone call contact Continue by responding to the system's prompts. When calling contacts, keep the following in mind: • If there are several contacts with similar names, they will be presented in the display in numbered lines and the system will prompt you to pick a line number • If there are more lines in the list than can be displayed at one time, saying "Down" will enable you to scroll downward in the list (and saying "up" will take you back up through the list). 06 Dialing voice mail The dialogue below enables you to call your voice mail to check any messages that you may have received. Your voice mail phone number must be registered in the Bluetooth® function, see page 263. The user initiates the dialogue by saying: Phone > dial voice mail

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271 Driving recommendations...... 274 Refueling...... 278 Loading...... 283 Cargo area ...... 287 Towing a trailer...... 290 Emergency towing...... 293

272 DURING YOUR TRIP 07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

General information 130 for additional information about Sport Some of the above mentioned items and oth- mode. ers are checked at the standard maintenance Economical driving conserves natural • Do not exceed posted speed limits. intervals. resources Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra Better driving economy may be obtained by • load) in the vehicle. WARNING thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops and adjusting the speed of your vehicle • Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire Driving with the tailgate open: Driving with the tailgate open could lead to poi- to immediate traffic conditions. pressure regularly (when tires are cold). sonous exhaust gases entering the pas- Observe the following rules: • Remove snow tires when threat of snow senger compartment. If the tailgate must or ice has ended. be kept open for any reason, proceed as • Bring the engine to normal operating tem- • Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, follows: perature as soon as possible by driving increase air resistance and also fuel con- • Close the windows with a light foot on the accelerator pedal sumption. for the first few minutes of operation. A • Set the ventilation system control to air cold engine uses more fuel and is subject • At highway driving speeds, fuel consump- flow to floor, windshield and side win- to increased wear. tion will be lower with the air conditioning dows and the blower control to its on and the windows closed than with the highest setting. • Whenever possible, avoid using the vehi- air conditioning off and the windows cle for driving short distances. This does open. not allow the engine to reach normal Weight distribution affects handling operating temperature. • Using the onboard trip computer's fuel consumption modes can help you learn At the specified curb weight your vehicle has • Drive carefully and avoid rapid accelera- how to drive more economically. a tendency to understeer, which means that tion and hard braking. the steering wheel has to be turned more Other factors that decrease gas mileage D than might seem appropriate for the curva- • Use the transmission's Drive ( ) position are: as often as possible and avoid using kick- ture of a bend. This ensures good stability 07 down. • Dirty air cleaner and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that these properties can alter • Using the transmission's Sport mode1 • Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in may increase fuel consumption some- • Dragging brakes what. Use the transmission's Drive (D) the cargo area, the less the tendency to Incorrect front end alignment position as often as possible. See page • understeer.

1 Models with the T6 turbo engine only.

274 07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

Handling, roadholding WARNING CAUTION Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, • Avoid driving through standing or • Engine damage will occur if water is check that the tires are inflated to the recom- rushing water. Doing so can be dan- drawn into the air cleaner. gerous and it may also be difficult to mended pressure according to the vehicle • If the vehicle is driven through water determine the actual depth of the load. See the "Tire pressure" section. Loads deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may water. should be distributed so that capacity weight enter the differential and the transmis- or maximum permissible axle loads are not • If water cannot be avoided, after driv- sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating exceeded. ing through the water, press lightly on capacity and may shorten the service the brake pedal to ensure that the life of these components. Driving through water brakes are functioning normally. Water • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in • The vehicle can be driven through water or mud can make the brake linings water up to the door sills longer than up to a depth of approximately 10 in. slippery, resulting in delayed braking absolutely necessary. This could result (25 cm), at a maximum speed of 6 mph effect. in electrical malfunctions. (10 km/h). • If the engine has been stopped while • Take particular care when driving through the vehicle is in water, do not attempt flowing water. to restart it. Have the vehicle towed • Clean the electrical connections for trailer out of the water. wiring after driving in mud or water. • When driving through water, maintain low Engine and cooling system speed and do not stop in the water. Under special conditions, for example when driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and cooling system will overheat. Proceed as 07 follows to avoid overheating the engine. • Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep hills. • Do not turn the engine off immediately when stopping after a hard drive.

275 07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

WARNING • The optional 12 volt socket in the cargo • Reflective warning triangles are legally area provides electrical current even with required in some states/provinces. The cooling fan may start or continue to the ignition switched off, which drains the • Have a word with a trained and qualified operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the battery. engine has been switched off. Volvo service technician if you intend to Before a long distance trip drive in countries where it may be difficult to obtain the correct fuel. • Remove any auxiliary lights from in front It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle of the grille when driving in hot weather checked by a trained and qualified Volvo • Consider your destination. If you will be conditions. service technician before driving long dis- driving through an area where snow or ice are likely to occur, consider snow tires. • Do not exceed engine speeds of tances. Your retailer will also be able to sup- 4500 rpm if driving with a trailer in hilly ply you with bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and Cold weather precautions terrain. The oil temperature could become wiper blades for your use in the event that If you wish to check your vehicle before the too high. problems occur. approach of cold weather, the following As a minimum, the following items should be advice is worth noting: Conserving electrical current checked before any long trip: Keep the following in mind to help minimize • Make sure that the engine coolant con- battery drain: • Check that engine runs smoothly and that tains 50 percent antifreeze. Any other fuel consumption is normal. mixture will reduce freeze protection. This • When the engine is not running, avoid • Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage. gives protection against freezing down to using ignition mode II. Many electrical –31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" systems (the audio system, the optional • Have the transmission oil level checked. antifreeze is not approved by Volvo. Dif- navigation system, power windows, etc) • Check condition of drive belts. ferent types of antifreeze must not be will function in ignition modes 0 and I. mixed. These modes reduce drain on the battery. • Check state of the battery's charge. • Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as • Volvo recommends using only genuine • Please keep in mind that using systems, Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. 07 accessories, etc., that consume a great well), and replace those that are worn. deal of current when the engine is not Check tire pressures. • Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this running could result in the battery being • The brakes, front wheel alignment, and helps prevent the formation of condensa- completely drained. Driving or having the steering gear should be checked by a tion in the tank. In addition, in extremely engine running for approximately trained and qualified Volvo service techni- cold weather conditions it is worthwhile 15 minutes will help keep the battery cian only. to add fuel line de-icer before refueling. charged. • Check all lights, including high beams. • The viscosity of the engine oil is important. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil)

276 07 During your trip

Driving recommendations

improves cold-weather starting as well as • Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. decreasing fuel consumption while the • Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can engine is warming up. Full synthetic cause damage to the locks. 0W-30 oil is recommended for driving in areas with sustained low temperatures. • The load placed on the battery is greater during the winter since the windshield wipers, lighting, etc., are used more often. Moreover, the capacity of the battery decreases as the temperature drops. In very cold weather, a poorly charged battery can freeze and be damaged. It is therefore advisable to check the state of charge more frequently and spray an anti- rust oil on the battery posts. • Volvo recommends the use of snow tires on all four wheels for winter driving, see page 310. • To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from freezing, add washer solvents containing antifreeze. This is important since dirt is often splashed on the windshield during winter driving, requiring the frequent use of the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent should be diluted as follows: 07 Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 1 part water.

277 07 During your trip

Refueling

Fuel requirements gasoline will lessen the effectiveness of the meet seasonal air quality standards, some emission control system and could result in areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel. Deposit control gasoline (detergent loss of emission warranty coverage. State Volvo allows the use of the following "oxy- additives) and local vehicle inspection programs will genated" fuels; however, the octane ratings Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- make detection of misfueling easier, possibly listed on page 279 must still be met. oline to control engine deposits. Detergent resulting in emission test failure for misfueled gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and vehicles. Alcohol – Ethanol intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by vol- control gasolines will help ensure good driva- NOTE ume may be used. Ethanol may also be refer- bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure red to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". whether the gasoline contains deposit control Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to additives, check with the service station oper- methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tri- 15% MTBE may be used. ator. carbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission Control System perform- Methanol NOTE ance may be affected, and the Check Do not use gasolines containing methanol Engine Light (malfunction indicator light) Volvo does not recommend the use of (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice located on your instrument panel may can result in vehicle performance deteriora- external fuel injector cleaning systems. light. If this occurs, please return your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo tion and can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered Unleaded fuel service technician for service. under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter and must use only unleaded gasoline. Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers, U.S. and Canadian regulations require that "Oxygenated fuels" pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing 07 labeled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or have nozzles which fit your vehicle's filler ethers. In some areas, state or local laws inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel require that the service pump be marked indi- into a vehicle labelled "unleaded gasoline cating use of alcohols or ethers. However, only". Leaded gasoline damages the three- there are areas in which the pumps are way catalytic converter and the heated oxy- unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is gen sensor system. Repeated use of leaded alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check with the service station operator. To

278 07 During your trip

Refueling

Octane rating NOTE Use of Additives With the exception of gas line antifreeze dur- Minimum octane When switching to higher octane fuel or ing winter months, do not add solvents, thick- changing gasoline brands, it may be necessary to fill the tank more than once eners, or other store-bought additives to your before a difference in engine operation is vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. noticeable. Overuse may damage your engine, and some of these additives contain organically volatile chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself Fuel Formulations to these chemicals. Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a knock inhibitor, and do not use lead addi- WARNING tives. Besides damaging the exhaust emission control systems on your vehicle, lead Never carry a cell phone that is switched has been strongly linked to certain forms of on while refueling your vehicle. If the G028920 cancer. phone rings, this may cause a spark that could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in Typical pump octane label Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. fire and injury. Volvo recommends premium fuel for best Unburned benzene has been strongly linked 1 to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an performance, but using 87 octane or above WARNING will not affect engine reliability. area where you must fill your own gas tank, take precautions. These may include: Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, color- Demanding driving standing upwind away from the filler noz- less, and odorless gas. It is present in all • exhaust gases. If you ever smell exhaust In demanding driving conditions, such as zle while refueling operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the refueling only at gas stations with vapor trailer, or driving for extended periods at • passenger compartment is ventilated, and recovery systems that fully seal the immediately return the vehicle to a trained higher altitudes than normal, it may be advis- 07 mouth of the filler neck during refueling and qualified Volvo service technician for able to switch to higher octane fuel (91 or correction. higher) or to change gasoline brands to fully • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a utilize your engine's capacity, and for the fuel filler nozzle. smoothest possible operation.

1 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

279 07 During your trip

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler door central locking button does not lock the Manually opening the fuel filler door fuel filler door. • Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and is completely closed after refueling. • Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot weather. Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click indicates that it is closed.

CAUTION • Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In addition to causing damage to the The fuel filler door is located on the right rear environment, gasolines containing If necessary, the fuel filler door can be fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel alcohol can cause damage to painted opened manually: tank symbol on the information display surfaces, which may not be covered 1. Open the side hatch in the cargo com- ) under the New Vehicle Limited War- partment (on the same side as the fuel ranty. With the ignition switched off, press and filler door). release the button on the lighting panel to 2. Grasp the handle on the green cord. unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the 3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the the fuel filler door clicks open. vehicle begins to move forward. An audible 07 click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks. • If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is being refueled, this feature enables you to lock the doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel filler door unlocked. • You can also keep the vehicle locked if you remain inside it during refueling. The

280 07 During your trip

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel cap CAUTION help avoid malfunctions that could damage the three-way catalytic converter. 2 • Do not refuel with the engine running . • Do not park your vehicle over combusti- Turn the ignition off or to position I. If ble materials, such as grass or leaves, the ignition is on, an incorrect reading which can come into contact with the hot could occur in the fuel gauge. exhaust system and cause such materials • Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not to ignite under certain wind and weather press the handle on the filler nozzle conditions. more than one extra time. Too much • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of fuel in the tank in hot weather condi- one minute), or an intermittently firing or tions can cause the fuel to overflow. flooded engine can cause three-way cat- Overfilling could also cause damage to alytic converter or exhaust system over- the emission control systems. heating. Remember that tampering or unauthor- Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the • ized modifications to the engine, the filler cap slowly. Emission controls Engine Control Module, or the vehicle After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by Three-way catalytic converter may be illegal and can cause three-way turning it clockwise until it clicks into place. • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain catalytic converter or exhaust system engine malfunctions, particularly involving overheating. This includes: altering fuel the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition injection settings or components, altering systems, may cause unusually high three- emission system components or location way catalytic converter temperatures. Do or removing components, and/or repea- not continue to operate your vehicle if ted use of leaded fuel. you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of power or other unusual operating con- NOTE 07 ditions, such as engine overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned engine will Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with three-way catalytic converters.

2 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

281 07 During your trip

Refueling

Heated oxygen sensors The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. Readings are fed into a control module that continuously monitors engine functions and controls fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously adjusted for efficient combustion to help reduce harmful emissions.

282 07 During your trip

Introduction WARNING Power tailgate* The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is Stop the engine, put the gear selector determined by factors such as the number of • in P, and apply the parking brake passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight when loading or unloading long of any accessories that may be installed, etc. objects. To increase loading space, the rear seat • The vehicle's driving characteristics backrests can be folded down, see page 93. may change depending on the weight When loading the cargo area, keep the fol- and distribution of the load. lowing in mind: • A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a Load objects in the cargo area against • head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h). the backrest whenever possible. The cargo area and rear seat should G031965 Unstable loads can be secured to the • • not be loaded to a level higher than load anchoring eyelets with straps or web Power tailgate closing button 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of lashings to help keep them from shifting. the rear side windows. Objects placed Automatic opening • Stop the engine and apply the parking higher than this level could impede the The power tailgate can be opened automati- brake when loading or unloading long function of the Inflatable Curtain. cally in the three ways: objects. The gear selector can be • knocked out of position by long loads, By pressing and holding the but- which could set the vehicle in motion. ton on the lighting panel until the tailgate begins to open. • By pressing and holding the button on the remote key until the tailgate 07 begins to open. • By pressing the rubber-covered button under the outer handle on the tailgate. The taillights illuminate automatically when the automatic open function is used.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 283 07 During your trip

CAUTION Programming the tailgate opening WARNING angle Be sure that there is adequate space Be sure that no one is near the tailgate above and behind the vehicle before open- The tailgate's maximum opening angle can when it is opened or closed automatically. ing the tailgate automatically. be programmed, which can be useful, for The tailgate should never be obstructed in example, if the tailgate has to be opened in a any way when it is operated. The vehicle should not be driven or moved garage with a low ceiling. with the tailgate in the open position. How- ever, if the vehicle is moved with the tail- To do so: Interrupting automatic opening/closing gate in the open position, the automatic Automatic opening or closing the tailgate can closing function will be inoperative until • Open the tailgate manually, hold it at the be interrupted in four ways: one of the following occurs: desired maximum opening angle and press the tailgate's closing button for at • • The tailgate is closed manually least 3 seconds. When the tailgate is By pressing the button on the • The ignition is switched off and the key released, programming is complete. lighting panel. is removed for approximately 10 • To remove this programming, open the • By pressing the button on the minutes (the tailgate will function again tailgate manually to a higher opening after restart). angle. remote key. • By pressing the button on the lower edge Automatic closing NOTE of the tailgate. The power tailgate can be closed by pressing • By pressing the rubber-covered button If the tailgate has been opened and closed under the outer handle on the tailgate. continuously for more than 60 seconds, the button on the tailgate (see the the automatic function will be deactivated illustration) or by pressing it down. If one of these actions is taken, the tailgate to avoid overloading the electrical system. will stop and reopen. The automatic function can be used again NOTE after approximately 10 minutes. Pinch protection 07 If the tailgate is pressed down e.g., by the If the tailgate is obstructed while it is being If the vehicle's battery has been dis- weight of snow or strong wind, it will close operated, the pinch protection function is charged or disconnected, the tailgate must automatically. be opened and closed once manually to activated. reset the system. • If the tailgate is being opened, the electrical function will be switched off and the

284 07 During your trip

tailgate will be released from the electrical The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of Grocery bag holder* system. the vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to • If the tailgate is being closed, it will stop help anchor items in the cargo area. and reopen. WARNING Operating the tailgate manually The power tailgate can be disconnected from • Cover sharp edges on long loads to the vehicle’s electrical system by quickly pull- help prevent injury to occupants. ing the outer handle twice. The tailgate can Secure the load to help prevent shift- then be opened/closed manually. ing during sudden stops. • Always secure large and heavy objects with a seat belt or cargo retaining Folding down the rear seat backrests

straps. G017745 The rear seat backrests can be folded down • Always secure the load to help prevent for additional loading space, see page 95. Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo it from moving in the event of sudden area stops. The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags Load anchoring eyelets Switch off the engine, apply the park- • in place. ing brake and put the gear selector in P when loading and unloading the 1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo vehicle. area. 2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 285 07 During your trip

Roof loads • The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel consumption will increase with the size of Using load carriers the load. Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso- • Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast ries. Observe the following points when in cornering and hard braking. use: • To avoid damaging your vehicle and to achieve maximum safety when driving, we recommend using the load carriers that Volvo has developed especially for your vehicle. • Volvo-approved removable roof racks are designed to carry the maximum allowable roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg). For non-Volvo roof racks, check the manufacturer's weight limits for the rack. • Never exceed the rack manufacturer's weigh limits and never exceed the maximum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg). • Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads evenly. • Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the load. 07 • Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate tie-down equipment. • Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. • Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity and handling change when you carry a load on the roof.

286 07 During your trip

Cargo area

Steel cargo grid* Installing the steel cargo grid Installing the cover For information about the necessary tools 1. Press the end piece on one side of the and procedures for installing/removing the cargo area cover into the retaining steel cargo grid, please refer to the assembly bracket in the side panel of the cargo instructions1 that were included when the grid area . was purchased. 2. Do the same on the opposite side . Cargo area cover* 3. Press both sides of the cover until they click into place . The red mark will no longer be visible. 4. Check that both ends of the cover are G031978 securely locked in place.

Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel Removing the cover grid that helps prevent objects in the cargo 1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover area from moving forward into the passenger inward. compartment. 2. Pull the cover carefully upward and out- Folding the grid up/down ward. The other end will release automati-

G031977 cally from its retaining bracket. Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it rearward/upward, or push it downward/ Folding down the cargo area cover's forward. Use rear flap • Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it The cargo area cover's rear flap points hori- NOTE into the holes in the rear cargo area pil- zontally when the cover is retracted (rolled 07 lars. If the steel grid is to be used with the up). To fold it down: • To retract (roll up) the cover, release it optional cargo area cover, the grid must – Pull the flap slightly rearward past its sup- be folded down before the cargo area from the holes and guide it toward the ports and fold it down. cover is put in place. rear seat backrest.

1 Assembly instruction no. 30715972.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 287 07 During your trip

Cargo area

NOTE WARNING On models equipped with this cover, it • Be sure that the cargo net's upper should be removed before a child seat is attachment hooks are properly attached to the child restraint anchors. inserted in the brackets and that the lower straps are correctly attached and pulled taut. Cargo net* • A damaged cargo net should never be used. • Objects in the cargo area should be securely anchored, even if the cargo net is correctly installed and in use. Cargo net in rear position Mounting the cargo net 4. Mounting in the rear position: With the The cargo net is easiest to put in place net's rod attached to the rear upper through one of the rear doors. brackets, hook the lower straps in the 1. Fold out the cargo net and be sure that floor eyelets in the cargo area. Pull the net strap taut.

G034213 the upper hinged rod is straight and locked in position. Cargo net mounted in rear position 2. Insert one end of the rod into the front or Your vehicle can be equipped with a cargo rear bracket (near the ceiling). Be sure net made of strong nylon fabric that helps that the lock on the lower strap is facing prevent objects in the cargo area from mov- toward you. 07 ing forward into the passenger compartment. 3. Insert the other end of the rod in the The net can be attached in two different pla- opposite bracket. ces: – Be sure to press the end hooks on the • Rear position: behind the rear seat back- rod as far forward as possible in the rest brackets. • Front position: behind the front seat backrests

288 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 During your trip

Cargo area

Removing and storing the cargo net

Cargo net in front position

Mounting in the front position: With the Press the release buttons on the locks on net's rod attached to the front upper the straps and pull out a small section of brackets, hook the lower straps in the the strap. eyelets in the front seat rails. Attaching the net is easier if the front seat backrests Press in the catches on the straps' hooks are upright and the seats are moved and remove the hooks from the eyelet. slightly forward. Fold up the net's rod at the center and If the front seats are moved rearward, roll up the net. they should not press hard against the When not in use, the cargo net can be stored net. under floor of the cargo area. 07 CAUTION Pressure from the front seats against the cargo net could damage the net and/or its brackets.

5. Pull the net strap taut.

289 07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

Introduction watched when driving in hot climates or WARNING Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off Bumper-attached trailer hitches must hitches that are specially designed for the the air conditioner if the temperature • not be used on Volvos, nor should vehicle. gauge needle enters the red range. safety chains be attached to the If the automatic transmission begins to • bumper. NOTE overheat, a message will be displayed in the text window. • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle See page 369 for the maximum trailer and rear axle must not be used. Avoid overload and other abusive opera- tongue weights recommended by Volvo. • tion. • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to the vehicle Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil- Observe the legal requirements of the • brake system, nor a trailer's lighting • ity, and economy. state/province in which the vehicles are system directly to the vehicle lighting It is necessary to balance trailer brakes All Volvo models are equipped with • system. Consult your nearest author- • with the towing vehicle brakes to provide energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump- ized Volvo retailer for correct installa- a safe stop (check and observe state/ ers. Trailer hitch installation should not tion. local regulations). interfere with the proper operation of this • When towing a trailer, the trailer's bumper system. • Do not connect the trailer's brake system safety wire must be correctly fastened directly to the vehicle's brake system. Trailer towing does not normally present any to the hole or hook provided in the particular problems, but take into considera- • More frequent vehicle maintenance is trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety tion: required. wire should never be fastened to or wound around the drawbar ball. Remove the ball holder when the hitch is Increase tire pressure to recommended • • not being used. full pressure. See the tire inflation table on page 303. 07 • When your vehicle is new, avoid towing heavy trailers during the first 620 miles (1,000 km). • Maximum speed when towing a trailer: 50 mph (80 km/h). • Engine and transmission are subject to increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant temperature should be closely

290 07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

NOTE by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem- on the ground. bly. • When parking the vehicle with a trailer on a hill, apply the parking brake 3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the before putting the gear selector in P. Detachable trailer hitch (accessory) one in the hitch assembly. Always follow the trailer manufactur- 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch er's recommendations for wheel assembly/ball holder. chocking. 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end When starting on a hill, put the gear • of the locking bolt. selector in D before releasing the parking brake. See also page 138 for more C Removing the ball holder detailed information about starting off 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking on a hill while towing a trailer. bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the • If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift D E ball holder/hitch assembly. positions while towing a trailer, make B sure the gear you select does not put 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch

A G010496 too much strain on the engine (using assembly. too high a gear). Ball holder • The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch NOTE may be rated for trailers heavier than Locking bolt A cover for the hitch assembly is also the vehicle is designed to tow. Please included in the kit. Cotter pin adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer weights. Hitch assembly • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 15%. Safety wire attachment 07

Installing the ball holder Trailer cable 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer out of the hitch assembly. has 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved

291 07 During your trip

Towing a trailer

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) be switched off (but will be on again the Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to next time the engine is started) help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer • TSA may not intervene when the vehicle when the vehicle and trailer have begun to and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries sway and is part of the Dynamic Stability and to compensate for the swaying motion by Traction Control system (DSTC). See page moving the steering wheel rapidly 142 for information on DSTC. How TSA works Function Once swaying has begun, it can be very diffi- A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway cult to stop, which makes it difficult to control for various reasons. Normally this only occurs the vehicle and trailer. at high speeds but, for example, if the trailer The TSA system continuously monitors the is overloaded or if the load is unevenly dis- vehicle's movements, particularly lateral tributed in the trailer, there is risk of swaying movement. If the system detects a tendency at speeds between approximately 45-55 mph to sway, the brakes are applied individually (70-90 km/h). on the front wheels, which has a stabilizing Swaying may be caused by factors such as: effect on the vehicle and trailer. This is often enough to enable the driver to regain control • The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sud- of the vehicle. den, strong crosswind • The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an If this is not adequate to stop the swaying uneven road surface or drive over a bump motion, the brakes are applied to all of the wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is • Sudden movements of the steering wheel equipped with brakes, and engine power is 07 Facts about TSA temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion • TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi- begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer mately 40 mph (60 km/h) have once again become stable, TSA will no stop regulating the brakes/engine power and • The DSTC symbol ( ) in the instru- the driver regains control of the vehicle. ment panel will flash when TSA is working • If the driver switches off the DSTC system's Spin Control function, TSA will also

292 07 During your trip

Emergency towing

Towing eyelet and may be partially concealed. This eye฀ WARNING let must be screwed into the positions provided on the right sides of either the • When the vehicle is being towed, the front or rear bumper (see illustration). ignition should be in mode II (in mode I, all of the vehicle's airbags are deac- There are two different types of covers tivated). See page 89 for more infor- over the openings for the towing eyelet mation about ignition modes. and they have to be opened differently. • Never remove the remote key from the • If the cover has a notch, insert a coin, ignition slot when the vehicle is being etc., into the notch and pry open the towed. For vehicles with keyless drive, edge of the cover. Open the cover the remote key must remain inside the Location of the towing eyelet completely and remove it. vehicle. • If the cover has a mark along one edge • The power brakes and power steering or in a corner, press the mark while will not function when the engine is not prying out the opposite side/corner running. Approximately 5 times more using a coin, etc. Open the cover and pressure will be required on the brake remove it. pedal and the steering wheel will be considerably harder to turn. Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by hand and then using the tire iron until it is • The towing eyelets must not be used securely in place. for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for any similar purpose involving After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet severe strain. should be removed and returned to its storage location. Attaching the towing eyelet Press the cover for the attachment point back 07 into position. Attaching the towing eyelet The towing eyelet is located under the floor of the cargo area, with the spare tire

293 07 During your trip

Emergency towing

Towing the vehicle CAUTION Having the vehicle towed by a tow 1. With the remote key fully pressed into the truck General towing precautions: ignition slot1, press START/STOP Call for professional help from an authorized ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds to • Please check with state and local towing company.Volvo recommends the use activate ignition mode II. authorities before attempting this type of flat bed equipment. of towing, as vehicles being towed are 2. The remote key must remain in the igni- subject to regulations regarding maxi- The towing eyelet may be used to pull the tion slot2 for the entire time that the vehi- mum towing speed, length and type of vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck if: cle is being towed. towing device, lighting, etc. • The angle of the tow truck’s ramp is not 3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing • If the vehicle's battery is dead, attach more than 12 degrees from a horizontal vehicle slows down by applying light jumper cables (see page 126) to pro- plane pressure on the brake pedal. This will vide current for releasing the electric • The vehicle’s wheels rotate freely and roll help prevent jarring movements of the parking brake and to move the gear straight ahead vehicle being towed. selector from the P position to N. If this is not possible, see page 131 for WARNING 4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop information about manually overriding the vehicle being towed. the shiftlock system to move the gear No person or object should be behind the selector from P to N. tow truck while the vehicle is being pulled up onto the flatbed. • Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not exceed the maximum allowable towing speed. • Maximum distance with front wheels on ground: 50 miles (80 km). The vehicle should only be towed in 07 • the forward direction.

1 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive. 2 For vehicles with the the optional keyless dirive, the remote key must be in the vehicle.

294 07 During your trip

Emergency towing

CAUTION • The vehicle should always be towed in the forward direction. • Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)* that are being towed with the front wheels off the ground should not be towed at a speed above approx. 45 mph (70 km/h) and should not be towed farther than 30 miles (50 km). • If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed truck, the towing eyelet must not be used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Consult the tow truck operator.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 295 General information ...... 298 Tire inflation...... 301 Inflation pressure ...... 303 Tire designations ...... 304 Glossary of tire terminology ...... 306 Vehicle loading ...... 307 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 309 Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires ...... 310 Temporary Spare ...... 311 Tire Sealing System*...... 312 Changing a wheel ...... 318 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)...... 322

296 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WHEELS AND TIRES 08 Wheels and tires

General information

Introduction than tires without the "all-season" rating. Tire rotation Your vehicle is equipped with tires according However, for optimum road holding on icy or Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire to the vehicle's tire information placard on the snow-covered roads, we recommend suitable wear is affected by a number of factors such B-pillar (the structural member at the side of winter tires on all four wheels. as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door When replacing tires, be sure that the new style, etc. opening). tires are the same size designation, type (radial) and preferably from the same manu- NOTE CAUTION facturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is • If the tires are rotated, they should Some Volvo models are equipped with an a risk of altering the car's roadholding and only be moved from front to rear or Ultra High Performance tire and wheel handling characteristics. vice versa. They should never be rota- combination designed to provide maxi- ted left to right/right to left. New Tires mum dry pavement performance with con- Ideally, tire rotation should be done the sideration for hydroplaning resistance. • first time after approximately 3,000 They may be more susceptible to road hazard damage and, depending on driving miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at conditions, may achieve a tread life of less 6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this Some customers find that tire rotation vehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced may help to get extra mileage from tire AWD or DSTC system, these tires are not life. designed for winter driving, and should be • Tire rotation should only be performed replaced with winter tires when weather if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and conditions dictate. tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

The tires have good road holding characteris- Tire age tics and offer good handling on dry and wet Tires degrade over time, even when they are surfaces. It should be noted however that the Remember that tires are perishable goods. As not being used. It is recommended that tires tires have been developed to give these fea- of 2000, the manufacturing week and year generally be replaced after 6 years of normal tures on snow/ice-free surfaces. (Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1513 service. Heat caused by hot climates, fre- Most models are equipped with "all-season" 08 means that the tire illustrated was manufac- quent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet tires, which provide a somewhat higher tured during week 15 of 2013). (U.V.) exposure can accelerate the aging degree of road holding on slippery surfaces

298 08 Wheels and tires

General information process. The temporary spare1 should also with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very Summer and winter tires be replaced at 6-year intervals, even if it has poor traction. never been used. When replacing worn tires, it is recommended A tire's age can be determined by the DOT that the tire be identical in type (radial) and stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the same make (manufacturer) will prevent A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration alteration of the driving characteristics of the should be replaced immediately. vehicle. Tread wear indicator Improving tire economy • Maintain correct tire pressure. See the tire inflation table on page 303. G021778 • Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire screeching. The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the tire • Tire wear increases with speed. When switching between summer and Correct front wheel alignment is very • • winter tires, mark the tires to indicate important. where they were mounted on the car, • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy e.g., LF = left front, RR = right rear and driving comfort. • Tires with tread designed to roll in only G021829 • Tires must maintain the same direction of one direction are marked with an arrow rotation throughout their lifetime. on the sidewall. The tires have wear indicator strips running • When replacing tires, the tires with the • Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI most tread should be mounted on the braking properties and ability to force are printed on the side of the tire. When rear wheels to reduce the chance of over- aside rain, snow and slush. approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the steer during hard braking. tread, these strips become visible and indi- • Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the cate that the tire should be replaced. Tires tires and/or wheels permanently. 08

1 Option or accessory on some models }} 299 08 Wheels and tires

General information

• The tires with the most tread should WARNING always be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skidding). • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo are specified to meet stringent stability Contact a Volvo workshop if you are • and handling requirements. Unap- unsure about the tread depth. proved wheel/tire size combinations Storing wheels and tires can negatively affect your vehicle's When storing complete wheels (tires mounted stability and handling. on rims), they should be suspended off the • Any damage caused by installation of floor or placed on their sides on the floor. unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new Tires not mounted on rims should be stored vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no on their sides or standing upright, but should responsibility for death, injury, or not be suspended. expenses that may result from such installations. CAUTION Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, dry, dark place, and should never be stored in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, etc.

300 08 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

Inflation placard NOTE WARNING • The placards shown indicate inflation • Under-inflation is the most common pressure for the tires installed on the cause of tire failure and may result in vehicle at the factory only. severe tire cracking, tread separation, • A certain amount of air seepage from or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of the tires occurs naturally and tire pres- vehicle control and increased risk of sure fluctuates with seasonal changes injury. in temperature. Always check tire • Under-inflated tires reduce the load pressure regularly. carrying capacity of your vehicle.

• Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation When weather temperature changes occur, G032521 pressure, including the spare, at least tire inflation pressures also change. A 10- Tire inflation placard once a month and before long trips. You degree temperature drop causes a corres- are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire ponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pres- Tire inflation pressure gauge, as automatic service sta- sure. Check your tire pressures frequently Check tire inflation pressure regularly. tion gauges may be inaccurate. and adjust them to the proper pressure, which can be found on the vehicle's tire infor- See the tire inflation table on page 303. A tire • Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance mation placard or certification label. inflation pressure placard is also located on and wear. the driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem- Checking tire pressure ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of • Under-inflation or over-inflation may the driver's door opening). This placard indi- cause uneven treadwear patterns. Cold tires cates the designation of the factory-mounted Inflation pressure should be checked when tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits the tires are cold. and inflation pressure. The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after the 08 vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

301 08 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

After driving a distance of approximately 4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure Tire ratings 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be there are no nails or other objects hot. If you have to drive farther than this dis- embedded that could puncture the tire Speed ratings tance to pump your tire(s), check and record and cause an air leak. The speed ratings in the table translate as fol- the tire pressure first and add the appropriate low: 5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there air pressure when you get to the pump. are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, irregularities. Speed ratings never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The 6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, M 81 mph (130 km/h) tires are hot from driving and it is normal for including the spare. pressures to increase above recommended Q 100 mph (160 km/h) cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recom- NOTE mended cold inflation pressure could be sig- T 118 mph (190 km/h) nificantly under-inflated. • If you overfill the tire, release air by H 130 mph (210 km/h) To check inflation pressure: pushing on the metal stem in the cen- 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one ter of the valve. Then recheck the V 149 mph (240 km/h) pressure with your tire gauge. tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto W 168 mph (270 km/h) the valve. • Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other tires. Con- Y 186 mph (300 km/h) 2. Add air to reach the recommended air sult the tire inflation pressure table on pressure. page 303 or see the inflation pressure Load ratings placard. 3. Replace the valve cap. See page 304 for an explanation of the load rating on the sidewall of the tire. CAUTION • After pumping the tires, always reinstall the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps 08 could corrode and become difficult to remove.

302 08 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure table The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 301 for its location) for information specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory. Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to five persons Front Rear psi (kPa) psi (kPa)

235/65 R17 35 (240) 35 (240) 235/60 R18 235/55 R19 255/45 R20

Temporary spare tire 61 (420) 61 (420) T125/80R17

NOTE Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts department for the most up-to-date specifications.

303 08 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

Information on the sidewall 1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters) 7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The Terrain, AS = All Season 5 6 7 9 8 larger the number, the wider the tire. 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number 2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" width in percent. and indicates that the tire meets all fed- 4 3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the eral standards. The next two numbers or 10 letters are the plant code where it was symbol indicate that the vehicle is 3 manufactured, the next two are the tire equipped with optional self-supporting size code and the last four numbers rep- 2 1 run flat tires . See page 324 for more resent the week and year the tire was 11 information about these tires). 1 built. For example, 1510 means that the 12 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in tire was manufactured during week 15 of G010753 inches). 2010. The numbers in between are mar- 5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, keting codes used at the manufacturer's Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers discretion. This information helps a tire place standardized information on the side- a load index of 95 equals a maximum load of 1521 lbs (690 kg). manufacturer identify a tire for safety wall of all tires (see the illustration). recall purposes. 6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maxi- The following information is listed on the tire mum speed at which the tire is designed 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material sidewall: to be driven for extended periods of time, Used: Indicates the number of plies indi- The tire designation: carrying a permissible load for the vehi- cates or the number of layers of rubber- cle, and with correct inflation pressure. coated fabric in the tire tread and side- NOTE For example, H indicates a speed rating wall. Tire manufacturers also must indi- of 130 mph (210 km/h). cate the ply materials in the tire and the Please be aware that the following tire sidewall, which include steel, nylon, poly- designation is an example only and that ester, and others. this particular tire may not be available on NOTE your vehicle. The tire's load index and speed rating may not appear on the sidewall because they 08 are not required by law.

1 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

304 08 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire information placard located on the B- Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle. 11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature grades: see page 309 for more information. 12. Maximum permissible inflation pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

305 08 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

Terms • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table The tire suppliers may have additional mark- unit of air pressure. in this chapter. ings, notes or warnings such as standard • B-pillar: The structural member at the • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be load, radial tubeless, etc. side of the vehicle behind the front door. cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This • Tire information placard: A placard • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. temperature is normally reached after the showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire vehicle has been parked for at least sizes, recommended inflation pressure, • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the 3 hours. and the maximum weight the vehicle can bead area and the tread. carry. • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim- • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A eter of the tire that contacts the road number on the sidewall of each tire pro- when mounted on the vehicle. viding information about the tire brand • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire and manufacturing plant, tire size and or a tire and tube assembly upon which date of manufacturer. the tire beads are seated. Inflation pressure • : A measure of the • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating amount of air in a tire. the maximum load in pounds and kilo- • Standard load: A class of P-metric or grams that can be carried by the tire. This Metric tires designed to carry a maximum rating is established by the tire manufac- load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric turer. tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure • Maximum permissible inflation beyond this pressure will not increase the pressure: the greatest amount of air tires load carrying capability. pressure that should ever be put in the • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac- tires designed to carry a heavier maxi- turer. mum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for • Recommended tire inflation pressure: Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pres- inflation pressure, established by Volvo, sure beyond this pressure will not which is based on the type of tires that 08 increase the tire's load carrying capabil- are mounted on a vehicle at the factory. ity. This information can be found on the tire • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- inflation placard(s) located on the driver's sure.

306 08 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

Loads Permissible axle weight 2. Determine the combined weight of the Properly loading your vehicle will provide The maximum allowable weight that can be driver and passengers that will be riding maximum return of vehicle design perform- carried by a single axle (front or rear). These in your vehicle. ance. numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian 3. Subtract the combined weight of the Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your- driver and passengers from XXX kilo- CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle grams or XXX pounds. self with the following terms for determining must never exceed its maximum permissible your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without weight. 4. The resulting figure equals the available a trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian amount of cargo and luggage load Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ Gross vehicle weight (GVW) capacity. For example, if the "XXX" CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be tion placard: gers. five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and lug- Curb weight NOTE gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – The weight of the vehicle including a full tank 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) of fuel and all standard equipment. It does • The location of the various labels in not include passengers, cargo, or optional your vehicle can be found on page 5. Determine the combined weight of lug- equipment. 366. gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi- A table listing important weight limits cle. That weight may not safely exceed Capacity weight • for your vehicle can be found on page the available cargo and luggage load All weight added to the curb weight, including 369. capacity calculated in Step 4. cargo and optional equipment. When towing, 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo from your trailer will be transferred to your weight. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit vehicle. Consult this manual1 to deter- NOTE 1. Locate the statement "the combined mine how this reduces the available weight of occupants and cargo should cargo and luggage load capacity of your For trailer towing information, please refer never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi- vehicle. to the section "Towing a trailer" on page cle's placard. 290. 08

1 See page 290.

307 08 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

WARNING • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, gross vehicle weight, or any other weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent deformation or catastrophic failure. • Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the tires that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the correct load carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo retailer for information.

308 08 Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grading information test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire WARNING ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST marked C may have poor traction perform- The temperature grade for this tire is CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY ance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction established for a tire that is properly infla- REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE ted and not overloaded. Excessive speed, GRADES tests and is not a measure of cornering (turn- under-inflation, or excessive loading, either ing) traction. Quality grades can be found, where appli- separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and tire failure. cable, on the tire sidewall between the WARNING tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. TREADWEAR The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tes- TEMPERATURE ted under controlled conditions on a specified The temperature grades are A (the highest), government test course. For example, a tire B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to graded 150 would wear one and one half the generation of heat and its ability to dissi- (1 1/2) times as well on the government pate heat when tested under controlled con- course as a tire graded 100. The relative per- ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test formance of tires depends upon the actual wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause conditions of their use, however, and many the material of the tire to degenerate and depart significantly from the norm due to var- reduce tire life, and excessive temperature iation in driving habits, maintenance practices can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C and differences in road characteristics and corresponds to a minimum level of perform- climate. ance that all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Stand- TRACTION ard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher The traction grades, from highest to lowest, levels of performance on the laboratory test are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under con- wheel than the minimum required by law. 08 trolled conditions on specified government

309 08 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

Winter driving conditions CAUTION to help retain the highest degree of traction. Snow chains Check local regulations regarding the • It is important to install winter tires on all use of snow chains before installing. • Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with four wheels to help retain traction during the following restrictions: • Use single-sided snow chains only. cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail- • Snow chains should be installed on front • Always follow the chain manufactur- ure to do so could reduce traction to an wheels only. Use only Volvo approved er's installation instructions carefully. unsafe level or adversely affect handling. snow chains. Install chains as tightly as possible and • Do not mix tires of different design as this • If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" retighten periodically. could also negatively affect overall tire tires and wheels are installed and are of a • Never exceed the chain manufactur- road grip. size different than the original tires and er's specified maximum speed limit. • Winter tires wear more quickly on dry wheels, chains in some cases CANNOT (Under no circumstances should you roads in warm weather. They should be be used. Sufficient clearances between exceed 31 mph (50 km/h). removed when the winter driving season chains and brakes, suspension and body • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns has ended. components must be maintained. when driving with snow chains. • Studded tires should be run-in 300 – • Some strap-on type chains will interfere • The handling of the vehicle can be 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during which with brake components and therefore adversely affected when driving with the vehicle should be driven as smoothly CANNOT be used. chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as as possible to give the studs the opportu- • All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains well as locked wheel braking. nity to seat properly in the tires. The tires should only be installed on the front should have the same rotational direction wheels. throughout their entire lifetime. Snow tires, studded tires1 • Certain size tires may not allow the assembly of snow chains/traction devi- Tires for winter use: NOTE Owners who live in or regularly commute ces. • Please consult state or provincial regula- through areas with sustained periods of Consult your Volvo retailer for additional tions restricting the use of studded winter snow or icy driving conditions are tires before installing such tires. snow chain information. strongly advised to fit suitable winter tires

1 Where permitted

310 08 Wheels and tires

Temporary Spare

Spare tire The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Temporary Spare". Recommended tire pressure (see the placard on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should be maintained irrespective of which position on the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on. In the event of damage to this tire, a new one can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the "Tem- porary Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

CAUTION The vehicle must not be driven with wheels of different dimensions or with a spare tire other than the one that came with the vehicle. The use of different size wheels can seriously damage your car's transmission. 08

1 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

311 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

Location NOTE WARNING The tire sealing system's compressor has • After using the tire sealing system, the been tested and approved by Volvo. vehicle should not be driven farther than approximately 120 miles (200 The 12-volt sockets are located in the front km). tunnel console, on the rear side of the center • Have the tire inspected by a trained console in the rear seat and in the cargo and qualified Volvo service technician area*, see page 226. as soon as possible to determine if it can be permanently repaired or must Accessing the tire sealing system be replaced. The tire sealing system is stowed under the • The vehicle should not be driven faster floor of the cargo area. To access it: than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a 1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area. tire that has been temporarily repaired with the tire sealing system. Introduction 2. Lift out the tire sealing system. Certain models are equipped with a tire • After using the tire sealing system, sealing system* that enables you to tempo- NOTE drive carefully and avoid abrupt steer- rarily seal a hole in the tread surface and re- ing maneuvers and sudden stops. inflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation • The tire sealing system is only pressure. intended to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not the sidewall. The system consists of an air compressor, a • Tires with large holes or tears cannot container for the sealing compound, wiring to be repaired with the tire sealing sys- connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical tem. system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a hose used to connect the system to the tire’s • After use, stow the tire sealing system inflation valve. properly to help prevent rattling.

312 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

Tire sealing system–overview WARNING • Inhalation: Move the exposed person to fresh air. If irritation persists, get Please keep the following points in mind medical attention. when using the tire sealing system: • Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in unless directed to do so by medical the illustration) contains 1) rubber personnel. Get medical attention. latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These Disposal: Dispose of this material and substances are harmful if swallowed. • its container to a hazardous or special • The contents of this bottle may cause waste collection point. allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the respiratory tract, the skin, the central nervous sys- NOTE tem, and the eyes. Do not break the seal on the bottle. This Precautions: occurs automatically when the bottle is Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of the screwed into the holder. compressor) • Keep out of reach of children. On/Off switch • Do not ingest the contents. • Avoid prolonged or repeated contact Electrical wire with the skin. Bottle holder (orange cover) • Wash thoroughly after handling. First aid: Protective hose cover • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with Air release knob soap and water. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. Hose • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for Bottle with sealing compound least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper and lower eyelids. Get medi- Air pressure gauge cal attention if symptoms occur. 08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 313 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

Tire sealing system–temporarily NOTE WARNING repairing a flat tire Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, Contact with the sealing compound may etc.) from the tire before using the sealing cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, system. wash the affected area immediately with soap and water. • Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is checked and adjusted if necessary. 3. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle WARNING of sealing compound.

• Never leave the tire sealing system NOTE unattended when it is operating. • Keep the tire sealing system away Do not break the seal on the bottle. This from children. occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder. • Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off the road and away from moving traffic. 4. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder. • Apply the parking brake. WARNING Stage 1: Sealing the hole The bottle is equipped with a catch to 1. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it keep it securely in place and help prevent to the steering wheel hub where it will be sealing compound leakage. Once in place, clearly visible to the driver. the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two 2. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi- be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. stages: tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping pressed down). • 5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s sealing compound into the tire. The car is inflation valve and screw the tire sealing 08 then driven a short distance to distribute the sealing compound in the tire. system’s hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand.

314 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

6. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest WARNING CAUTION 12-volt socket in the vehicle. • Never stand next to the tire being infla- The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid NOTE ted when the compressor is in operation. overheating. Be sure that none of the other 12-volt • If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire, sockets is being used while the compres- switch off the compressor immediately. sor is in operation. WARNING • If there is visible damage to the sidewall If the pressure remains below 22 psi or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. 7. Start the vehicle’s engine. (1.8 bar) after approximately seven The vehicle should not be driven if this minutes, turn off the compressor. In this occurs. Contact a towing service or case, the hole is too large to be sealed and WARNING Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if the vehicle should not be driven. The vehicle´s engine should be running applicable. when the tire sealing system is used to 10. Switch off the compressor and discon- avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the nect the electrical wire from the 12-volt vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place, NOTE socket. or outdoors, before using the system. The air pressure gauge will temporarily show an increase in pressure to approxi- 11. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation 8. Start the tire sealing system’s compres- mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing valve and reinstall the valve cap. compound is being pumped into the tire. sor by pressing the on/off switch to posi- The pressure should return to a normal CAUTION tion I. level after approximately 30 seconds. • After pumping the tires, always reinstall 9. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to the valve cap to help avoid damage to between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. Switch off the compressor briefly to get a • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps clear reading from the pressure gauge. could corrode and become difficult to remove.

08 12. Immediately drive the vehicle for approximately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 315 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute WARNING WARNING the sealing compound in the tire. If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 behavior, or noises should occur while hour, check the inflation pressure in the CAUTION driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle damaged tire again before continuing. If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire in a safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps, cracks, or other visible damage, Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the Replacing the sealing compound use of the sealing compound may lead to and recheck its inflation pressure. If the incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not container cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. continue driving. Have the vehicle towed The sealing compound container must be Use the tire sealing system to check and to a trained and qualified Volvo service replaced if: adjust the damaged tire's inflation pres- technician. sure. • the tire sealing system has been used to repair a tire Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure the container’s expiration date has 1. Connect the tire sealing system as • NOTE passed (see the date on decal). described in stage 1. • Safely stow the tire sealing system in a convenient place as it will soon be 2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this NOTE used again to check the tire’s inflation chapter for the correct inflation pressure. After use, the sealing compound bot- pressure. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the • tire sealing system’s compressor. If nec- tle, the hose, and certain other system The empty bottle of sealing compound • essary, release air from the tire by turning components must be replaced. Please cannot be removed from the bottle consult your Volvo retailer for replace- the air release knob counterclockwise. holder. Consult a trained and qualified ment parts. Volvo service technician to have the If the sealing compound bottle’s expi- bottle removed and properly disposed CAUTION • ration date has passed, please take it of. The compressor should not be used for to a Volvo retailer or a recycling station more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid that can properly dispose of harmful overheating. substances.

316 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System*

Inflating tires WARNING 9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off The tire sealing system can be used to inflate switch to position 0) when the correct The vehicle’s engine should be running the tires. To do so: • inflation pressure has been reached. when the tire sealing system is used to 1. Park the car in a safe place. avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure 10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated valve and reinstall the valve cap. 2. The compressor should be switched off. place, or outdoors, before using the Ensure that the on/off switch is in position system. The parking brake should be CAUTION 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be securely applied and the gear selector After pumping the tires, always reinstall pressed down). should be in the P (park) position. • the valve cap to help avoid damage to 3. Take out the electrical wire and hose. • Children should never be left unatten- the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. ded in the vehicle when the engine is 4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s running. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps inflation valve and screw the hose con- could corrode and become difficult to nector onto the valve as tightly as possi- remove. 7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the ble by hand. gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly 11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the 5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest to get a clear reading from the pressure 12-volt socket. 12-volt socket in the vehicle. gauge. 6. Start the vehicle’s engine. 8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s compressor (press the on/off switch to position I). If necessary, release air from the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for 08 more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317 08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

Removing a wheel WARNING The other two blocks can remain in the spare wheel well. Current legislation prohibits the use of the “Temporary Spare” tire other than as a After use temporary replacement for a punctured The foam block and spare wheel must be tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi- replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow ble by a standard tire. Road holding and on the upper foam block. It should point for- handling may be affected with the “Tem- ward. porary Spare” in use. Changing a wheel CAUTION 1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P. The vehicle must never be driven with more than one temporary spare wheel. 2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the towing eyelet and the wheel cover removal 1 Location of jack*, towing eyelet and tools* tool* stowed under the floor of the trunk. The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel Spare wheel well with the rim side down. There are two 3. Remove the wheel cover (where applica- The spare wheel is only intended for tempo- foam blocks, one under the spare wheel and ble) using the removal tool or remove the rary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as one over/inside. The upper one contains all wheel cover by hand. soon as possible. The car's handling may be tools. 4. Block the wheels that are on the ground altered by the use of the spare wheel. The The same bolt runs through to secure the with wooden blocks or large stones. correct tire pressure for the spare wheel is spare wheel and the foam blocks. stated in the tire pressure table on page 303 and in the tire inflation placard on the driver's Taking out the spare wheel side door jamb at the rear of the driver's door 1. Open the floor hatch. opening. 2. Undo the retaining bolt. 3. Lift out the foam block. 4. Lift out the spare wheel. 08

1 The towing eyelet may be partially concealed under the rear edge of the cargo area. See the illustration on page 293 for its location.

318 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

Jack attachment points 7. There are two jack attachment points on Lug wrench and towing eyelet each side of the vehicle. Position the jack 6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use correctly in the attachment (see the illus- 5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug the lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen tration) and crank while simultaneously wrench as shown in the illustration. the wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting guiding the base of the jack to the downward (counterclockwise) pressure. CAUTION ground. The base of the jack must be flat on a level, firm, non-slippery surface. The towing eyelet must be screwed into Before raising the vehicle, check that the the lug wrench as far as possible. jack is still correctly positioned in the attachment.

319 08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

WARNING NOTE • The jack must correctly engage the The jack provided with your vehicle is jack attachment. intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in the • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came non-slippery surface. with your particular model should be used • Never allow any part of your body to to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be be extended under a vehicle suppor- lifted more frequently or for a prolonged ted by a jack. period, using a garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always follow this device’s • Use the jack intended for the vehicle instructions for use. when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle. Re-installing the wheel Apply the parking brake and put the • 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel WARNING gear selector in the Park (P) position. and hub. There are two attachment points near the • Block the wheels standing on the rear of the vehicle. Only the rear-most ground, use rigid wooden blocks or 2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub. attachment point is intended for the jack large stones. (see the illustration). • The jack should be kept well-greased and clean, and should not be dam- 8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be aged. changed is lifted off the ground. • No objects should be placed between 9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and the base of jack and the ground, or remove the wheel. between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle.

08 Tighten the wheel nuts

320 08 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand- tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all nuts are snug. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter- nately tighten the bolts crosswise to 103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm). 5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable). The opening in the wheel cover for the tire's inflation valve must be positioned over the valve.

321 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Introduction NOTE and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. NOTE If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002 1 minute and Tire press. syst Service for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- required will be displayed. er's responsibility to maintain correct tire This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol- pressure, even if under-inflation has not lowing conditions: (1) This device may not Each tire, including the spare (if provided), reached the level to trigger illumination of the cause harmful interference, and (2) this should be checked monthly when cold and TPMS low tire pressure telltale. device must accept any interference inflated to the inflation pressure recom- Your vehicle has also been equipped with a received, including interference that may mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the cause undesired operation. TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. the system is not operating properly. The (If your vehicle has tires of a different size TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with 1 The tire pressure monitoring system uses than the size indicated on the vehicle placard the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- sensors mounted in the tire valves to check or tire inflation pressure label, you should tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will inflation pressure levels. When the vehicle is determine the proper tire inflation pressure for flash for approximately one minute and then moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph those tires.) remain continuously illuminated. This (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit As an added safety feature, your vehicle has sequence will continue upon subsequent inflation pressure data to a receiver located in been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction the vehicle. ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu- When low inflation pressure is detected or if a pressure telltale when one or more of your minated, the system may not be able to sensor is not functioning properly, TPMS will tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. light up the tire pressure warning light ( ) ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu- TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replace- (also referred to as a telltale) in the instrument minates, you should stop and check your ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi- panel and will display one of the following tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning messages in the text window: Tire pressure the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc- low or under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation tion telltale after replacing one or more tires Tire needs air now. or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the 08 also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, replacement or alternate tires and wheels

1 Not available in all markets or in all models.

322 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) allow the TPMS to continue to function prop- Changing wheels with TPMS CAUTION erly. Please note the following when changing or replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/ When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press the pump's mouthpiece straight NOTE tires on the vehicle: onto the valve to help avoid bending or TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does • Only the factory-mounted wheels are otherwise damaging the valve. not replace normal tire maintenance. For equipped with TPMS sensors in the information on correct tire pressure, please valves. refer to the tire inflation pressure table in CAUTION If the vehicle is equipped with a tempo- this chapter or consult your Volvo retailer. • rary spare tire, this tire does not have a • After pumping the tires, always rein- TPMS sensor. stall the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. Erasing warning messages • If wheels without TPMS sensors are When a low tire pressure warning message mounted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal has been displayed, and the tire pressure SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be dis- caps could corrode and become diffi- warning light has come on: played each time the vehicle is driven cult to remove. 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the above 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or inflation pressure of all four tires. more. Once TPMS sensors are properly instal- 2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pres- • led, the warning message should not sure (consult the tire pressure placard or reappear. If the message is still displayed, the inflation pressure table on page 303. drive the vehicle for several minutes at a 3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to drive the vehicle for several minutes at a erase the message. speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This • Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors will erase the warning text and the warn- be fitted on all wheels used on the vehi- ing light will go out. cle. Volvo does not recommend moving sensors back and forth between sets of WARNING wheels. Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to 08 tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle.

323 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

NOTE To recalibrate: 4. Select Tyre pressure system and press OK/MENU to turn the system on or off. • If you change to tires with a different 1. Switch off the engine. recommended inflation pressure, the 2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)* TPMS system must be recalibrated to and put the ignition in mode I or II (see these tires. On U.S. models, this must page 89 for additional information). Self-supporting run flat tires are available as be done by a trained and qualified optional equipment. The vehicle must be Volvo service technician. On Canadian 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con- equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring models, see the following section sole control panel and select Settings System (TPMS) if tires of this type are instal- "Recalibrating TPMS." Car settings Tyre pressure led. If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen- • 4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tyre Tires of this type have specially reinforced sor is moved to another wheel, the pressure and press OK/MENU again. sidewalls that make it possible to continue sensor's seal, nut, and valve core driving to a limited extent even though the tire should be replaced. 5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above has lost some or all of its inflation pressure. • When installing TPMS sensors, the 25 mph (40 km/h) continuously for at These tires are mounted on special rims (nor- vehicle must be parked for at least least 10 minutes. mal tires can also be mounted on these rims). 15 minutes with the ignition off. If the > When the calibration message is no vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a longer displayed, TPMS has been If an SST tire loses inflation pressure, the yel- TPMS error message will be displayed. recalibrated to the new inflation pres- low TPMS symbol illuminates in the instru- sure. ment panel and a text message is also displayed. If this happens, reduce speed to not Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models Activating/deactivating TPMS more than 50 mph (80 km/h). The tire should only)* (Canadian models only)* be replaced as soon as possible. In certain cases, it may be necessary to reca- 1. Switch off the engine. librate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom- Drive carefully; it may be difficult to determine mended tire inflation pressures (see the infla- 2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see page which tire is damaged. To find the damaged tion pressure table on page 303), for exam- 89 for additional information). tire, check the inflation pressure in all four tires. ple, if higher inflation pressure is necessary 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con- when transporting heavy loads, etc. sole control panel and select Settings 08 This is done in the vehicle's menu system. Car settings Tyre pressure See page 201 for a description of the menu system.

324 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

WARNING • SST tires should only be mounted by service technicians who are familiar with tires of this type. • SST tires may only be mounted on vehicles equipped with TPMS. • Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) if TPMS indicates that a tire has lost inflation pressure. • Do not drive farther than 50 miles (80 km) before replacing a damaged SST tire. • Drive carefully and avoid e.g., hard braking or fast turns. • SST tires must be replaced if they are damaged. A tire of this type cannot be repaired.

325 Volvo maintenance...... 328 Maintaining your car...... 329 Hood and engine compartment...... 331 Engine oil...... 332 Fluids...... 334 Replacing bulbs...... 336 Wiper blades and washer fluid...... 343 Battery...... 346 Fuses...... 350 Vehicle care...... 359

326 MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Volvo maintenance

Introduction Inspection and maintenance should also be Periodic maintenance helps minimize Periodic maintenance will help keep your performed anytime a malfunction is observed emissions vehicle running well. The maintenance serv- or suspected. ices contain several checks that require spe- Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada NOTE cial instruments and tools and therefore must In accordance with applicable U.S. and Refer to your Warranty and Service be performed by a qualified technician. To • Canadian regulations, the following list of Records Information booklet for a keep your Volvo in top condition, specify warranties is provided. comprehensive service and mainte- time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts nance schedule up to 150,000 miles New Vehicle Limited Warranty and Accessories. • (240,000 km). This program contains Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S. • inspections and services necessary for the proper function of your vehicle and The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle • Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty includes components that affect vehi- manufacturers to furnish written instructions Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint • cle emissions. to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper Systems Limited Warranty The Warranty and Service Records servicing and function of the components that • Emission Design and Defect Warranty • control emissions. These services, which are Information booklet also contains Emission Performance Warranty listed in the "Warranty and Service Records • detailed information concerning the Information" booklet, are not covered by the These are the federal warranties; other war- warranties that apply to your vehicle. warranty. You will be required to pay for labor ranties are provided as required by state/ and material used. provincial law. Refer to your separate War- ranty and Service Records Information book- Maintenance let for detailed information concerning each Your Volvo passed several major inspections of the warranties. before it was delivered to you, in accordance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance procedures outlined in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, many of which will positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should be performed as indicated. It is recommended that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be retained in case questions arise concerning maintenance.

328 09 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car 09

Owner maintenance As needed: They are specially reinforced to bear the Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to weight of the vehicle. A garage jack can also vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup be placed under the front of the engine sup- and Service Records Information booklet. of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by port frame. Take care not to damage the salt residues. splash guard under the engine. Ensure that The following points can be carried out the jack is positioned so that the vehicle can- Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents between the normally scheduled maintenance not slide off it. Always use axle stands or sim- at the base of the windshield, and from other services. ilar structures. places where they may collect. Each time the car is refueled: If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, • Check the engine oil level. NOTE the front and rear lift arm pads should be • Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, centered under the reinforced lift plates on Complete service information for qualified the inboard edge of the sill rail (see illustra- headlights, and taillights. technicians is available online for purchase tion). Monthly: or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Emission inspection readiness Inspect the tires for wear. Hoisting the vehicle • Check that engine coolant and other fluid What is an Onboard Diagnostic System levels are between the indicated "min" (OBD II)? and "max" markings. OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass engine management system. It stores diag- cleaner and soft paper towels. nostic information about your vehicle's emis- • Wipe driver information displays with a sion controls. It can light the Check Engine soft cloth. light (MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A "fault" is a component or system Visually inspect battery terminals for cor- • that is not performing within an expected rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose range. A fault may be permanent or tempo- terminal connector, or a battery near the rary. OBD II will store a message about any end of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo retailer for additional information. fault. If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the two jack attachments points should be used.

329 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Maintaining your car

How do states use OBD II for emission your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, inspections? serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. Many states connect a computer directly to a • If you recently had service for a lit Check vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can Engine light, or if you had service that then read "faults." In some states, this type of required disconnecting the battery, a inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission period of driving is necessary to bring the test. OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/ How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission highway driving is typically needed to inspection? allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec- Volvo retailer can provide you with more tion for any of the following reasons. information on planning a trip. • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with vehicle may fail inspection. your vehicle's maintenance schedule. • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit, but went out without any action on your part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in your area. • If you had recent service that required disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not ready may fail inspection. How can I prepare for my next OBD II emission inspection? • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was lit but went out without service, have

330 09 Maintenance and specifications

Hood and engine compartment 09

Opening and closing the hood WARNING The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine model. Check that the hood locks properly when closed. WARNING The cooling fan (located at the front of the Engine compartment, overview engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off.

WARNING Before performing any operations in the engine compartment, the ignition should always be completely switched off (in mode 0, see page 89) and there should be no remote keys in the passenger compartment. The gear selector should be in the P (park) position. If the engine has been run-

G031911 ning, wait until it has cooled before touch- Coolant expansion tank ing any components in the engine compartment. Pull the lever located under the left side Power steering fluid reservoir of the dash to release the hood lock. An The distributor ignition system operates at information symbol will illuminate when Dipstick-engine oil very high voltages. Special safety precautions must be followed to prevent injury. the hood is open. Filler cap-engine oil Always turn the ignition off when: Lift the hood slightly. Press the release Cover over brake fluid reservoir • Replacing distributor ignition compo- control (located under the right front edge nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc. of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood. Battery • Do not touch any part of the distributor ignition system while the engine is run- Relay/fuse box ning. This may result in unintended Washer fluid reservoir movements and body injury.

331 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Engine oil

Checking the engine oil Checking and adding oil NOTE The oil level should be checked at regular Before checking the oil: intervals, particularly during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service. • The car should be parked on a level surface. • See page 371 for oil specifications. • If the engine is warm, wait for at least • Also, refer to the Warranty and Service 10 – 15 minutes after the engine has Records information booklet for informa- been switched off. tion on oil change intervals and oil specifications.

CAUTION • Not checking the oil level regularly can result in serious engine damage if the Location of the filler cap and dipstick oil level becomes too low. • Oil that is lower than the specified quality can damage the engine. • Volvo does not recommend the use of oil additives.

• Always add oil of the same type and G021737 viscosity as already used. The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX • Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This marks on the dipstick could cause an increase in oil consumption. Checking the oil 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a • Oil changes should be carried out by a lint-free rag. trained and qualified Volvo service Volvo recommends Castrol oil products technician. 2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check the oil level. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

332 09 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil 09

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to the MIN mark, add approximately 0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil. 4. Recheck the level and add more oil if necessary until the level is near the MAX mark.

WARNING Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

333 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fluids

Coolant CAUTION WARNING • If necessary, top up the cooling sys- • Never remove the expansion tank cap tem with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Anti- while the engine is warm. Wait until the freeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and engine cools. antifreeze). • If it is necessary to top off the coolant • Different types of antifreeze/coolant when the engine is warm, unscrew the may not be mixed. expansion tank cap slowly so that the • If the cooling system is drained, it overpressure dissipates. should be flushed with clean water or premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled with the correct mixture of water/anti- Brake fluid freeze. Location of the coolant reservoir • The cooling system must always be kept filled to the correct level, and the Normally, the coolant does not need to be level must be between the MIN and changed. If the system must be drained, con- MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there sult a trained and qualified Volvo service can be high local temperatures in the technician. engine which could result in damage. See page 372 for information on cooling sys- Check coolant regularly! tem capacities. • Do not top up with water only. This reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it Location of the brake fluid reservoir should freeze. Checking the level Do not use chlorinated tap water in the • The fluid reservoir is concealed under the vehicle's cooling system. round cover at the rear of the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be accessed.

334 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids 09

The brake fluid should always be between the Filling WARNING MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res- 1. Turn and open the cover. ervoir. Check, without removing the cap, that If a problem should occur in the power 2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir. steering system or if the vehicle has no fluid. The level must be between the MIN electrical current and must be towed, it is Fluid type: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F and MAX marks. still possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep in mind that greater effort will be (280 °C), P/N 9437433 required to turn the steering wheel. Replace: The fluid should be replaced Power steering fluid according to the intervals specified in the CAUTION Warranty and Service Records Information booklet. Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking. When driving under extremely hard conditions (mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Always entrust brake fluid changing to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark Check the level frequently. The fluid does not in the reservoir or if a brake-related require changing. The fluid level must be message is shown in the information between the MIN and MAX marks. For display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car capacities and recommended fluid grade, see towed to a trained and qualified Volvo page 372. service technician and have the brake system inspected. • Dot 4 should never be mixed with any other type of brake fluid.

335 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Replacing bulbs

Introduction NOTE CAUTION All bulb specifications are listed on page 341. For information regarding any bulbs Never touch the glass of bulbs with your The following bulbs should only be replaced • not mentioned in this section, please fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- contact your Volvo retailer or a trained vaporize in the heat and will leave a nician: and authorized Volvo service techni- deposit on the reflector, which will damage • Active Bending Lights cian. it. • Daytime running lights, front parking • Always switch off the ignition before lights starting to replace a bulb. WARNING • Front side marker lights • If an error message remains in the dis- • The engine should not be running • Turn signals in the door mirrors play after a faulty bulb has been when changing bulbs. replaced, contact an authorized Volvo • Approach lighting in the door mirrors workshop. • If the engine has been running just prior to replacing bulbs in the head- Interior lighting • • Condensation may form temporarily on light housing, please keep in mind that • Glove compartment lighting the inside of the lenses of exterior components in the engine compart- • Rear parking lights lights such as headlights, fog lights, or ment will be hot. taillights. This is normal and the lights • Rear side marker lights are designed to withstand moisture. • Rear turn signals Normally, condensation will dissipate WARNING after the lights have been on for a • LED bulbs Active Bending Lights* – due to the short time. • high voltage used by these headlights, • The optional Active Bending Light these bulbs should only be replaced bulbs contain trace amounts of mer- by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- cury. These bulbs should always be ice technician. disposed of by a trained and qualified Turn off the lights and remove the Volvo service technician. • remote key from the ignition before changing any bulbs.

336 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs 09

Headlight housing CAUTION 1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into The entire headlight housing must be lifted place. When disconnecting the connector, pull on out when replacing all front bulbs. the connector itself and not on the wiring. 2. Reinsert the headlight housing and locking pins. Check that they are correctly Removing the headlight housing inserted. Unplug the wiring connector by holding down the clip with your thumb. The headlight housing must be properly Pull the connector out with the other in place and the wiring connector cor- hand. rectly reconnected before the lighting is switched on or the remote key is inserted 5. Lift out the headlight housing and place it into the ignition slot. on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. 3. Check that the lights function properly. 6. Replace the defective bulb(s). Removing the cover to access the Pull out the headlight housing's locking Reinserting the headlight housing bulbs pins. Pull the headlight housing straight out.

When reinserting the housing, be sure that the long locking pin is securely in place in both of its retaining clamps.

337 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Replacing bulbs

NOTE 1. Remove the headlight housing from the 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 336). vehicle (see page 336). Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 336. 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see page 337). page 337). 1. Loosen the cover's four retaining screws 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 3. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out. (3-4 turns) with a Torx T20 tool (1). The 4. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder screws should not be removed com- downward. 4. Remove the connector from the bulb. pletely. 5. Press the new bulb into the socket until it 5. Press the new bulb into the socket and 2. Push the cover to the side. snaps into place. It can only be secured turn it clockwise to put it in place. It can 3. Remove the cover. in one position. only be secured in one position. Reinstall the cover in the reverse order. 6. Put the cover back into position and rein- 6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight stall the headlight housing. housing. Low beam, Halogen 7. Put the cover back into position and rein- High beam, Halogen stall the headlight housing.

338 09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs 09

Extra high beam1 7. Reconnect the wiring connector to the 5. Press the new bulb into the holder and bulb holder. turn it clockwise. 8. Put the cover back into position and rein- 6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight stall the headlight housing. housing and turn it clockwise. 7. Reinstall the headlight housing. Turn signals Rear fog lights

1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 336). 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see page 337). 3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the bulb holder. 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 336). 4. Remove the bulb holder from the head- The rear fog lights can be reached from light housing by pulling it straight out. 2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it behind the bumper counterclockwise and pulling it out of the 1. Remove the bulb holder by turning it 5. Insert a new bulb in the holder. It can only headlight housing. be inserted in one way. counterclockwise. 3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb. 6. Press the bulb holder into position in the 2. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing headlight housing. 4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it in and turning it counterclockwise. it in slightly and turning it counterclockwise.

1 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only. }} 339 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Replacing bulbs

3. Insert a new bulb, press it downward and Brake lights and taillights License plate lighting turn it clockwise. 4. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise.

Location of taillight bulbs

The brake lights and taillights are replaced 1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. from inside the cargo area. 2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing 1. Open the panel. and pull it out. 2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it 3. Replace the bulb. counterclockwise. Taillight lens, right side 4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and Parking/side marker lights (LED) 3. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing tighten the screws. it in and turning it counterclockwise. Brake light 4. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it Backup light clockwise.

Turn signal 5. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. Brake lights (LED)

340 09 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs 09

Cargo area lighting Vanity mirror lighting Bulb specifications Removing the mirror glass Lighting func- Wat- Bulb tion tage

Extra high beam 55 H7 LL (models with Active Bending Lights*)

Low beam (hal- 55 H11 LL ogen)

G031942 High beam (hal- 65 H9 ogen) 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so Front turn sig- 24 PY24W that the bulb housing comes loose. 1. Insert a flat screwdriver under the glass nals 2. Replace the bulb. and carefully exert upward pressure to release the retaining lugs. License plate 5 C5W LL 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press lighting it back into the bulb housing. 2. Snap out the lens. Vanity mirror 2 W2x4.6d 3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb type T5 straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do not exert too much pressure on the bulb Front side 5 W3W LL with the pliers to help avoid damaging it. marker lights

Reinstalling the mirror glass Glove compart- 5 SV8.5 1. Put the lens back into position. ment lighting (length 2. Press it into place. 43mm) Rear fog light 21 P21W LL

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 341 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Replacing bulbs

Lighting func- Wat- Bulb tion tage

Backup lights 21 P21W LL

Brake lights 21 P21W LL

Cargo area 10 SV8.5 lighting (length 43mm)

NOTE Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts department for the most up-to-date specifications.

342 09 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid 09

Wiper blades 1. Insert the remote key into the ignition Replacing the windshield wiper blades slot1 and press the START/STOP Service position ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (see page 89 for detailed information about the ignition modes). 2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button again briefly to switch the ignition off. 3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steering wheel lever up and hold it for at least 1 second. > The wipers will then move to the vertical (service) position on the windshield. The wipers can be returned to the normal NOTE Wiper blades in service position position by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in The wiper blades must be in the vertical The windshield wiper blades are different mode I (or by starting the engine). lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is (service) position for replacement, washing or longer than the one on the passenger side. to lift them away from the windshield when CAUTION e.g., removing ice or snow. To put them in this position: If the wiper arms have been folded out from the windshield while in the service CAUTION position, fold them back against the windshield before returning the wipers to the Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in normal position to help avoid scratching position before attempting to move them the paint on the hood. to the service position.

1 Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

343 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Wiper blades and washer fluid

4. Press the wipers back against the wind- 2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at shield. the arrow). To return the wipers from the service position 3. Pull out the blade to release it from the to the normal position, fold the wipers back wiper arm. against the windshield and press the START/ 4. Press the new wiper blade into place and STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the igni- check that it seats securely. tion in mode I (or start the engine). 5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tail- Cleaning gate window. Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs Filling washer fluid the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soap solution or car washing detergent. Replacing the tailgate wiper blade

With the wipers in the service position, fold out the wiper arm from the windshield. Press the button on the wiper blade attachment and pull the wiper blade straight out, parallel with the wiper arm. Location of the washer fluid reservoir The windshield and headlight washers share Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks a common reservoir. into place. G032770 The washer fluid reservoir is located on the Check that the blade is securely in place. driver's side of the engine compartment. Dur- 1. Fold the wiper arm outward. ing cold weather, the reservoir should be

344 09 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid 09 filled with windshield washer solvent containing antifreeze. For capacities, see page 372.

345 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Battery

Warning symbols on the battery Risk of explosion may also further decrease the battery’s starting capacity. Wear protective goggles. • Because the battery’s starting capacity decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven Recycle properly for an extended period of time or if the Keep away from children. vehicle is usually only driven short distances. • Never use a quick charger to charge the battery.

Avoid smoking, open CAUTION flames, and/or sparks. NOTE The infotainment system's energy-saving A used battery should be disposed of in an feature may not function correctly or at all, environmentally responsible manner. Con- and/or a message may be displayed if a See the owner's manual. sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery battery charger or jumper cables are not to a recycling station. connected properly. • The negative terminal on the battery must never be used to connect a Handling jumper cable or a battery charger. Contains corrosive acid. • Check that the battery cables are cor- Only the ground point on the chassis rectly connected and tightened. may be used. • Never disconnect the battery when the See page 126 for an illustration and addi- engine is running (for example, when tional information. replacing the battery). • If the battery is fully discharged a number of times, this may shorten its service life. • The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as the number of starts, driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold

346 09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery 09

WARNING • Never disconnect the battery when the CAUTION engine is running, or when the key is in • Never expose the battery to open the ignition. This could damage the vehi- • Always use distilled or deionized water flame or electric spark. cle's electrical system. (battery water). • Do not smoke near the battery. • The battery should be disconnected from • Never fill above the level mark in the • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do the vehicle when a battery charger is cell. not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, used directly on the battery. skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If • To help keep the battery in good condi- Changing contact occurs, flush the affected area tion, the vehicle should be driven for at immediately with water. Obtain medi- least 15 minutes a week or connected to cal help immediately if eyes are affec- a charger with an automatic charging ted. function. • If the battery is fully discharged a number NOTE of times, this may shorten its service life. Keeping the battery fully charged helps The life of the battery is shortened if it prolong its service life. becomes discharged repeatedly. • The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as driving conditions and cli- Maintenance mate. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery’s starting capacity. • Use a screw driver to open the caps or cover and a flashlight to inspect the level. • Because the battery’s starting capacity decreases with time, it may be necessary • If necessary, add distilled water. The level to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven should never be above the indicator. for an extended period of time or if the • The fluid level should be checked if the vehicle is usually only driven short dis- battery has been recharged. tances. • After inspection, be sure the cap over each battery cell or the cover is securely in place. • Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and properly tightened.

347 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Battery

WARNING WARNING Connect and disconnect the positive and PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! negative cables in the correct sequence. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead com- Removal pounds, chemicals known to the state of Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. from the ignition slot and wait at least 5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so that all information in the vehicle's electrical Installation system can be stored in the control modules. 1. Lower the battery into the battery box. Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover. Release the rubber molding so that the rear cover is free. Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable. Detach the red positive cable 2. Move the battery inward and to the side Detach the ventilation hose from the until it reaches the rear edge of the box. battery 3. Tighten the clamp that secures the bat- Loosen the screw holding the battery tery. clamp. 4. Connect the ventilation hose. Move the battery to the side and lift it up. > Be sure that it is correctly connected to the battery and the vent in the vehicle's body. 5. Connect the red positive cable.

348 09 Maintenance and specifications

Battery 09

6. Connect the black negative cable. 7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal). 8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal). 9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with the clips. (See Removal).

349 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Replacing fuses Location of the fuse boxes There are relay/fuse boxes located in the engine compartment, the passenger compartment, and the cargo area. If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it. To do so: 1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult to remove, a special fuse removal tool is located on the inside of the engine compartment fuse box cover. 2. From the side, examine the curved metal Engine compartment wire in the fuse to see if it is intact. Under the glove compartment If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the same color and amperage (written on the Under the glove compartment fuse). Cargo area If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical system inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system.

350 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses 09

Engine compartment

}} 351 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Engine compartment, upper Pos Function A Pos Function A

Engine compartment, front Circuit breaker 60 Speed-dependent steering 5 Engine compartment, lower force* Circuit breaker 60 Engine Control Module 10 Positions – (ECM), transmission, SRS These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. Fuses in are located under – Heated washer nozzles* 10 . Headlight washers* 20 - A decal on the inside of the cover shows the positions of the fuses. Windshield wipers 30 Lighting panel 5

NOTE – -

• Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be Climate system blower 40 - changed at any time when necessary. • Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are – - relays/circuit breakers and should only be removed or replaced by a trained ABS pump 40 Engine compartment box 5 and qualified Volvo service technician. Auxiliary lights* 20 • There is a special fuse removal tool on ABS valves 20 the underside of the cover. – Horn 15 Engine Control Module (ECM) 10 Pos Function A Active Bending Lights-head- 10 light leveling* Circuit breaker 50 Control module, automatic 15 Central electrical module 20 transmission Circuit breaker 50 ABS 5 Compressor A/C 15 Circuit breaker 60

352 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses 09

Pos Function A

Relay coils 5

Starter motor relay 30

Ignition coils 20

Engine Control Module 10

Injection system, mass air 15 meter, engine control module

A/C compressor, engine 10 valves, engine control module (6-cyl.), solenoids (6-cyl. non-turbo only)

EVAP valve, heated oxygen 15 sensor

Fuel leakage detection 5

–

Cooling fan 80

Electro-hydraulic power 100 steering

}} 353 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Under the glove compartment

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse Positions: fuse box A Pos Function A boxes. Pos Function A 1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up. - Circuit breaker for the info- 40 2. The fuses are accessible. tainment system and for fuses 12-volt socket (cargo area) 15 A decal on the inside of the cover shows the 16-20, Controls in driver's door 20 positions of the fuses. - Controls in front passenger's 20 - door

- Controls in right rear pas- 20 senger's door - Controls in left rear passeng- 20 er's door

354 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses 09

Pos Function A Pos Function A Pos Function A

Keyless drive* 20 Heated rear seat* (driver's 15 Instrument panel 5 side) Power driver's seat* 20 Adaptive cruise control/colli- 10 - sion warning* Power front passenger's seat* 20 Heated front passenger's 15 Courtesy lighting, rain sensor* 7.5 Windshield washers 25 seat* Steering wheel module 7.5 Tailgate window washer Heated driver's seat* 15 Cental locking: fuel filler door 10 Infotainment control module 5 Park assist*, trailer hitch con- 5 trol module*, park assist cam- Electrically heated steering 15 Infotainment system, Sir- 10 era* wheel* iusXM™ satellite radio* All Wheel Drive* control mod- 5 Electrically heated windshield* 15 Infotainment system 15 ule Tailgate unlock 10 Bluetooth hands-free system 5 Active chassis system* 10 Electrical folding rear seat 10 Rear Seat Entertainment sys- 7.5 outboard head restraints* tem (RSE)* Positions: fuse box B Pos Function A Fuel pump 20 Laminated panoramic roof* 5 Courtesy lighting, climate sys- Tailgate wiper 15 Climate system control panel 5 tem sensor - - 12-volt sockets 15 Front courtesy lighting, driv- 7.5 Alarm, On-board diagnostic 5 Heated rear seat* (passeng- 15 er's door power window con- system er's side) trols, power seat(s)*, Home- LInk® Wireless Control Sys- - tem*

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 355 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Pos Function A

Airbag system, occupant 10 weight sensor

Collision warning system* 5

Accelerator pedal, auto-dim 7.5 mirror function, heated rear seats*

Brake lights 5

Laminated panoramic roof* 20

Immobilizer 5

356 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses 09

Cargo area

Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area

Positions Pos Rear fuse box A Pos Rear fuse box A Pos Rear fuse box A Power tailgate* 30 Trailer socket 1* 40 Electric parking brake (left 30 side) - -

Electric parking brake (right 30 - side) NOTE - Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts Heated rear window 30 department for the most up-to-date speci- - fications. Trailer socket 2* 15 -

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 357 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Fuses

Cargo area

Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area

Positions Pos Rear fuse box A Pos Rear fuse box A Pos Rear fuse box A Power tailgate* 30 Trailer socket 1* 40 Electric parking brake (left 30 side) - -

Electric parking brake (right 30 - side) NOTE - Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts Heated rear window 30 department for the most up-to-date speci- - fications. Trailer socket 2* 15 -

358 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care 09

Washing the car considerably and also helps prolong the CAUTION The following points should be kept in mind service life of the wiper blades. During high pressure washing, the when washing and cleaning the car: Wash off the dirt from the underside • • spray mouthpiece must never be (wheel housings, fenders, etc). • The car should be washed at regular closer to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar • In areas of high industrial fallout, more Do not spray into the locks. frequent washing is recommended. spots adhere to the paint and may cause • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can damage. To help prevent corrosion, it is reduce lighting capacity considerably. particularly important to wash the car fre- NOTE Clean the headlights regularly, for quently in the wintertime. When washing the car, remember to example when refueling. • Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. remove dirt from the drain holes in the Special laminated panoramic roof cau- Doing so may cause detergents and wax doors and sills. tions: to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid scratching, use lukewarm water to soften • Always close the laminated panoramic the dirt before you wash with a soft roof and sun shade before washing sponge, and plenty of sudsy water. your vehicle. • Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork • Never use abrasive cleaning agents on as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish the laminated panoramic roof. may be permanently damaged. • Never use wax on the rubber seals • A detergent can be used to facilitate the around the laminated panoramic roof. softening of dirt and oil. • Dry the car with a clean chamois and Exterior components remember to clean the drain holes in the Volvo recommends the use of special clean- doors and rocker panels. ing products, available at your Volvo retailer, • Tar spots can be removed with tar for cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or orna- remover after the car has been washed. mental components such as chromed strips on the exterior of your vehicle. The instruc- A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy • tions for using these products should be fol- water can be used to clean the wiper lowed carefully. Solvents or stain removers blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind- should not be used. shield and wiper blades improves visibility

359 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Vehicle care

CAUTION NOTE WARNING • Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or Condensation may form temporarily on the • When the vehicle is driven immediately rubber components inside of the lenses of exterior lights such after being washed, apply the brakes, as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This including the parking brake, several • Polishing chromed strips can wear is normal and the lights are designed to away or damage the surface times in order to remove any moisture withstand moisture. Normally, condensa- from the brake linings. • Polishes containing abrasive sub- tion will dissipate after the lights have been stances should not be used on for a short time. • Engine cleaning agents should not be used when the engine is warm. This constitutes a fire risk. Automatic car wash CAUTION We do NOT recommend washing your • Before driving into an automatic car car in an automatic wash during the first • Polishing and waxing wash, turn off the optional rain sensor few months (because the paint will not to avoid damaging the windshield wip- • Normally, polishing is not required during have hardened sufficiently). ers. the first year after delivery, however, wax- An automatic wash is a simple and quick ing may be beneficial. • Make sure that side view mirrors, aux- way to clean your car, but it is worth • iliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle remembering that it may not be as thor- any antenna(s) are retracted or must be washed and dried. Tar spots can ough as when you yourself go over the removed. Otherwise there is risk of the be removed with kerosene or tar remover. car with sponge and water. Keeping the machine dislodging them. Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing underbody clean is most important, espe- compound. cially in the winter. Some automatic • Chromed wheels: Clean chrome- washers do not have facilities for washing plated wheels using the same deter- • After polishing use liquid or paste wax. the underbody. gents used for the body of the vehicle. • Several commercially available products Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can contain both polish and wax. permanently stain chrome-plated Waxing alone does not substitute for pol- wheels. • ishing a dull surface. • A wide range of polymer-based waxes can be purchased today. These waxes are easy to use and produce a long-last- ing, high-gloss finish that protects the

360 09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care 09

bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and fabric stain remover. Consult your Volvo Cleaning leather upholstery fading. retailer. 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge • Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct AlcanteraTM suede-like material and squeeze it until the cleaner foams. sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a 2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C). soft cloth and mild soap solution. sponge with circular movements. CAUTION Leather care 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, Volvo does not recommend the use of with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time, do not rub. long-life or durable paint protection coat- sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the 4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a ings, some of which may claim to prevent protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and pitting, fading, oxidation, etc. These coat- towel, and allow the leather to dry com- fading can result. ings have not been tested by Volvo for pletely. compatibility with your vehicle's clear coat. Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy Protecting leather upholstery Some of them may cause the clear coat to leather care kit formulated to clean and beau- 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream soften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused by tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the application of paint protection coatings on a cloth and apply a thin coating of protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner may not be covered under your vehicle's cream to the upholstery with light circular removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream paint warranty. movements. protectant restores a barrier against soil and sunlight. 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. Cleaning the interior Volvo also offers a special leather softener This will help the leather resist staining and Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- that should be applied after the cleaner and protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and follow the instructions included with the and reduces friction between leather and car care product. other finishes in the vehicle. Upholstery care Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four Fabric times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft- more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, ener 943 7429. shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/

361 09 Maintenance and specifications

09 Vehicle care

CAUTION Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Cleaning floor mats Leather Softener 943 7429. The floor mats should be vacuumed or Under no circumstances should gaso- • If there are stains on the steering wheel: brushed clean regularly, especially during line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents winter when they should be taken out for dry- be used on the plastic or the leather Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or ing. Spots on textile mats can be removed since these can cause damage. blood) with a mild detergent. For best protection in • Take extra care when removing stains – Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo such as ink or lipstick since the color- wheel with a solution with 5% ammonia. rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer. ing can spread. For blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) • Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol- of water and one ounce (25g) of salt and Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood vent can damage the seat padding. wipe the stain. surfaces Cleaning interior plastic components should • Start from the outside of the stain and Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate) work toward the center. be done with a cleaning agent specially 1. Same procedure as for type I stains. designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a • retailer. pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing 2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorb- may damage the textile upholstery. ent paper or a towel. • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as Type 3 (dry soil or dust) new jeans or suede garments, may stain the upholstery. 1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush. 2. Same procedure as for type I stains. Cleaning a leather-covered steering wheel CAUTION • Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp Sharp objects, such as rings, could dam- sponge and a neutral soap solution. age the leather on the steering wheel. • Leather should be allowed to breath. Never cover the steering wheel with a Cleaning the seat belts plastic protector. Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild • Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting soap solution. and conditioning the steering wheel with

362 09 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care 09

Touching up paintwork Minor stone chips and scratches Repairing stone chips Material: • Primer – can • Paint – touch-up pen • Brush • Masking tape If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare metal and an undamaged color coat remains, you can add paint immediately after removing dirt. G021832 NOTE Paint code on the model plate1 When touching up the vehicle, it should be 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the Paint damage requires immediate attention to clean and dry. The surface temperature damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the fin- should be above 60 °F (15 °C). any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. ish regularly, for instance washing the vehicle. 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it Touch-up if necessary. with a small brush. Paint repairs require special equipment and 3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any can be applied using a brush. Mix the extensive damage. paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint Minor scratches can be repaired by using coats and let dry after each application. Volvo touch-up paint. 4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want Color code to protect surrounding paint by masking it Make sure you have the right color. The color off code number is stated on the model plate. 5. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of polish.

1 see page 366 for the location of the model plate.

363 Label information...... 366 Specifications...... 368 Overview of information and warning symbols...... 374 Volvo programs...... 377

364 SPECIFICATIONS 10 Specifications

Label information

Location of labels

366 10 Specifications

Label information

List of labels Vehicle Identification Number Model (VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top 10 plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle Codes for color and upholstery, etc. The Identification Number (VIN) should always model plate is located on the rear side of be quoted in all correspondence concern- the B-pillar (the pillar between the front ing your vehicle with the retailer and when and rear passenger doors) and the rear ordering parts. passenger's door must be open in order Vehicle Emission Control Information. to see it. Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand- cable emission standards, as evidenced ards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and by the certification label on the underside Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) stand- of the hood. For further information regar- ards (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to ding these regulations, please consult meet all applicable safety standards, as your Volvo retailer. evidenced by the certification label on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer. Tire inflation pressures. This label indicates the correct inflation pressures for the tires that were on the vehicle when it left the factory. Canadian models have the upper decal; U.S. models have the lower one.

367 10 Specifications

Specifications

Dimensions

Dimension In (mm)

A Wheelbase 109.2 (2774)

B Length 182.8 (4644)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 70.4 (1789)

D Load length, floor 38.3 (972)

E Height 67.4 (1713)

F Load height 31.6 (802)

G Track, front 64.3 (1632)

368 10 Specifications

Specifications

Dimension In (mm)

H Track, rear 62.4 (1586) 10

I Load width, floor 42.9 (1090)

J Width 74.4 (1891)

K Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 83.5 (2120)

L Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 74.4 (1891)

Weights Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight 6-cyl. FWDA: 5200 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 2360 kg 6-cyl. AWDB: 5355 lbs 6-cyl. AWD:2430 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 5380 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD:2440 kg

Capacity weight 950 lbs (all models) 430 kg (all models)

Permissible axle weights, front 6-cyl. FWD: 2740 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 1245 kg 6-cyl. AWD: 2800 lbs 6-cyl. AWD:1270 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2840 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD:1290 kg

Permissible axle weights, rear 6-cyl. FWD: 2545 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 1155 kg 6-cyl. AWD: 2640 lbs 6-cyl. AWD:1200 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2645 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD:1200 kg

Curb weight 3890 - 4170 lbs 1760 - 1900 kg

}} 369 10 Specifications

Specifications

Category USA Canada

10 Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg

Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs Without brakes: 750 kg With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg

A FWD = Front Wheel Drive B AWD = All Wheel Drive

Engine specifications Specification/Model 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0TA

Engine designation B6324S5 B6324S4 B6304T4

Output (kW/rps) 179/107 171/108 224/93

Output (hp/rpm) 240/6400 230/6500 300/5600

Torque (Nm/rps) 320/53 300/55 440/35 – 70

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 236/3200 221/3300 325/2100 – 4200

No. of cylinders 6 6 6

Bore (in/mm) 3.3/84 3.3/84 3.23/82

Stroke (in/mm) 3.78/96 3.78/96 3.67/93.2

370 10 Specifications

Specifications

Specification/Model 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0TA

Displacement 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.) 10

Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.3:1 9.3:1

A This engine may not be available on all markets

Oil specifications Oil additives must not be used. Extreme engine operation SAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 require- Full synthetic engine oil meeting the minimum Oil viscosity ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower quality oils ments is recommended for driving in areas Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life may not offer the same fuel economy, engine with sustained low temperatures. under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide performance, or engine protection. good fuel economy and engine protection. Refer to the warranty and Service Records See the viscosity chart. information booklet for information on oil change intervals and oil type requirements.

NOTE This vehicle comes from the factory with synthetic oil.

Viscosity chart

371 10 Specifications

Specifications

Oil volume

10 Engine model Volume (incl. filter) 3.2 (6-cyl.) B6324S4/S5 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

3.0T (6 cyl.) B6304T4 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

Other fluids and lubricants Fluid System Volume Specification

Transmission oilA Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.4 US qts (7 liters) Transmission fluid AW-1

Coolant 3.2 (6-cyl.) 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with water (50/50 mix), see pack- aging. 3.0T 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters)

Air conditioning All models 1.7 lbs (770 g) Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a), PAG oil

Brake fluid 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F (>280 °C)

Power steering 1.26 US qts (1.2 liters) Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters) Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with water. 4.7 US qts (4.5 litersB)

Fuel tank volume 3.0T/3.2 6 cyl. 18.5 US gallons (70 liters)

A Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions. B Models without headlight washers

372 10 Specifications

Specifications

Electrical system CAUTION General information If the battery is replaced, replace it with a 10 12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter- battery of the same cold start capacity and nator. Single pole system in which the chas- reserve capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery). sis and engine block are used as conductors. The negative terminal is connected to the chassis.

Performance, battery

Engine 3.2 6-cyl./3.0T

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacity (A) 520 – 700

Reserve capacity (min) 100 – 135

WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead com- pounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

373 10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

Introduction Symbols in the main instrument panel Indicator symbols in the instrument The symbols in the vehicle's various displays panel 10 Warning symbols in the instrument are divided into three main categories: panel Symbol Description Pg. • Warning symbols Symbol Description Pg. no. • Indicator symbols no. Fault in the Active Bend- 82 • Information symbols ing Light (ABL)*system The following tables list the most common Low oil pressure 84 symbols, their meaning and the pages in this Malfunction indicator 82 manual that provide more detailed informa- Parking brake 84 light tion. Anti-lock brake system 83 NOTE SRS airbags 84 (ABS) Rear fog lights on 83 Not all of the symbols shown in the follow- Seat belt reminder 84 ing tables are available in all models or on all markets. Local variations may occur. Stability system (DSTC), 83 Generator not charging 84 Hill Descent Control, Warning symbol Trailer Stability Assist* Fault in the brake system 84 : The red warning symbol illuminates to Tire pressure monitoring 83 indicate a problem related to safety and/or sensor (TPMS) drivability. A message will also appear in the Warning symbol 85 main instruments panel's display. Low fuel level 83 Information symbol Information symbol, see 83 : The information symbol illuminates text in information dis- and a text message is displayed to provide play the driver with necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems. High beam indicator 80

374 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

Symbol Description Pg. Symbol Description Pg. no. Symbol Description Pg. no.

no. Camera sensor, 173166 Driver Alert System* 180 10 laser sensor (Lane Departure Left turn signal indicator 80 Warning)

Right turn signal indica- 80 Collision Warning 175 Driver Alert System* 180 tor with Full Auto-brake (Lane Departure and Pedestrian Warning) Stability system , Sport 142 Detection* mode Driver Alert System* 180 Active Bending 102 (Lane Departure Information symbols in the instrument Lights (ABL)* Warning) panel Fuel tank on pas- 280 Symbol Description Pg. no. Driver Alert System* 177 senger's side of the Adaptive Cruise 149 vehicle Control * Information symbols in the center Adaptive Cruise 149 Driver Alert System* 177 console display Control * Symbol Description Pg. Adaptive Cruise 149 no. Control * Parking brake 137 Audio files 250 Adaptive Cruise 149 Rain sensor* 107 Control * (Distance CD folder 250 alert) Active High Beams 100 Video files 250 Radar sensor* 156 (AHB)*

Windshield sensor* 100 Bluetooth-connected 260 cell phone

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 375 10 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

Symbol Description Pg. 10 no.

BluetoothTM hands-free 260

HD radio 242

Park Assist* 183

Information symbols in the ceiling console Symbol Description Pg. no.

Seat belt reminder 19

Occupant Weight Sensor 26

376 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Specifications

Volvo programs

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON 10 CALL roadside assistance. Additional information, features, and benefits are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment. If you require assistance, dial: In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63- VOLVO) In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo supports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certified technicians have demonstrated a high degree of competence in specific areas. Besides passing exams, each technician must also have worked in the field for two or more years before a certificate is issued. These professional technicians are best able to analyze vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition.

377 11 Index

1, 2, 3 ... All Wheel Drive...... 131 Automatic transmission Ambient temperature sensor...... 86 Geartronic...... 129 12-volt sockets...... 226 general description...... 128, 129 Anti-freeze...... 276, 334 oil...... 372 Anti-lock brake system shiftlock override...... 131 warning light...... 81, 83 11 A Axle weight...... 307 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...... 135 ABS (anti-lock brake system)...... 135 Approach lighting...... 61, 106 Accessory installation warning...... 13 Audio system B Active chassis system...... 223 AUX/USB sockets...... 254 ® Battery Active high beams...... 100 Bluetooth devices...... 257 Bluetooth® hands-free system...... 259 changing...... 347, 348 Active yaw control...... 142 Bluetooth streaming audio...... 257 maintenance...... 347 Adaptive brake lights...... 134 getting started...... 231 remote key, replacing...... 64 Adaptive cruise control...... 149, 151 HD digital radio...... 242 specifications...... 373 queue assist...... 154 introduction...... 230 warning symbols...... 346 Airbags media player...... 249 Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 191 disconnecting the front passenger’s overview...... 230 Bluetooth cell phone connection...... 259 radio functions...... 240 side...... 26, 27 Booster cushion, integrated...... 51 front...... 22 SiriusXM™ satellite radio...... 244 Booster cushions...... 47 inflatable curtain...... 32 sound settings...... 235 side impact...... 30 steering wheel keypad...... 231 Brake lights...... 134 voice control...... 268 Air conditioning...... 212 Brake system Auto-dim rearview mirror...... 113 ABS...... 135 Air distribution...... 208 Automatic locking retractor...... 39 Brake pad inspection...... 134 Air distribution table...... 215 checking fluid level...... 334 Air vents...... 209 emergency brake assistance...... 135

378 11 Index

fluid...... 372 Check engine light...... 81 Collision warning system...... 169, 170 general information...... 134 Check Engine warning light...... 82 Compass in rearview mirror...... 115 Bulbs Child restraints Conserving electrical current...... 276 cargo area lighting...... 341 recalls and registration...... 40 Controls, center console...... 231 headlights...... 336, 337, 338 Child restraint systems...... 41 introduction...... 336 Convertible seats...... 45 booster cushions...... 47 11 license plate lights...... 340, 341 Coolant...... 334, 372 convertible seats...... 45 specifications...... 341 infant seats...... 43 Cooling system, general information...... 275 taillight...... 340 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 48 Corner Traction Control...... 142 top tether anchors...... 50 Courtesy lighting...... 104, 105 C Child safety...... 38 Crash event data...... 9 booster cushions...... 47 Crash mode...... 36 Camera, Park Assist...... 187 child restraint systems...... 41 convertible seats...... 45 Cruise control...... 147, 148 Capacity weight...... 307 infant seats...... 43 adaptive...... 149 Cargo area Child safety locks...... 54 Curb weight...... 307 changing bulbs...... 341 Current, conserving...... 276 steel grid...... 287 City Safety™...... 163 Cargo area cover...... 287 Climate system...... 213 air distribution...... 208, 215 Cargo area net...... 288 air vents...... 209 D Catalytic converter...... 281 Interior Air Quality System...... 208 Daytime running lights...... 99 Cell phone, hands-free connection...... 259 introduction...... 207 Defroster...... 213 Cell phone voice control...... 268 passenger compartment filter...... 208 refrigerant...... 207 Detachable key blade...... 64 Central locking system, introduction...... 58 Clock, setting...... 87 Dimensions...... 368 Chains...... 310 Cold weather driving...... 276

379 11 Index

Disconnecting the front passenger’s air- Emission inspection readiness...... 329 Fog lights...... 83 bag...... 26, 27 Engine rear...... 103, 339 Dome lighting...... 104, 105 overheating...... 84 Four C (active chassis system)...... 223 Door mirrors...... 112 specifications...... 370 Front airbags...... 22 starting...... 123 Driver alert...... 177 disconnecting passenger’s side air- 11 switching off...... 126 bag...... 26, 27 Driver distraction warning...... 13 Engine compartment overview...... 331 Front park assist...... 183, 185 Driving economically...... 274 Engine Drag Control (EDC)...... 142 Front seats...... 90, 92 Driving in cold weather...... 276 Engine oil...... 371 Fuel filler cap...... 281 Driving through water...... 275 checking...... 332 Fuel filler door, opening...... 280 low pressure warning light...... 83 volumes...... 372 Fuel level warning light...... 83 E Engine remote start (ERS)...... 125 Fuel requirements...... 278, 279 Fuel tank volume...... 372 ECC...... 212, 214 Environment...... 12 Fuses...... 350, 351, 354, 357, 358 Eco guide...... 132 Eyelets for anchoring loads...... 285 Economical driving...... 274 Electrically heated steering wheel...... 98 F G Electric parking brake...... 137 Garage door opener Electronic Climate Control...... 210, 212, 214 Federal Clean Air Act...... 328 HomeLink® Wireless Control System. 120 air distribution table...... 215 Flat tires Interior Air Quality System...... 214 repairing with tire sealing system...... 312 Gasoline requirements...... 279 Emergency locking retractor...... 39 Floor mats Gas tank volume...... 372 Emergency starting...... 126 cleaning...... 362 Gauges...... 79 placing correctly...... 123 Emergency towing...... 293 Geartronic...... 129 Fluid specifications...... 372

380 11 Index

Geartronic automatic transmission...... 129 High beams...... 100 Infotainment Generator warning light...... 84 active...... 100 Menu navigation...... 233 Glossary of tire terminology...... 306 Hill Start Assist (HSA)...... 128 Infotainment system...... 230 Hoisting the vehicle...... 329 AUX/USB sockets...... 254 Grocery bag holder...... 285 ® ® Bluetooth devices...... 257 Gross vehicle weight...... 307 HomeLink Wireless Control System...... 120 Bluetooth® hands-free system...... 259 11 Home safe lighting...... 105 getting started...... 231 Hood, opening/closing...... 331 media player...... 249 H Horn...... 97 menus...... 231, 233 radio functions...... 240 Hazard warning flashers...... 104 sound settings...... 235 HD digital radio...... 242 I voice control...... 268 Headlights Inspection readiness...... 329 Active Bending Lights...... 102 Ignition modes...... 88 Instrument lighting...... 102 active high beams...... 100 Immobilizer...... 60 "theater" lighting...... 102 changing bulbs...... 337, 338 Important information...... 6 Instrument overview...... 78, 79 daytime running lights...... 99 high/low beams...... 100 Indicator lights...... 79, 81, 83 Instrument panel...... 79, 199 high beam flash...... 100 Infant seats...... 43 Integrated two-stage booster cushion...... 51 tunnel detection...... 102 Inflatable Curtain...... 32 Interior Air Quality System...... 208 Headlight washers...... 108 Inflation pressure...... 301 Interior lighting...... 104, 105 Head restraints, rear seat...... 93, 94 Inflation pressure table...... 303 iPod® connector (audio system)...... 254 Heated oxygen sensors...... 282 Information and warning symbols, table ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 48 Heated rear seats...... 211 of...... 374 Heated steering wheel...... 98 Information lights...... 79, 81, 83 Heated windshield...... 113, 213

381 11 Index

J Loading the vehicle...... 283, 307 retractable...... 112 roof loads...... 286 vanity...... 226 Jack Locking...... 70 Motor oil attaching...... 318 tailgate...... 71 checking...... 332 location of...... 318 Locking the vehicle...... 61 volumes...... 372 Jump starting...... 126 11 Locks, child safety...... 54 MY CAR...... 201 Low beams...... 100 K Low oil pressure warning light...... 83 N

Key blade...... 58, 64, 67 Net in cargo area...... 288 Keyless drive M general description...... 67 starting the vehicle...... 123 Main instrument panel...... 199 O Maintenance...... 328 hoisting the vehicle...... 329 Occupant safety...... 16 L performed by the owner...... 329 Occupant weight sensor...... 26, 27 Malfunction indicator light...... 82 Octane recommendations...... 279 Labels Media player (infotainment system)...... 249 list of...... 367 Odometer, trip...... 86 location of...... 366 Menu...... 201 Oil Laminated panoramic roof...... 117 Messages in the instrument panel...... 199 checking...... 332 volumes...... 372 LATCH anchors...... 48 Mirrors defroster...... 113 Oil quality...... 371 Leather care...... 361 power door...... 112 OK button...... 199 Lighting panel...... 99 rearview, auto-dim function...... 113 On Call Roadside Assistance...... 377 Load anchoring eyelets...... 285

382 11 Index

Outside temperature sensor...... 86 Power steering Rearview mirror Overhead courtesy lighting...... 104, 105 fluid...... 335 auto-dim function...... 113 speed-dependent...... 223 compass...... 115 Overheating, engine...... 84 Power steering fluid...... 372 Rear window defroster...... 113 Oxygen sensors, heated...... 282 Power tailgate...... 283 Recalls, child restraints...... 40 Power windows...... 110 Refrigerant...... 372 11 P laminated glass...... 111 Refueling...... 278, 279 Pregnancy, using seat belts during...... 20 fuel filler cap...... 281 Paint, touching up...... 363 PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 126, 348, 373 fuel filler door...... 280 Park assist...... 183, 185 fuel tank volume...... 372 Park Assist Camera...... 187 Registering child restraints...... 40 Parking brake R Remote key...... 58 electric, applying/releasing...... 137 approach lighting...... 61 warning light...... 83 Radio immobilizer...... 60 SiriusXM™ satellite radio...... 244 Parking lights...... 103 key blade...... 58, 64 Radio functions...... 240 locking the vehicle...... 61 Personal Car Communicator, unique HD digital radio...... 242 Personal Car Communicator...... 61, 62 functions...... 62 replacing the battery...... 64 Rain sensor...... 107 Polishing...... 360 unlocking the vehicle...... 61 Rear fog lights...... 103, 339 Power front seat Remote key/PCC memory function...... 91 Rear park assist...... 183, 185 common functions...... 61 with keyless drive...... 92 Rear seat head restraints...... 94 Reporting safety defects...... 17 Power meter...... 132 Rear seats Roadside Assistance...... 377 Power mirrors...... 112 center head restraint...... 93 Road sign information (RSI)...... 145 defroster...... 113 folding...... 93 heated...... 211 Rollover Protection System (ROPS)...... 35

383 11 Index

Roll Stability Control (RSC)...... 35 Shiftlock...... 9 Steering wheel Roof loads...... 286 override...... 131 adjusting...... 97 Side door mirrors...... 112 heated...... 98 horn...... 97 Side impact airbags...... 30 keypad...... 97, 201, 231 S Sign information (RSI)...... 145 11 Steering wheel paddles...... 97 SiriusXM™ satellite radio...... 244 Safety, occupant...... 16 Stone chips, touching up...... 363 Snow chains...... 310 Safety defects, reporting...... 17 Storage spaces...... 224 Snow tires...... 310 Seat belt Studded tires...... 310 reminder...... 19 Spare tire...... 311 Sunroof Seat belts Speed-dependent steering...... 223 laminated panoramic roof...... 117 Automatic locking retractor/Emer- Spin control...... 142 Sun shade...... 110 gency locking retractor...... 39 SRS...... 21 buckling...... 18 Supplemental restraint system...... 21 maintenance...... 18 Stability system...... 142, 143 warning light...... 84 pretensioners...... 18 Corner Traction Control (CTC)...... 142 Symbols, overview...... 374 reminder...... 18 Engine Drag Control (EDC)...... 142 reminder warning light...... 84 indicator light...... 83 securing child restraint Starting the engine...... 123 T systems...... 43, 45, 47 remote start...... 125 unbuckling...... 18 with keyless drive...... 123 Tailgate use during pregnancy...... 20 Starting the vehicle driving with it open...... 274 using...... 18 after a crash (crash mode)...... 36 locking/unlocking...... 71 opening manually...... 72 Seats, front...... 90, 91 Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...... 60 power operated...... 283 Sensus...... 198 Steel grid in cargo area...... 287 wiper/washer...... 108 Tailgate wipers...... 344

384 11 Index

Taillights, changing bulbs...... 340 tire sealing system...... 312 Two-stage booster cushion...... 51 Temperature sensor tread wear indicator...... 299 ambient...... 86 uniform tire quality grading...... 309 Temporary spare tire...... 311 Tire sealing system...... 312 U Top tether anchors (child restraint sys- Three-way catalytic converter...... 281 Uniform Tire Quality Grading...... 309 tems)...... 50 11 Tire designations...... 304 Unlocking the tailgate...... 71 Touching up paint...... 363 Tire inflation pressure...... 303 Unlocking the vehicle...... 61, 70 Towing a trailer...... 290, 291 Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 322, 323 trailer hitch...... 291 Upholstery care...... 361 indicator light...... 83 Towing the vehicle...... 293 Tires...... 298 age...... 298 Traction control...... 142 V changing from summer to winter...... 299 Trailer towing...... 290, 291 glossary of terms...... 306 trailer hitch...... 291 Vanity mirror...... 226 improving economy...... 299 Transmission changing bulbs...... 341 inflation pressure...... 301 general description...... 128, 129 Vehicle dimensions...... 368 inflation pressure table...... 303 Hill Start Assist...... 128 Vehicle Event Data...... 9 load ratings...... 302 oil...... 372 rotation...... 298 shiftlock override...... 131 Vehicle loading...... 283, 307 Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)..... 324 roof loads...... 286 Tread wear indicator...... 299 snow...... 310 Vehicle maintenance...... 328 Trip computer...... 216 spare...... 311 performed by the owner...... 329 specifications...... 302 Trip odometers...... 86 Vehicle weights...... 369 speed ratings...... 302 Trips, long distance...... 276 storing...... 300 Voice control Tunnel detection...... 102 studded...... 310 cell phones...... 268 tire pressure monitoring system...... 322 Turn signals...... 104 Volvo and the environment...... 12 indicator lights...... 83

385 11 Index

Volvo maintenance...... 328 Windows Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance...... 377 power...... 110 sun shade...... 110 Volvo programs...... 377 Windshield Volvo Sensus...... 198 heated...... 113, 213 11 rain sensor...... 107 washers...... 108 W wipers/washers...... 107

Warning flashers, hazard...... 104 Windshield washer fluid...... 344, 372 Warning lights...... 79, 81, 83 Windshield wipers...... 343 service position...... 343 Warning symbol...... 85 Wiper blades Warning system, collision...... 169, 170 replacing...... 343 Warranties...... 328 replacing tailgate wiper...... 344 Washer fluid...... 344, 372 Washers headlight...... 108 windshield...... 107 Water, driving through...... 275 Waxing...... 360 Weights...... 369 Wheels...... 298 changing...... 318 storing...... 300 Whiplash Protection System...... 33

386